Pro-Server with Pro-Studio for Windows Operation

Add to my manuals
417 Pages

advertisement

Pro-Server with Pro-Studio for Windows Operation | Manualzz

Operation Manual

Copyright 2004, Digital Electronics Corporation

All right reserved. Made in Japan

PREF A CE

Thank you for purchasing Digital’s “Pro-Server with Pro-Studio for Windows” for use with Digital’s GP series touch panels.

To ensure correct use of this product, be sure to carefully read the manuals included and keep them nearby so that you can refer to them whenever required.

NO TE

(1) The copyrights to all programs and manuals included in the “Pro-Server with Pro-Studio for

Windows” (hereinafter referred to as “this product”) are reserved by the Digital Electronics

Corporation. Digital grants the use of this product to its users as described in the “Software

Operating and License Conditions” section. Any actions violating the above-mentioned conditions are prohibited by both Japanese and foreign regulations.

(2) The contents of this manual have been thoroughly checked. However, if you should find any errors or omissions in this manual, please contact your local representative and inform them of your findings.

(3) Please be aware that Digital Electronics Corporation shall not be held liable by the user for any damages, losses, or third party claims arising from the uses of this product.

(4) Differences may occur between the descriptions found in this manual and the actual functioning of this product. The latest information about this product is provided in the accompanying data files (i.e. Readme.txt files, etc.) and/or separate documents. Please consult these sources as well as this manual prior to use.

(5) Even though the information contained in and displayed by this product may be related to intangible or intellectual properties of the Digital Electronics Corporation or third parties, the

Digital Electronics Corporation shall not warrant or grant the use of said properties to any users and/or other third parties.

(6) Digital Electronics Corporation does not warrant that any intellectual rights of this software and the system constructed by installing this software are not issued.

© Copyright 2005 Digital Electronics Corporation All rights reserved.

For the rights to trademarks and trade names, see “TRADEMARK RIGHTS”

1

The company names and product names used in this manual are the trade names, trademarks (including registered trademarks), and service marks of their respective companies.

This product omits individual descriptions of each of these rights.

Trademark/Tradename

Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows 98, Windows 98 SE,

Windows Me, Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP,

Windows Explorer, Active X, eMbedded Visual C++, eMbedded Visual Basic, Excel, Access

Intel, Pentium, MMX

Pro-face

VGA, PC/AT

FIX32, FIX-MMI, FIX-FA, iFIX

Right Holder

Microsoft, U.S.

Intel, U.S

Digital Electronics Corporation

IBM, U.S.

Intellution, U.S.

The following terms used in this manual differ from the above mentioned formal trade names and trademarks.

Term used in this manual

Windows 98

Windows 98 SE

Winoows Me

Windows NT

Windows 2000

Windows XP

Formal Trade Name or Trademark

Microsoft

Windows

98 Operating System

Microsoft

Windows

98 SE Operating System

Microsoft

Windows

Me Operating System

Microsoft

Windows

NT Operating System

Microsoft

Windows

2000 Operating System

Microsoft

Windows

XP Operating System

02

HO W T O USE THIS MANU AL

Structure of This Manual

This manual, titled “Pro-Server with Pro-Studio for Windows Operation Manual” describes how to use the

“Pro-Server with Pro-Studio for Windows” software, hereinafter referred to as “this software”

The following table describes the GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows software’s manuals, which are often referred to in this manual.

Vol. 1

Vol. 2

Vol. 3

Vol. 4

Operation Manual

Tag Reference Manual

Parts List

Device/PLC Connection

Manual

Describes the procedures for the installation and operation of GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows.

Includes detailed descriptions on the “tags” used to specify the functions used on the GP’s screen.

Describes the library of pre-made Parts included with this product as well as a variety of diagram symbols.

Describes the procedures to create connections between GP series units and other manufacture PLCs.

In addition to this manual, information on additional/modified functions may be provided as data files.

03

T ABLE OF CONTENTS

PREF A CE

NO TE

HO W T O USE

THIS MANU

AL

T ABLE OF CONTENTS

MANU AL SYMBOLS AND TERMINOLOGY

PRECA UTIONS

P A

CKA

GE CONTENTS

OPERA TING ENVIR ONMENT

Chapter 1 Intr oduction

1.1

Outline

1.2

What is the 2-W a y Driver?

1.3

System Configuration

1.4

Application Interfaces

1.4.1 DDE function Outline .....................................................................................................

SRAM Bac kup Data Stora g e Function

1.5

Pr o vider Inf ormation Outline

Pr o viding Inf ormation to the Host

Pr o viding Inf ormation between GPs

Action Feature Over vie w

1.6

Over vie w of Data Vie w

1.7

Configuring the System

Chapter 2 Pr o-Ser ver Fundamentals

2.1

Installing the Software

2.2

Star ting and Exiting the Software

Using Pr o-Studio

Exiting Pr o-Studio

Star ting and Exiting Pr o-Ser ver

2.3

Screen Item Names and Functions

04

3.1

Registering Netw ork Entr

Registering a Netw ork Node

Sear c hing a Netw ork Node

3.2

Registering Symbols

Impor ting Symbols

Impor ting C-P ac ka g e Symbol

Chec king C-P ac ka g e Symbol

3.3

Registering Pr o vider Data

Chec king f or Pr o vider Data Err or s

3.4

Using the DDE Function

3.5

Using the VB A Suppor

3.6

Sa ving Bac kup Data in SRAM

3.7

De vice Data Bac kup and Restoration

De vice Data Bac kup

Restoring De vice Data

3.8

GP Capture Data Sa ving Function

3.9

Security Function

User Le vel P ass w or d Settings

Remote P ass w or d Setup

Configuring the Netw ork

Configuring Ethernet Car ds

Special Pr otocol

Ad dress f or Windo ws Computer

05

4.1

Over vie w

A v ailab le Action Items

4.2

Registering Action Items

Setting Action P arameter s

Registering Pr o vider Inf ormation

4.3

Registering Action Item P arameter s

“Star t Application” Action Item

Alarm Log (with Sound Aler t Feature)

A utomatic Do wnload of GP Filing Data

A utomatic Upload of GP Filing Data

A utomatic Upload of Access Data

A utomatic Do wnload of Access Data

Do wnload Recipe data f or Excel

Do wnload fr om the database

Writes Data fr om CSV file

4.4

Using ‘Create repor t using Excel’ Action

Registration Pr ocedure of ‘Create repor t using Excel’ Action

Inf ormation

Writab le to the Repor

Creating the Repor t Pr ototype

Setting the Repor t Action

Creating Command P anel (Man ual Star t)

Registering Pr o vider Inf ormation (A uto Star t)

When Registering/Using ‘Create repor t using Excel’ Action

5.1

T ransf erring Data to GPs

Chapter 6

T ools

6.1

De vice Monitoring

6.2

GP Status Monitoring

6.3

Read P erf ormance Measuring

T ool

6.4

Log

Vie wer

2W a y Log Vie wer

Pull-Do wn Men u of Eac h Log Vie wer Men u

Switc hing Between Online and Offline Modes

06

Chapter 7 Data Vie

7.1

Data Vie w Over vie w

7.2

De vice Vie w

Setting Sampling T ar g et De vice

Pla ybac k Feature

7.3

GP-Vie wer

Star ting GP-Vie wer

Setting Dra wing

Pla ybac k Feature

7.4

Chec king the Data Sampling Status

7.5

System Time Bar

8.1

T ransf erring Netw ork Pr oject Files

8.2

T ransf erring Onl y Updated Screen Data to GPs

9.1

Simple DLL (Pr oEasy

.DLL) Function

De vice Read/Write Function

System and Other Contr ol Functions

Precautions When Using Function

9.2

Examples of Simple DLL Function

9.2.3 Using simple DLL functions with Visual Basic .NET

Chapter 10 OPC Ser ver

OPC Ser ver

Connecting fr om an OPC Client

07

A.1

DDE Function Details

DDE Ad dress

De vice Ad dress Options

A.2

Err or Messa g es

Pr o-Ser ver with Pr o-Studio f or Windo ws Err or Messa g es

2-W a y Driver Err or Messa g es and Syslog Features

A.3

Scale Con ver sion using Excel

A.4

GP Ethernet Settings

A.5

Optimizing Comm unication Speed

A.6

Changing Windo ws XP Security Le vel

08

MANU AL SYMBOLS AND TERMINOLOGY

This manual uses the following symbols and terminology.

If you have any questions about the contents of this manual, please contact your local GP distributor.

Also, If you have any question about your personal computer or Windows, please contact your local distributor or manufacturer.

Safety Symbols and Terms

This manual uses the following symbols and terms for important information related to the correct and safe operation of this product.

Symbol

Warning

Description

Incorrect operation resulting from negligence of this instruction may cause death or serious injury.

Caution

Incorrect operation resulting from negligence of this instruction may cause injury or damage to equipment.

Indicates Instructions/Procedures that must be performed to ensure correct product use.

Indicates Actions/Procedures that should not be performed.

General Information Symbols and Terms

This manual uses the following symbols and term for general information.

Symbol Description

Provides hints on correct use, or supplementary information.

Reference

Pro-Server with

Pro-Studio for

Windows

GP-PRO/PB III

C-Package

PLC

FGW

Indicates (manual name, page number) related information.

Downloading Ethernet (2-Way Driver) information to the GP allows the Host PC to use the network to send and receive data from a PLC, via the GP.

Includes the new GP-PRO/PB III for Windows and Pro-

Control Editor software. This single package allows you to perform a aide variety of tasks, from screen creation and editing to logic programming.

Acronym for Programmable Logic Controller.

Abbreviation for Factory Gateway

09

PRECA UTIONS

Product Usage Precautions

To prevent program malfunctions or accidents, be sure to observe the following instructions:

Warning

Touch panel switches should NOT be used for a device’s Emergency Stop switch. Generally speaking, all industrial machinery/systems must be equipped with a mechanical emergency stop switch that can only be operated by people. Also, for other kinds of systems, similar mechanical switches must be provided to ensure safe operation of that system.

Cautions

• Do not turn off your personal computer’s power switch during the execution of a program. Also, be sure your PC “Power Management” area’s “System Standby” and “Turn off hard disk” are set to

“Never” .

• Do not change the contents of this product’s project files using the Text Editor software.

CD-ROM Usage Precautions

To prevent CD-ROM damage or malfunctions, please observe the following instructions:

• Do not remove a CD-ROM disk from the CD-ROM drive while the operation lamp is lit.

• Do not touch the CD-ROM recording surface.

• Do not store the CD-ROM disk in a place where it may be exposed to extremely high or low temperatures, high humidity, or dust.

010

P A CKA GE CONTENTS

The Pro-Server with Pro-Studio for Windows package includes the following items. Check that there are no missing items before using the software.

Pro-Server with Pro-Studio for Windows

Application CD-ROM

User Registration (Japanese/English)

Japanese English

Installation Guide (Japanese/English)

(Front)

Japanese

(Back)

English

011

OPERA TING ENVIR ONMENT

Pro-Server with Pro-Studio for Windows

Item

Personal Computer

Specification

PC/AT compatible

Display

Hard Disk Space

Requirements

VGA (640 x 480) or higher

20 MB or more

Memory Requirements

CD-ROM Drive

32 MB or more

Windows compatible

OS Requirements

*

1 Windows 98 (English or Japanese)

Windows Me (English or Japanese)

Related software

Windows NT 4.0 (English or Japanese)

Windows 2000 (English or Japanese)

Windows XP (English or Japanese)

Microsoft Access 97 or later

Microsoft Excel 97 or later

Browser (IE V4.0 or later)

Visual Studio 6.0 SP3 or higher

Supported languages Japanese, English

Printer

Mouse

Any printers that your OS supports

Windows compatible

Ethernet Board

Network Configuration TCP/IP Protocol

Additional Items

10BASE-2/5/T, 100BASE-T

Ethernet Hub, Ethernet cables, etc.

Remark

Pentium 133MHz or faster processor

64 bit color or higher

30 MB or more is recommended

128 MB or more is recommended

*

2

*

2

Service Pack 3.0 or higher

*

2

When using action contents

When using Simple DLL Function

Mouse is required for operation.

Set up from Control Panel.

* 3

User supplied

The following operating environment is required when you use the OPC Server.

Item

OS Requirements

Hard Disk Space

Memory

Specification

Windows NT 4.0

Windows 2000

Windows XP

100 MB or more

64 MB or more

Remark

Service Pack 3.0 or higher

*1 Pro-Server Ver. 4.5 does not support Windows95.

*2 You can not use this feature with the OPC Server.

*3 Until the TCP/IP protocol is set, Pro-Server with Pro-Studio cannot be used.

• Depending on the type of Ethernet hub used, Pro-Server may be unable to transmit data. Be sure to test and confirm the compatibility of Pro-Server with your Ethernet network prior to installing a complete Pro-Server with

Pro-Studio for Windows system.

• When using a Switching Hub, if the GP and the Switch Hub are started at the same time, a communication error can occur. If the Switching Hub cannot be started first, Set the GP’s [START TIME] to slow the start of the GP.

012

When installing and using the GP-Viewer, the following system environment is required.

Related Software

Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver. 5.0 or higher

Includes JavaVM

(Ver.5.0.3176 or higher)

• When using Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver. 5.0, some of the features may not display as desired. To solve this problem, please use Microsoft Internet

Explorer Ver. 5.01 or later, in combination with the latest version of Microsoft

Java VM. The latest versions of Microsoft Internet Explorer and Microsoft Java

VM can be downloaded from Microsoft’s homepage.

• When using GP-Viewer on a PC with GP-Web installed, please be sure the version of GP-Web is 1.5 or later.

013

2-Way Driver

Hardware

Series Name

Product Name Model

GP77Rseries

GP2000series

GLC2000series

ITseries

Factory Gateway

GP-377Rseries

GP-477Rseries

GP-577Rseries

GP-2300series

GP-2400series

GP-377RT

GP-477RE

GP-577RS

GP-577RT

GP-2300L

GP-2300T

GP-2400T

GP-2500T

GP377R-TC11-24V

GP377R-TC41-24V

GP477R-EG11

GP477R-EG41-24VP

GP577R-SC11

GP577R-SC41-24VP

GP577R-TC11

GP577R-TC41-24VP

GP2300-LG41-24V

GP2300-TC41-24V

GP2400-TC41-24V

GP2500-TC11

GP2500-TC41-24V

GP-2500series

GP-2501series

GP-2600series

GP-2500L

GP-2500S

GP-2501S

GP-2501T

GP-2600T

GP2500-LG41-24V

GP2500-SC41-24V

GP2501-SC11

GP2501-TC11

GP2600-TC11

GP2600-TC41-24V

GP-2601series GP-2601T

GLC2300L

GLC2300series

GLC2300T

GLC2400series GLC2400T

GLC2500series GLC2500T

GP2601-TC11

GLC2300-LG41-24V

GLC2300-TC41-24V

GLC2400-TC41-24V

GLC2500-TC41-24V

GLC2500-TC41-200V

GLC2600-TC41-24V

GLC2600series GLC2600T

IT2400series

IT2400 TypeA

IT2400 TypeB

GLC2600-TC41-200V

IT2400-TC41-GP

IT2400-TC41-GP200V

IT2400-TC41-GLC

IT2400-TC41-GLC200V

Factory Gateway FGW-SE41-24V

*1 GP Ethernet I/F Unit or the Multi Unit E is required.

*2 GP Ethernet I/F Unit or the Multi Unit E can be attached.

Built-in

Ethernet

Unit

External

Ethernet

Unit

Comment

×



×



×









×



×



×

-

*1

*2

-

-

-

*2

*1

*2

*1

-

The Expansion Ethernet unit is required to use the 2-Way Driver with a

GP77R series, GP-2501 series or GP-2601 series unit. Therefore, protocol for the expansion units cannot be used.

You cannot use both the 2-Way Driver and the Ethernet protocol together with a GP77R series, GP-2501 series or GP-2601 series unit.

Reference

“Pro-Server compatible PLC Vendors and Models”

Settings used will differ (IP Addresses Port No., etc.), depending on the type of Ethernet unit used, i.e. built-in type or expansion unit type.

Reference

“Using an Ethernet protocol with the 2-Way Driver”

014

Software

GP-PRO/PB III for Windows (Screen creation software)

Screen Creation

Software

Language

Japanese

ML

Japanese

Japanese/ML

GP-PRO/PBIII for

Windows

Japanese

ML

Japanese/ML

Software

Version

Ver.3.0

Ver.3.0

Ver.4.0

Ver.5.0

Ver.6.0

Ver.6.0

Ver.6.1

GP70 GP77R

Ver.1.51

Ver.2.40

System Version

GP377R

-

Ver.1.51

Ver.2.40a

-

Ver.1.54

Ver.2.60

Ver.2.60

GP2000

-

-

-

Ver.1.55

Ver.2.64

Ver.2.64

Ver.3.10

Factory

Gateway

-

-

-

-

Ver.1.55

Ver.2.68

Ver.2.68

Ver.3.30

-

Ver.1.55

Ver.2.68

Ver.2.68

Ver.3.30

Ver.3.42

Ver.1.55

Ver.2.69

Ver.2.69

Ver.3.50

Ver.3.42

Japanese/ML Ver.6.2 SP1 Ver.1.55

Ver.2.69d

Ver.2.69d

Ver.3.53

Ver.3.42

Japanese/ML Ver.6.3 SP2 Ver.1.55d

Ver.2.69j

Ver.2.69j

Ver.3.53b

Ver.3.56

Japanese/ML Ver.7.0

Ver.1.55e

Ver.2.69k

Ver.2.69k

Ver.4.00

Ver.3.56

The following restrictions apply to Pro-Server and any related software.

Pro-Server and GP-PRO/PB III for Windows

Feature

GP screen capture (capturing JPEG files)

LS area extension

Online screen upload

( GP-Viewer )

CF Card Online Write

CF Card access all File Names

Increased number of Alarm Blocks

Compatibility Requirement

GP-PRO/PB lll for Windows V6.0 or later

GP-PRO/PB lll for Windows V6.0 or later

GP-PRO/PB lll for Windows V6.0 or later

GP-PRO/PB lll for Windows V6.1 or later

GP-PRO/PB lll for Windows V7.0 or later

GP-PRO/PB lll for Windows V7.0 or later

015

Pro-Server compatible PLC Vendors and Models

Vendor Name

DIGITAL

Electronics

Mitsubishi

Electric

Omron

Sharp Corp.

Yokogawa

Electric Corp.

Fuji Electric

Co.,Ltd.

Toyota

Machine

Warks, Ltd.

Yaskawa

Electric Corp.

Hitachi Ltd.

Hitachi

Industrial

Equipment

Systems.

Device/PLC Type

(in GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows)

MEMORY LINK SIO Type

MEMORY LINK Ethernet Type

MITSUBISHI MELSEC-AnN(LINK)

MITSUBISHI MELSEC-AnN(CPU)

MITSUBISHI MELSEC-AnA(LINK)

MITSUBISHI MELSEC-AnA(CPU)

MITSUBISHI MELSEC-A(JPCN1)

MITSUBISHI MELSEC-A(ETHER)

MITSUBISHI MELSEC-FX(CPU)

MITSUBISHI MELSEC-FX(CPU2)

MITSUBISHI MELSEC-FX2(LINK)

MITSUBISHI MELSEC-FX 1:N Comm.

MITSUBISHI MELSEC-QnA(LINK)

MITSUBISHI MELSEC-QnA(CPU)

MITSUBISHI MELSEC-Q(ETHER)

MITSUBISHI MELSECNET/10

MITSUBISHI FREQROL SERIES

CC-Link Type

OMRON SYSMAC-C SERIES

OMRON SYSMAC-C 1:n Comm.

OMRON SYSMAC-CV SERIES

OMRON SYSMAC-CS1 SERIES

OMRON SYSMAC-CS1(ETHER)

OMRON THERMAC NEO SERIES

SHARP NewSatellite JW Series

YOKOGAWA FACTORY ACE 1:1 Comm.

YOKOGAWA FACTORY ACE 1:n Comm.

YOKOGAWA FA-M3 (ETHER)

FUJI MICREX-F SERIES

FUJI MICREX-F SERIES (FLT)

FUJI MICREX-F SERIES (T LINK)

FUJI FLEX-PC (LINK)

FUJI FLEX-PC (CPU)

FUJI INVERTER

FUJI TEMPERATURE PXR

TOYOTA TOYOPUC-PC2 SERIES

TOYOTA TOYOPUC-PC2 1:n Comm.

TOYOTA TOYOPUC-PC3J SERIES

TOYOTA TOYOPUC-PC3J 1:n Comm.

YASUKAWA Memocon-SC SERIES

YASUKAWA GL120/130 SERIES

YASUKAWA MP2000/920 (ETHER)

YASUKAWA PROGIC8 SERIES

YASUKAWA MP900/CP9200SH SERIES

YASUKAWA INVERTER

HITACHI HIDIC-S10a SERIES

HITACHI HIDIC-S10a (JPCN1)

HITACHI HIZAC-EC SERIES

HITACHI IES SJ300/L300P Series

HITACHI HIDIC H SERIES

HITACHI HIDIC H2 SERIES

HITACHI HIDIC-H (ETHER)

2-Way Driver

O

O

O

X

O

X

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

X

O

O

O

X

X

O

O

O

O

O

O

X

O

X

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

O

X

X

O

X

O

O

O

GP77R

GP-2501

GP-2601

GP-2500

GP-2600

GLC2500

GLC2600

O

O

GP-2300

GP-2400

GLC2300

GLC2400

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

X

O

X

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

O

O

FGW

X

O

X

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

O

O

Comment

*2

*1

*2

*2

*3

*1

*2 *3

*2

*1

*1

*2 *3

016

Vendor Name

Device/PLC Type

(in GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows)

Toshiba Corp.

TOSHIBA PROSEC-EX2000 SERIES

TOSHIBA PROSEC-T SERIES

TOSHIBA PROSEC-T (ETHER)

Matsushita

Electric

Works, Ltd.

Koyo

Electronics

Industries Co.

Toshiba

Machine Co.,

GE Fanuc

AutoMation

Fanuc Motion

Controller

IDEC Izumi

Corp.

Siemens AG

Rockwell

(Allen-Bradley)

Keyence Corp.

Shinko

Electric

Matsushita

Electric

Modicon Corp.

FATEK

MATSUSHITA MEWNET-FP SERIES

KOYO KOSTAC-SG8 SERIES

KOYO KOSTAC SR21/22 SERIES

KOYO DL-305 SERIES

KOYO DL-205/405 SERIES

TOSHIBA TC200 SERIES

TOSHIBA MACHINE TC200-S SERIES

GE FANUC SERIES 90 SNP-X

GE FANUC SERIES 90-30/70 SNP

FANUC POWER MATE SERIES

IZUMI IDEC_1

IZUMI IDEC_2

IZUMI IDEC_3

IZUMI MICRO3

IDEC FC3/FC4A Series

SIEMENS S5 90-115 SERIES

SIEMENS S5 135-155 SERIES

SIEMENS S5 3964(R) Protocol

Siemens S7-200 PPI

Siemens S7-200 via MPI

Siemens S7-300/400 via MPI

SIEMENS S7-300/400 (ETHER)

SIMATIC S7 via 3964/RK512

SIMATIC 545/555 CPU

Allen Bradley PLC-5 SERIES

Allen Bradley SLC500 SERIES

AB Data Highway Plus

AB Slc500 DH485

AB Remote IO

Allen Bradley ControlLogix DFI

AB ControlLogix (EtherNet/IP)

Allen Bradley SLC5/05 (ETHER)

KEYENCE KZ300 SERIES

KEYENCE KZ-A500 (CPU)

KEYENCE KZ-A500 (LINK)

KEYENCE KV-10_80RW/TW SERIES

KEYENCE KV-10_40A/D SERIES

KEYENCE KV-700 SERIES (CPU)

SHINKO SELMART SERIES

MATSUSHITA MINAS-A/S SERIES

Panadac 7000 SERIES

Modicon Modbus (MASTER)

Modicon Modbus (SLAVE)

Modicon Modbus Plus

FATEK FACON FB

2-Way Driver

GP77R

GP-2501

GP-2601

O

O

X

GP-2500

GP-2600

GLC2500

GLC2600

GP-2300

GP-2400

GLC2300

GLC2400

O

O

O

O

O

O

FGW

O

O

O

Comment

*2

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

X

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

*3

*5

*6

*3

*3

*3

*6

*3

*3

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

X

X

017

Vendor Name

ORIM VEXTA

Yamatake

Corporation

Toho Electronics

Inc.

RKC Instrument

Inc.

Shinko Technos

Corp.

Fenwal Co.,Ltd

JT Engineering inc.

MEIDENSHA

CORPORATION.

SHIMADEN

Co.,Ltd.

CHINO Corp.

Schneider

Electric.

PROFIBUS

INTERBUS

JPCN-1

DeviceNet

TOSHIBA

SCHNEIDER

Ubon

Device/PLC Type

(in GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows)

ORIM VEXTA E1 SERIES

YAMATAKE SDC SERIES

TOHO ELECTRONICS TTM SERIES

RKC CB/SR-Mini SERIES (MODBUS)

RKC CB/REX-F/LE100 (RKC)

SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING

FENWALl AL SERIES

JTE Analyzer

MEIDENSHA Ethernet

SHIMADEN CONTROLLER

CHINO CONTROLLER (MODBUS)

Schneider TSX via UNI-TELWAY

Schneider Modbus TCP (ETHER)

Schneider Modbus RTU 1:n comm.

PROFIBUS-DP

INTERBUS SLAVE

JPCN-1 (Standard)

DeviceNet Slave I/O

TOSHIBA SCHNEIDER INVERTER

Ubon UPZ Series

X

O

X

X

X

O

O

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

2-Way Driver

GP77R

GP-2501

GP-2601

O

GP-2500

GP-2600

GLC2500

GLC2600

O

GP-2300

GP-2400

GLC2300

GLC2400

O

O O O

FGW

O

O

Comment

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

X

X

X

O

O

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

X

X

X

O

O

O

O

X

O

O

*2

*6

*6

*6

*1

*1

*1

*1

O...Supported ...Supported with restriction (See *3) X...Not Supported

018

Protocols before V1.2 can be used, however it cannot detect write errors.

Although you can use protocol older than V1.2, it cannot detect a write error.

You can check the protocol version on “Status Monitor”.

Reference

“6.2 GP Status Monitoring”

*1 An expansion Ethernet unit is required to use the 2-Way Driver with GP77R/GP-2501/GP-2601 series units. The attachment of this unit prevents the attachment of any other expansion units, which in turn prevents the use of any other protocols.

Since Expansion Units cannot be used with GP-2300/GP-2400 Series, GLC2300/GLC2400 Series and

Factory Gateway units, Expansion Unit protocols also cannot be used.

*2 You cannot use both the 2-Way Driver and Ethernet protocols at the same time on GP77R/GP-2501/GP-2601 series units.

*3 You can use the 2-Way Driver together with listed protocols, however, there are device restrictions for Pro-

Server access. Screens only need to be created for the devices that can be accessed.

Protocol Name

MITSUBISHI MELSECNET/10

Restriction

Can access only the link device, LS Area and symbols designated in a GP-PRO/PB III project file (.prw).

AB Slc500 DH485

Siemens S7-200 via MPI

OMRON SYSMAC-CS1 (ETHER)

HITACHI HIDIC H (ETHER)

Allen Bradley SLC5/05 (ETHER)

Allen Bradley PLC-5 Data Highway Plus

AB Remote I/O

Modicon Modbus Plus

Can access only the LS Area and symbols designated in a GP-PRO/PB III project file

(.prw).

Can access only the LS Area.

*4 This protocol cannot be used with the 2-Way Driver.

*5 When accessing a device connected one-to-one with a PLC, it is not necessary to register Symbols with

GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows.

However, when connecting to multiple PLC units or accessing an Expansion device, Symbols must be registered with GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows.

*6 Simultaneous use of the 2-Way Driver is possible, however, only the LS area and symbols set via the C-

Package03 project file can be accessed. The Factory Gateway cannot be used to enter protocol settings.

019

1

Introduction

This chapter describes how to use this software to configure a system in which you can gather data from devices/PLCs connected to networked GPs.

1.1

Outline

1.2

What is the 2-Way Driver?

1.3

System Configuration

1.4

Application Interfaces

1.5

Provider Information Outline

1.6

Overview of Data View

1.7

Configuring the System

1.1 Outline

1.1

Outline

The Pro-Server software reads/writes/collects data to and from PLC, and GP’s data via a network (Ethernet).

Pro-Server on your PC lets you use commercially available application software or programs you have created to read/write/collect data on the GPs and PLCs connected to the network.

It can also save and playback (Playback Feature) the saved data.

1-2

1.2 What is the 2-Way Driver?

1.2

What is the 2-W a y Driver?

The 2-Way Driver is software that allows the host PC to access data on GPs or PLCs connected to a network

(Ethernet). One advantage of this software is that you can transfer data to the host PC, regardless of type of

PLC being used.

To use the 2-Way function, Pro-Server software and an Ethernet compatible GP unit are required.

The GP reads and writes data via the 2-Way driver only when it is not serving as a display and operation panel, which is its first priority. Also, reading or writing a large volume of data may cause the GP to temporarily stop refreshing its display.

1-3

1.3 System Configuration

1.3

System Configuration

1.3.1 External Configuration

• Pro-Studio

• Pro-Server

Ethernet

2-Way function

The 2-Way Driver translates PLC protocols, allowing data exchange between many types of PLCs.

PLC for

Manufacturer A

GP

2-Way

Driver

PLC for

Manufacturer B

• Pro-Studio allows you to easily designate a PLC device as a symbol.

• Designate a symbol using Excel,

SCADA software, and VB applications, and Pro-Server can easily read that data out.

GP GP

PLC for

Manufacturer C

Pro-Studio (Performs Network project file editing/setting)

This software is used to set and register symbols for the GPs and PLCs designated as data providers.

Physical IP addresses, PLC device addresses, etc. can all be converted into symbols.

Pro-Server (Performs Data exchange between applications and GPs)

This software that communicates with GPs according to the requests made by Excel, VB, SCADA or other applications.

2-Way Driver (Protocol conversion driver built into GPs)

This driver selects the applicable PLC protocol, based on the Pro-Server read/write command. GP77R series units requires setup and then transfer to the GP unit via the screen editor software GP2000 and GLC2000 series unit 2-Way Driver software is factory installed.

1-4

1.3 System Configuration

1.3.2 Internal Configuration

Off-line

Inside your PC, information such as node names of the connected GPs, symbol names for accessing the PLC devices, and information read from the GPs is all set up and controlled via this software. The file in which this information is stored is called a network project file (

*

.npj) and is used by Pro-Server for its data exchange with application programs.

To exchange data with the host PC, each GP must have the 2-Way Driver and the network project information downloaded to it, along with the GP’s screen information, via GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows Ver. 3.0 or later. The 2-Way Driver is factory installed in the GP2000 and GLC2000 Series units.

PL

Panel computer or

PC

Pro-Studio

Network project file

(.npj)

Inside of PC

GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows

V. 3.0 or later

Project file

(.prw)

• GP system

• Protocols for various PLCs

• 2-Way Driver

GP

1-5

1.3 System Configuration

On-line

In response to an application’s request, this software accesses PLC data, by way of the GP, using the network project file. Prior to using Pro-Server, be sure to first use your PC's GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows software to download the "2-Way Driver" and your PLC's protocol to the GP unit.

• Transferring screen data in on-line mode or downloading a network project file, will temporarily cause the Transfer screen to appear and all other data transfer operations to stop.

• After screen transfer is completed, the screen will re-activate and regular operation will resume.

1-6

1.3 System Configuration

Using an Ethernet protocol with the 2-Way Driver

Pro-face’s GP2000 (GP-2501 does not support this function) and GLC2000 Series units can simultaneously use an Ethernet communication protocol and the 2-Way Driver feature to communicate with a PLC. However, the IP address and the Port No. used for differ depending on whether the internal Ethernet I/F or the

Expansion Ethernet I/F is used.

Network with only one GP Ethernet I/F

Using the GP/GLC’s internal Ethernet I/F to communicate with a PLC allows you to also use the 2-Way

Driver feature. However, while you will need only one IP Address, you will need to designate two Port No.s.

One will be for when you transfer data to a PLC, and the other will be when using the 2-Way feature.

In order to transfer data to a PLC, you will need to enter your GP/GLC unit’s Ethernet settings via the

OFFLINE mode’s [INITIALIZE] -> [PLC SETUP] -> [PLC SETUP] -> [SETUP ETHERNET INFORMA-

TION] screen. However, the Subnet Mask and IP Address must be entered in the [PLC SETUP] -> [SETUP

ETHERNET EXT. INFORMATION] screen. This data must also be entered in the GP-PRO/PBIII for

Windows software’s Project Manager screen [GP Setup] menu’s [Communication Settings] tab.

The entering of Ethernet settings for communication using the 2-Way Driver feature is done via the previously mentioned OFFLINE mode. Select the [INITIALIZE] -> [PLC SETUP] -> [EXPANSION SET-

TINGS] -> [ETHERNET SETUP] area, and enter the required setting data there. You need to also enter the required settings in the Pro-Studio program’s [Register/Edit Node] area, and the [Port No.] in the [Configure] -> [Network] area.

1-7

1.3 System Configuration

The following table describes what each setting is used for.

Setting

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

(IP Route Address)

Port No.

PLC Transfer Settings 2-Way Driver Settings

O

O

O

X

X

X

Remarks

These settings apply to a single

Ethernet I/F and only one setting value can be entered. When the

PLC Transfer Settings are not entered, the 2-Way Driver Settings will be enabled.

O O

Be sure the Port No.s used are not the same. Port numbers are allocated continuously for a total of

10 No.s, starting from the 2-Way

Driver Port No. entered.

O: Setting enabled X: Setting disabled

1-8

1.3 System Configuration

Network with GP’s embedded Ethernet and the extended Ethernet I/F unit

After attaching the Expansion Ethernet I/F Unit, your GP unit is now equipped with two Ethernet I/F units.

This can separate the network between PLC-GP and GP-PC to break up traffic.

(The Ethernet Expansion Unit cannot be used with the GP-2300, GP-2400, GLC2300 or GLC2400 series units.)

The Expansion Ethernet I/F Unit is used for PLC data transfer and the internal Ethernet I/F is used for data transfer via the 2-Way Driver.

Use of the Expansion Ethernet I/F Unit will require the setting of a separate IP Address.

In order to transfer data to a PLC, you will need to enter your GP/GLC unit’s Ethernet settings via the

OFFLINE mode’s [INITIALIZE] -> [PLC SETUP] -> [PLC SETUP] -> [SETUP ETHERNET INFORMA-

TION] screen. However, the Subnet Mask and IP Address must be entered in the [PLC SETUP] -> [SETUP

ETHERNET EXT. INFORMATION] screen. This data must also be entered in the GP-PRO/PBIII for

Windows software’s Project Manager screen [GP Setup] menu’s [Communication Settings] tab.

The entering of Ethernet settings for communication using the 2-Way Driver feature via the internal Ethernet

I/F is done using the GP unit’s previously mentioned OFFLINE mode. Select the [INITIALIZE] -> [PLC

SETUP] -> [EXPANSION SETTINGS] -> [ETHERNET SETUP] area, and enter the required setting data there. Also, enter the required settings in the Pro-Studio program’s [Register/Edit Node] area. Also, enter the

[Port No.] in the [Configure] -> [Network] area.

1-9

1.3 System Configuration

The following table describes what each setting is used for.

Setting PLC Transfer Settings 2-Way Driver Settings

IP Address O O

Subnet Mask

Gateway

(IP Route Address)

O

O

O

O

Remarks

The PLC communication settings used are allocated to the Expansion

Ethernet I/F Unit, and the 2-Way

Driver settings are allocated to the

GP’s internal Ethernet I/F.

Port No.

O O

O: Setting enabled X: Setting disabled

Reference

“2-Way Driver”

1-10

1.4 Application Interfaces

1.4

Application Interfaces

1.4.1 DDE function Outline

The DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) function can be used with your PC’s commercial applications (SCADA or MMI software) and Excel, which supports the DDE client function that provides for program-less data exchange.

Once a DDE link is established, Pro-Server monitors the internal data and, if a stored value changes, notifies the client of the change. Pro-Server provides the client with the data being monitored when a read-out request is received and writes the data when a write request is received.

DDE function

Excel’s client feature does not support data write, so the DDE’s write feature cannot be used. When you write data by Excel, use the VBA Support

Function.

Reference

“3.5 Using the VBA Support Function”

1-11

1.4 Application Interfaces

1.4.2 Simple DLL Function

The applications you create with Visual Basic or Visual C will request Pro-Server to read/write PLC data via a GP. The function (API) for this is provided in the form of a DLL.

Simple DLL Connection

In environments where data transfer errors can frequently occur, be sure your applications include a data transfer retry feature.

1-12

1.4 Application Interfaces

1.4.3 OPC Interface Function

Installing a Pro-Server OPC server allows you to use applications that have an OPC client function, such as

Intellution’s iFIX, as well as others.

The OPC interface function can only be used on a Windows NT, Windows 2000 or Windows XP system.

However, the security level of Windows 2000 must be set to the same as that used by Windows XP. For setting information, see Appendix 6 Changing Windows XP Security Levels.

OPC Interface Design

1-13

1.4 Application Interfaces

1.4.4 SRAM Backup Data Storage Function

The backup data in the SRAM of each GP can be easily transferred to the host PC. This SRAM backup function is available for logging data, trend data, sampling data, alarm data (log/history), and others.

SRAM Backup Function

For details about the types of data you can transfer to the host PC, refer to the GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows

Tag Reference Manual.

Reference

“GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows Tag Reference Manual”

• You can assign alarm data (active) to the alarm block. By default, you can take it into Pro-Server by designating Alarm Block1.

Reference

“3.6 Saving Backup Data in SRAM”

• Simultaneous upload of multiple types of data from a single GP is not possible.

* You cannot use this feature on Factory Gateway.

1-14

1.5 Provider Information Outline

1.5

Pr o vider Inf ormation Outline

1.5.1 Providing Information to the Host

When a designated trigger’s condition(s) set by Pro-Studio is/are satisfied, PLC data is collected by the GP’s resident 2-Way Driver and provided to the host PC. Therefore, since Pro-Server can temporarily store this data in the PC’s memory, overall network traffic can be reduced.

For the procedure to register symbols in Pro-Server’s PC memory area, refer to 3.2 Registering Symbols.

Reference

“3.2 Registering Symbols”

1-15

1.5 Provider Information Outline

1.5.2 Providing Information between GPs

Even if your system lacks a host PC or Pro-Server, you can transfer the provider information setting file setup in Pro-Studio to each GP. This then allows device data to be exchanged, via the GP, between PLCs on the network, at a predetermined times or event, regardless of the brand of PLC used.

1-16

1.5 Provider Information Outline

1.5.3 Action Feature Overview

When the designated trigger conditions are fulfilled, an “Action” feature allows an application in a remote

PC on the network to be activated. Also, the program triggered by the Action feature is called the “Action

Contents”.

Action Features

Automatic Upload of Access Data (requires Microsoft Access)

Automatic Download of Access Data (requires Microsoft Access)

Writes Data to Excel Book (requires Microsoft Excel)

Download of Excel Recipe (requires Microsoft Excel)

Upload of GP Log Data

Automatic Upload of GP Filing Data

Automatic Download of GP Filing Data

Writes Data to E-Mail

Alarm Log (with Sound Alert Feature) (requires Microsoft Access)

Data Upload to Database (requires Microsoft Access/Excel)

Data Download from Database (requires Microsoft Access/Excel)

Start Application

Upload of GP JPEG Data

Writes Data to CSV File

Writes Data from CSV File

Create Report using Excel

Action Feature Overview

1-17

1.6 Overview of Data View

1.6

Over vie w of Data

Vie w

When a designated trigger’s condition(s) set by Pro-Studio is/are satisfied, PLC data is collected by the GP’s resident 2-Way Driver and saved on the server PC. Data View allows you to display the collected data on

Pro-face’s exclusive browser (GP-Viewer, Device View) in real-time. You can also change the data collection condition or set the synchronization style with GPs (GP-Viewer only) using Data View. Device data of multiple PLCs can be collected at the same time (Device View only).

In addition to the above, you can playback device data already collected on Data View (Playback Feature) or on user-created applications (System Time Bar).

Collected device data can be viewed using a variety of tools, such as Device

View and GP-Viewer.

1-18

1.7 Configuring the System

1.7

Configuring the System

The following explanation describes the steps you must follow to start Pro-Server, and assumes that GP-

PRO/PBIII is already installed on your PC.

Installing Pro-Server with Pro-Studio for Windows

Install Pro-Server with Pro-Studio for Windows on your

PC’s hard disk.

Reference “2.1 Installing the

Software”

Starting GP-PRO/PBIII

Start the GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows software.

Reference “GP-PRO/PBIII

Operation Manual”

Creating/Saving the screens with GP-PRO/PBIII

Open the GP-PRO/PBIII project file, create as many project files as the number of the connected GPs, and save the project files.

Reference “GP-PRO/PBIII

Operation Manual”

Reference “2.2 Starting and

Exiting the Software”

Start Pro-Studio.

Starting Pro-Studio

Setting/Saving the network project file with Pro-Studio

Open the network project file in Pro-Studio, make the necessary settings, and save the file.

Reference “2.2 Starting and

Exiting the Software”

“Chapter 3 Operation”

Transferring project files to your GPs

Transfer the project files, the network project file, and the

GP system setting to each connected GPs, one by one.

Reference “5.1 Transferring Data to GPs”

“GP-PRO/PBIII Operation Manual”

Performance Measurement

Measure the performance with the read performance measuring tool.

Reference “6.3 Read

Performance Measuring Tool”

Operation

Connect the GPs and the PC using a network cable. Start

Pro-Server on your PC.

Reference “2.2 Starting and

Exiting the Software”

“Chapter 6 Tools”

“Chapter 7 Data View”

1-19

Pro-Server

Fundamentals

This chapter describes how to install this software. It also explains the procedures for starting and exiting the software.

2.1

Installing the Software

2.2

Starting and Exiting the Software

2.3

Screen Item Names and Functions

2.1 Installing the Software

2.1

Installing the Software

Install this software from the CD-ROM to your hard disk. The following explanation assumes that Windows is already installed on your hard disk.

If you install Pro-Server V4.5 while GP-Viewer V1.0 remains on PC, a problem will occur when you install

GP-Viewer again. Be sure to uninstall GP-Viewer V1.0 and Pro-Server with Pro-Studio of the older version from PC before installing Pro-Server V4.5.

• Prior to installing the software, exit all programs except the Pro-Server with

Pro-Studio for Windows Setup program. Be sure to quit all memoryresident programs (such as Virus detection software).

• Copying the master CD-ROM files to your hard disk does not install this software. To be able to start this software, you must use the Setup program

(step 2 below).

1. Insert the CD-ROM into your PC’s CD-ROM drive.

2. Click the [Start] button and, when the Start menu appears, select [Run].

3. Type “D:/2WSetup.exe” and then click [OK]. (“D” represents the drive letter assigned to your

CD-ROM drive.)

The master CD-ROM supports the AutoPlay feature, which means inserting it into your CD-ROM drive will automatically start the Setup program.

2-2

2.1 Installing the Software

4. The installation menu appears. Click the “Pro-Server with Pro-Studio Setup” bar.

5. Select which language you wish to use in the Setup program (English or Japanese) and click

“OK”.

6. [InstalledShield Wizard] dialog will start.

7. [Pro-Server with Pro-Server for Windows V4.5 Setup] dialog appears. Click on the [Next] button.

2-3

2.1 Installing the Software

8. “Software License Agreement” appears. Click [Yes] when you agree with all contents described here.

9. The User Information screen will appear. Enter all the information and click the [Next] button.

10. The key code entry screen then appears. Enter the code printed on the rear of your CD-ROM case and click [Next].

The data entered must also include the “-” character.

2-4

2.1 Installing the Software

After this, follow the instructions displayed on the screen.

In addition to the Pro-Server with Pro-Studio for Windows V4.5 Setup Wizard, the “2WSetup.exe” command can be used to start the following items.

• GP-PRO/PBIII 2-Way Driver Update

If you use the 2-Way Driver (Ver. 4.14 or older) older than GP-PRO/PB III for Windows Ver.7.0, be sure to update the 2-Way Driver and set up GP. If you use Ethernet protocol with Factory Gateway, you should also execute the update.

You can check the 2-Way Driver version on the status monitor.

Reference

“6.2 GP Status Monitoring”

• OPC Setup

The server and the client versions are available and support only Windows NT4.0, Windows 2000 and

Windows XP. Install the server version on the PC where you use Pro-Server and the client version on the PC where you use client software.

• Tutorial

The tutorial uses HTML files to explain the installation, setup and usage of the Pro-Studio software.

• GP-Viewer Trial Version Setup

This is the trial version of “GP Viewer”. Install the GP-Viewer after Pro-Server installation is completed. When you set up the trial version of “GP-Viewer”, you must have installed Microsoft

JAVA VM on your PC in advance. If not, you should obtain it from the Microsoft site.

• Setting the Factory Gateway Configration Tool

If you use this tool, you can perform the communication setup of Factory Gateway even without the

GP/PRO/PB III environment.

2-5

2.2 Starting and Exiting the Software

2.2

Star ting and Exiting the Software

This section describes how to start and exit this software.

2.2.1 Using Pro-Studio

Starting Pro-Studio

The following explanation assumes that the Windows desktop is already displayed.

1.

Click [Start] button and when the Start menu appears, point to [Programs], [Pro-face] and

[Pro-Server with Studio], and select [Pro-Studio].

Double-clicking on the desired network project file (

*

.npj) in Windows Explorer automatically starts

Pro-Studio.

2.

The program’s main window will appear. The left-side window shows a list of network entry node GPs; the right-side window shows the symbols registered for each GP. Use this screen to enter a variety of settings to configure your system.

2-6

2.2 Starting and Exiting the Software

• Starting Pro-Studio automatically starts Pro-Server. Pro-Server resides in memory and its indicator appears on the right side of the taskbar.

• Quitting Pro-Server automatically exits Pro-Studio as well.

To start Pro-Server only, click the [Start] button and, when the Start menu appears, point to [Programs], [Pro-face] and [Pro-Server with Studio] and then click on [Pro-Server].

Creating a Network Project File

A network project file (

*

.npj) stores information such as the network entry nodes, symbols, and provider information settings.

Creating a New Network Project

The following explains how to open a window and create new network projects.

1.

Select [New(N)] in the [File(F)] menu.

2-7

2.2 Starting and Exiting the Software

Opening/Saving a Network Project File

The following procedures explain how to open, close, and save a network project file. Before you proceed, open the Pro-Studio main window.

Opening a Network Project File

1.

In the program’s main window, click [Open(O)] in the [File(F)] menu.

2. Select the file you wish to open, and click [Open(O)].

3.

The file opens.

2-8

2.2 Starting and Exiting the Software

Saving a Network Project File

1. In the program’s main window, click [Save(S)] or [Save as(A)] in the [File(F)] menu.

2.

If you have selected [Save(S)], the file is saved by overwriting the existing contents. If you have selected [Save as(A)], in the following dialog box, save the file with a new file name.

2-9

2.2.2 Exiting Pro-Studio

The following describes the procedure for exiting Pro-Studio.

1.

Click [Exit Pro-Studio(X)] in the [File(F)] menu.

2.2 Starting and Exiting the Software

• If you change the settings of a currently open project and then attempt to close it, you will be asked whether or not to save the new settings. Clicking

[Yes] saves the settings by overwriting the existing contents, and then exits

Pro-Studio. Clicking [No] exits Pro-Studio without saving the changes.

• Exiting Pro-Server automatically closes Pro-Studio. To be sure to terminate all communication, be sure to exit Pro-Server.

2-10

2.2 Starting and Exiting the Software

2.2.3 Starting and Exiting Pro-Server

The following explanation assumes that the Windows desktop is already displayed.

Starting Pro-Server

1.

Click the [Start] button and, when the Start menu appears, point to [Programs] [Pro-face] and

[Pro-Server with Studio], and then click [Pro-Server].

2.

While Pro-Server is running, the Pro- Server icon appears on the right side of the task tray.

Starting Pro-Studio automatically starts Pro-Server.

Exiting Pro-Server

1. To exit Pro-Server, right-click on the Pro-Server icon on the right side of the task tray.

2-11

2. When the shortcut menu appears, click [Exit].

2.2 Starting and Exiting the Software

• Exiting Pro-Server automatically exits Pro-Studio.

• If an application uses Pro-Server as a DDE client, an alarm message will appear before you exit this software.

• An alarm message dialog will appear when you try to exit Pro-Server while it is collecting data.

• If the OS is shutdown while a Pro-Server Action feature (See Chapter 4

Action Items) is running, the dialog [This program is not responding] may appear. (The dialog shown below is from Windows 2000 Professional.)

If it does appear, the OS will not shut down until the dialog box is closed.

Please pay careful attention to this point when performing a remote OS shutdown.

2-12

2.3 Screen Item Names and Functions

2.3

Screen Item Names and Functions

The names and functions of Pro-Studio’s main screen items are as follows:

Title Bar

Menu Bar

Tool Bar

Status Bar

Network Project

Information List

Detailed Information

Title Bar

Displays the currently open network project file (

*

. npj)’s name.

Menu Bar

Displays the menu to be used to operate Pro-Studio. Use the mouse or keypad to select a desired menu, and the pull-down menu appears.

Tool Bar

Displays icons that represent frequently used commands. Click on an icon to execute that command.

Status Bar

Displays operation-related messages and other information.

Network Project Information List

Displays the currently open network project file’s contents in a tree structure.

Detailed Information

Displays network project information list, nodes, symbols, and actions.

2-13

3

Operation

This chapter describes how to register various types of system information.

3.1

Registering Network Entry Nodes

3.2

Registering Symbols

3.3

Registering Provider Data

3.4

Using the DDE Function

3.5

Using the VBA Support Function

3.6

Saving Backup Data in SRAM

3.7

Device Data Backup and Restoration

3.8

GP Capture Data Saving Function

3.9

Security Function

3.10 Configuring the System

3.11 Configuring the Network

3.12 Printing the Setting Data

3.13 Other Instructions

3.1 Registering Network Entry Nodes

3.1

Registering Netw ork Entr y Nodes

3.1.1 Registering a Network Node

The procedure for entering the node name, IP address, sub net mask, gateway, and PLC type information is described below. The node name can be the same as the project file name with the PLC type automatically determined by selecting GP-PRO-PB III’s project file (

*

.prw). To transfer provider data from a GP to the

PC, you must first register the PC as a network entry node.

The following description assumes that Pro-Studio’s main window is open.

1.

Select [Register Node] in the [Edit(E)] menu.

You can right-click on the network entry node and select [Register Node] from the shortcut menu that appears.

3-2

3.1 Registering Network Entry Nodes

2.

The [Register Node] window will appear.

Change [Node Name]. The default value is “GP

*

”. It is recommended to use the node name that you can easily understand what is connected. When you change [Node Name], you must follow restrictions described below.

Select the equipment that you register here for [PLC Type].

Designate [IP Address] so that it does not overlap with any other addresses.

Designate [SubnetMask] and [Gateway] only when required.

Enter the necessary data for all the items and click [OK].

A [Node Name] indicates a name of a communicator (usually, GP or PC) that performs communication activities on the network, which is usually a GP unit or personal computer. This node name must:

• Consist of 31 characters or less.

• Begin with an alphabetic letter.

• Use alphanumeric characters (no differentiation between upper and lowercase letters), _ (underscore),

~

(tilde), and 80h or higher ASCII characters.

• Select the GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows project file (.prw) you wish to use.

• You may also drag the file from Windows Explorer and drop it in the

Pro-Studio’s main window.

3-3

3.1 Registering Network Entry Nodes

The character string data mode is set according to the data storage order of the used PLC. Normally, it is automatically set to the mode according to the data storage order of the used PLC, therefore, you do not have to change it.

When you changed the setting of the character string data mode, you must reset the character string data mode in the project file (

*

.prw) of GP on the entry node side to the value designated here.

Reference

“GP-PRO/PB III for Windows Operation Manual GP Setup”

(I) Device Storage

Order of Data

Store from the front data

Store from the end data

(II) Byte LH/HL

Storage Order in

Word

LH

HL

LH

HL

(III) Word LH/HL

Storage Order in

Double-Word

LH

HL

LH

HL

LH

HL

LH

HL

Character String

Data Mode

The detailed settings of the selected network entry node are shown in the right-side window.

4

2

5

1

6

7

8

3

3. After registration is completed, the registered node name will be added to the network node list.

If you wish to change a node (topic)’s data after it has been registered, simply right-click on the topic to bring up a list of selections. From these, click either the [Edit Node] or [Delete Node] selections, or, from the menu bar, click the [Edit] menu’s [Edit Node] or [Delete Node] items.

Clicking either or allows you to edit the registered nodes, in the order of registration. When is clicked on while the last registered node is highlighted, the “edit” mode will change to the “add” mode and a new node will be added.

3-4

3.1 Registering Network Entry Nodes

3.1.2 Searching a Network Node

You can create a list of the GPs and PCs that are active in the network and immediately register any node that is not in the network project file (

*

.npj). (The following description assumes that Pro-Studio’s main window is open)

1. Click [Search Active Node] in the [Tools(T)] menu.

Use this function to automatically search for the nodes connected to the network. It allows you to register network nodes easily, since information such as the PLC type is retrieved and entered automatically by Pro-Studio.

2. The following dialog box will appear. To register any of the detected nodes, click first the [Node

Status] “Non-Entry” text, then the [Entry] button.

3-5

3.1 Registering Network Entry Nodes

3. The following dialog box will appear to show that the node has been registered.

3-6

3.2 Registering Symbols

3.2

Registering Symbols

The following describes how to enter symbol name, device address, data type, and polling time data. The device address you enter will be converted internally into a device code that can be used inside the GPs.

Polling time refers to how often Pro-Server polls the GP when data is read out through a DDE. You may also import symbols that have been exported from GP-PRO/PBIII. Symbols can be registered for each network entry node.

(The following description assumes that the program’s main window is open)

1. Click on the right section of the window. Or, click on the right-side window and then click [Register

Symbol] in the [Edit(E)] menu.

3-7

3.2 Registering Symbols

2. The [Register Symbol] window then appears. Enter all items and click [OK].

A symbol must

· Consist of 31 characters or fewer.

· Begin with an alphabetic letter.

· Use alphanumeric characters (no differentiation between upper and lowercase letters), _ (underscore), ˜

(tilde), and 80h or higher ASCII characters.

[Create from Address]

After selecting a Device Address, click on this button to automatically register the Device Address as a symbol.

[Global Symbol]

Clicking on the Global Symbol check box automatically designates the same symbol for all of the registered network nodes. This setting will be ignored if the device specified by the symbol does not exist in the registered network nodes.

[Data Type]

Designate the data type of the symbol to be registered. Data types that you can designate are 12 types shown in the table below.

Bit

Data Type

16 bits signed decimal

16 bits unsigned decimal

16 bits hexadecimal

Data Type

BCD 16 Bits

32 bits signed decimal

32 bits unsigned decimal

32 bits hexadecimal

Data Type

BCD 32 Bits

Single precision floating point

Double precision floating point

Character string

3-8

3.2 Registering Symbols

For setting/editing C-Package symbol and GLC, there are following restrictions to the setting of these symbols’ formats.

Device Format Designated by Symbols

Word Type

Bit Type

32 Bits Word Type

(GLC symbols only)

Changeable Format Notes

Formats other than Bit type.(signed/unsigned 16/32 bits, hexadecimal, BCD, single precision floating point, double precision floating point, character string)

Supports only the Bit format.

Supports only the 32 bits format.(signed/unsigned 32 bits, hexadecimal, BCD, single precision floating point)

You cannot select an unchangeable format.

[Polling Time]

The data here shows an example of data being read out via the DDE feature.

Under certain conditions the polling time used for collecting or writing data for each symbol, distributing data and monitoring devices may not be performed. These conditions include the number of currently registered GPs, number of Tags used on each screen sent, type of PLC connection, and number of other currently open Windows applications. Entering “0” will allow the system to operate at maximum speed. Use this value as a benchmark when entering other values to “fine-tune” your system.

3. When all settings are selected, the detailed settings appear in the right-side window.

If you wish to change a symbol’s data after it has been registered, simply right-click the symbol name

(right-window) to bring up a list of selections. From these, click on either the [Edit Symbol] or [Delete

Symbol] selections, or, from the menu bar, click on the [Edit (E)] menu’s [Edit Symbol] or [Delete

Symbol] items.

3-9

3.2 Registering Symbols

3.2.1

Importing Symbols

This section describes how to import symbols. The usable symbol data include symbols imported from GP-

PRO/PBIII (

*

.lbe), symbols exported from other network project file (

*

. 2ws), and comment data (

*

.csv) from GPP function software for Windows (Mitsubishi Electric).

1.

Click [Import Symbol] in the [Tools(T)] menu.

You can also right-click the registered network node and click [Import Symbol] on the shortcut menu.

2.

The following dialog box will appear. Select the file type to be imported. Then, click a desired file and then the [Open] button.

3.

The following dialog box will appear, and the designated symbol will be imported.

3-10

3.2 Registering Symbols

3.2.2

Symbol Export

The created symbols can be exported in a file format (

*

. lbe) that can be used on GP-PRO/PBIII for

Windows. Also, these symbols can be exported in a file format (

*

. 2ws) that can be imported to another network project.

1.

Select the [Tool(T)]-[Export Symbol] from the Menu Bar.

Right-clicking on a desired node can also be used to select [Export Symbol].

2.

The following dialog box will appear. Designate the format and name of the file to be exported and click [Export].

3.

The following dialog box will appear and the symbol will be exported.

3-11

3.2 Registering Symbols

3.2.3

Importing C-Package Symbol

For Pro-Server to access to the C-Package symbol (Special Protocol symbols and GLC symbols (variables) registered on GP-PRO/PB III), you should import Special Protocol symbols and GLC symbols defined in the

GP-PRO/PB III for Windows project file (

*

.prw) to the network project using Pro-Studio.

When importing screen definition symbols via Pro-Server, those symbols must be used on the same version screen editor software used to create them.

The following 12 kinds of protocols require symbol registration for drawing data.

• MITSUBISHI MELSECNET/10

• OMRON SYSMAC-CS1 (ETHER)

• HITACHI HIDIC H (ETHER)

• Siemens S7-200 via MPI

• Siemens S7-300/400 via MPI

• SIEMENS S7-300/400 (ETHER)

• AB Slc500 DH485

• AB ControlLogix (EtherNet/IP)

• Allen Bradley SLC5/05 (ETHER)

• Schneider TSX via UNI-TELWAY

• Schneider Modbus TCP (ETHER)

• Schneider Modbus RTU 1:n comm.

These 12 kinds of protocols are regarded as “Special Protocol” on Pro-Server, and the protocol description on Pro-Server is shown as “OMRON SYSMAC-CS1 (ETHER)

*

”.

For Pro-Server to support “Special Protocol”, GP-PRO/PB III for Windows for creating the project file

(

*

.prw) is required.

Reference

“GP-PRO/PB III for Windows Operation Manual” Symbol Editor

1.

Select the target node from the Network Entry Node list.

The “Import GLC Symbol” menu from Pro-Server ver.4.0 or earlier has been integrated into the “Import C-Package Symbol” menu.

3-12

3.2 Registering Symbols

2.

Designate the project file to import in the [Edit Node] screen’s [Project File (PRO/PB3)] window.

When using the "Browse" button to designate the project file (*.prw), the following project filename change confirmation dialog box will appear.

Yes

No

:Change Node name to Project file name.

:Do not change Node name.

Cancel :Returns to the [Edit Node] dialog box without changing the project file.

• If the designated project file (

*

.prw) name is incorrect, an alarm message dialog box will appear.

• When the designated GP-PRO/PBIII project file has been changed, all of that node's previously registered symbol’s address display section

GLC Symbols/Screen Creation Definition Symbols that have become symbols are automatically deleted.

3.

Select the [Tools(T)]-[Import C-Package Symbol] command.

3-13

3.2 Registering Symbols

If the setting contents are incorrect, following dialogs will appear.

Dialog Contents

XXX (number) undefined Screen Editor

Symbols have been used on the screen. If they are not defined symbols, they cannot be imported (used) by Pro-Server.

Cannot perform processing because the

PLC type set on Pro-Server does not match to that defined in the PRO/PB III project file.

Cannot find the project file to be imported.

Designate the project file using the

[Edit(E)]-[Edit Node]-[PRO/PB III Project

File] fearture.

Cannot execute not in administrator mode.

Please login again.

Solution

To import (use) the Screen Editor Symbols in Pro-Server, you must use drawing software data (only the Screen Editor

Symbols used on the screen can be imported).

Set the correct PLC type in the [PLC Type] field of the [Edit Node] dialog box in procedure 2.

Designate the project file (

*

.prw) using the

[PRO/PB III Project File] field of the [Edit

Node] dialog box in the procedure 2. If the designated project file (

*

.prw) does not exit, re-designate the correct project file.

Login again in administrator mode, and reimport the data.

4.

The following dialog box will appear and the GLC symbols will be imported.

5.

If you click [OK], the contents of the imported C-Package symbol will appear on the screen.

Nodes with “

*

” at the end of those names in the network entry node list means that it imported the “Special Protocol”.

If imported Special Protocol symbol names start from numbers, “_” will be added in the beginning of those symbol names. If Special Protocol symbol names also include single-byte characters other than characters, numbers, “_”, “~”, “.”, “#”, “(” “)”, those characters will be converted to “_” when imported.

The special protocol symbol cannot display the device address. Therefore, all special protocol symbols are displayed as “Screen Creation Definition Symbols”. For other symbols, corresponding device addresses are displayed.

3-14

3.2 Registering Symbols

• When importing C-Package symbols, be sure to send the Network Project file to the GP/GLC/Factory Gateway.

• When using Pro-Control Editor to Add or Delete GLC variables (GLC symbols), be sure to import the C-Package symbols again.

When GLC variables are added or deleted, the related variable’s information is remapped to GLC memory. If old mapping information is used when Pro-Server accesses the GLC, it can result in a unit operation error.

• Do not import C-Package symbols while a Data View is performing Data

Sampling. Prior to importing symbol data, be sure to close all Data Views and use the [Data View (D)] screen’s [Data Sampling Status] dialog box to confirm that all data sampling is stopped.

3-15

3.2 Registering Symbols

3.2.4

Checking C-Package Symbol

Check if the system is running using the same file by comparing Special Protocol symbols imported to the

Pro-Server’s network project file (

*

.npj) with those in the project file (

*

.prw) transferred to GP.

1.

Select the entry node to check the C-Package symbol from Network Entry Nodes.

2.

Select [Tool(T)]-[Check C-Package Symbol] from the menu bar.

3-16

3.2 Registering Symbols

3.

The checking process is executed and the following dialog box will be displayed when no errors exist.

If the checking result includes errors, following dialog boxes will appear.

Dialog Contents

The C-Package symbol may have been changed. Do you want to import the C-

Package symbol?

The C-Package symbol may not have been transferred to the designated entry node.

Cannot execute the process because the

PLC type set on Pro-Server does not match that defined in the PRO/PB III project file.

Cannot find the project file on the import source. Designate the project file on the import source to [Edit(E)]-[Edit Node]-

[PRO/PB III Project File].

Cannot execute not in administrator mode.

Please login again.

Cannot connect to the designated entry node.

Cannot acquire symbol information from the designated entry node.

Cannot execute the process because the designated entry node does not support online upload.

Solution

If you wish to update the C-Package symbol and continue checking, click [Yes].

If you continue checking without updating it, click [No].

Transfer the project file (

*

.prw) to the entry node using C-Package.

The “PLC Type” setting is incorrect.

Change the node’s PLC type to the same as the “PLC Type” in the project file

(

*

.prw).

The project file (

*

.prw) may not have been designated, or the designated project file

(

*

.prw) does not exist. Change the project file designated by the entry node to the appropriate one.

Login again in administrator mode, and reimport the data.

Cannot connect to the entry node is usually due to such a communication setting problem (the IP address is incorrect or a cable is disconnected). Check the IP address and all communication cables.

Failed to acquire information from the symbol file.

You cannot check an entry node which does not support online update.

3-17

3.2 Registering Symbols

4.

If you click [OK], the contents of the imported C-Package symbol will appear on the screen.

Nodes with “

*

” at the end of those names in the network entry node list mean that they use a

“Special Protocol”.

If imported drawing definition symbol names start from numbers, “_” will be added in the beginning of those symbol names. If drawing definition symbol names also include singlebyte characters other than characters, numbers, “_”, “~”, “.”, “#”, “(“ ”)”, those characters will be converted to “_” when imported.

Drawing definition symbol addresses of “Special Protocol” are “Screen Creation Definition

Symbols”, and other symbol addresses are corresponding device addresses.

System Variables can be set to “Show” or “Hide” mode. System Variables can be set to “Show” or “Hide” by clicking the icon, or via the

[View(V)] menu’s [System Variables(V)] setting screen.

After a Symbol is imported, the System Variable is set to “Hide” mode.

3-18

3.3 Registering Provider Data

3.3

Registering Pr o vider Data

Designate data that GP of each node provides periodically or when the trigger condition is satisfied, as well as data storage location for GP or PC, which receives data.

Designated provider information becomes effective by transferring the network project file to GP. The following description starts from the state after the main screen is opened.

If constant is selected in the [Provider Information], when you open the network project file in a different environment (Japanese OS/English OS), the contents of [Symbol Name] are displayed incorrectly. Please make the settings of [Provider Information] once again.

1. Select the registered entry node, and then select [Edit(E)]-[Register Provider Information] from the menu bar.

• The maximum number of provider information that can be registered is 350.

• You can also select [Register Provider Information] by right clicking the provider information list.

2. The [Provider Node] dialog appears. Select the data provider source node, and then click [OK].

3-19

3.3 Registering Provider Data

3.

The [Provider Information] dialog box appears. Perform necessary settings in [Providing

Condition], [Provider Completion Settings], [Receive Alert Settings], [Detailed Settings],

[Provider Node] and [Consumer Node(s)], and then click [OK].

For provider node symbols and consumer node symbols, only the same format can be selected.

Pr o viding Condition T ab

Following items are displayed by selecting the providing condition.

Condition

Power ON

On Time

Interval

Rewrite Trigger

Status ON

Status OFF

Upper Edge Trigger

Lower Edge Trigger

Symbol Name

X

X

X

O

O

O

Setup Items

Time/Interval Setup

X

O

O

O

O

O

Designated Interval

X

X

Processing after Providing

X

X

X

X

X

X

Remarks

O

O

O

O

*1

*2

X

: Setting disabled

O

: Setting enabled : Option (need to be set when check boxes are checked)

*1 If you designate “Upper Edge Trigger” and check “OFF Time After Providing”, the device designated by the symbol name is set to OFF (0) when the providing process is completed.

*2 If you designate “Lower Edge Trigger” and check “ON Time After Providing”, the device designated by the symbol name is set to ON (1) when the providing process is completed.

3-20

3.3 Registering Provider Data

Each item on the [Providing Condition] tab are as following:

[Power ON]

Provides only once when the power of provider node is turned ON.

[ON Time]

Provides only once at the designated time. Enter the time.

[Interval]

Provides according to the designated interval. If you wish to limit the period, check [Limit Period] and enter the period. Trigger condition becomes effective only during that period. Enter the providing interval (ms).

[Rewrite Trigger]

Provides when a device value designated a symbol is rewritten. Select the symbol to designate from the pull-down list. If you wish to limit the period, check [Limit Period] and enter the period. Trigger condition becomes effective only during that period. Enter also the interval (ms) to check device rewrites.

[Status ON]

Provides when a device value designated by a symbol is other than zero. Select the symbol to designate from the pull-down list. If you wish to limit the period, check [Limit Period] and enter the period.

Trigger condition becomes effective only during that period. Enter also the interval (ms) to check device ON/OFF.

[Status OFF]

Provides when a device value designated by a symbol is equal to zero. Select the symbol to designate from the pull-down list. If you wish to limit the period, check [Limit Period] and enter the period.

Trigger condition becomes effective only during that period. Enter also the interval (ms) to check device ON/OFF.

[Upper Edge Trigger]

Provides when a device value designated by a symbol changes from zero to values other than zero.

Select the symbol to designate from the pull-down list. If you wish to limit the providing period, check

[Limit Period] and enter the period. Trigger condition becomes effective only during that period. After providing this device, check [OFF After Providing] to turn it OFF automatically. Also, enter the interval (ms) to check device values.

3-21

3.3 Registering Provider Data

[Lower Edge Trigger]

Provides when a device value designated by a symbol changes from values other than zero to zero.

Select the symbol to designate from the pull-down list. If you wish to limit the providing period, check

[Limit Period] and enter the period. Trigger condition becomes effective only during that period. After providing this device, check [ON After Providing] to turn it ON automatically. Also, enter the interval

(ms) to check device values.

Pr o vider Completion Settings T ab (This tab’ s settings are enab led onl y when the 2-W a y

Driver is V er

.4.10 or later)

[Provider Completion Device]

Sets “0” or “1” to the designated device at provider completion.

If you wish to reset the provider completion device automatically by the 2-Way system when providing conditions are reset, check [Automatic Device Reset after Reset of Provider Settings]. [Provider

Completion Device] supports all data types. If [Provider Completion Device] is not designated, nothing will be set.

If provider completion device write failed 3 times continuously, an error occurs.

When one of condition a through c is satisfied, provider is regarded as being completed.

a : If the “Reply Check” option in the [Detailed Settings] tab is checked, this feature indicates that a response was received from all providers, or indicates that polling termination was performed after the [Provider Timeout Time] elapsed and no response was received.

b : If provider is executed with “Reply Check” unchecked in the [Detailed Settings] tab, provider is regarded as being completed when having received replies from all provider destinations.

c : When condition a is satisfied and a [Retry] value has been entered in the [Detailed Settings] tab, this condition indicates polling termination was performed after the Retry was performed the specified number of times and no response was received.

Entering the following settings in the [Providing Condition] tab will disable the [Provider Completion

Device] feature.

• Checking [OFF After Providing] of [Upper Edge Trigger] or [ON After Providing] of [Lower Edge

Trigger] in the [Providing Condition] tab.

3-22

3.3 Registering Provider Data

You can set the [Automatic Device Reset after Reset of Provider Settings] checkbox only under the following condition.

• When [OFF After Providing] of [Upper Edge Trigger] or [ON After Providing] of [Lower Edge

Trigger] in the [Providing Condition] tab are not checked.

The following timing charts describe 4 kinds of provider completion conditions using “Upper Edge

Trigger” and “Lower Edge Trigger” in the [Providing Condition] tab.

• When [OFF After Providing] is checked while [Upper Edge Trigger] in the [Providing

Condition] tab is selected:

• When [ON After Providing] is checked while [Lower Edge Trigger] in the [Providing Condition] tab is selected:

Set providing condition device (via application program).

Application program recognizes provider completion when provider condition device is reset.

Provider Node

Device Providing

Condition Data

Pro vide data

Reset by the system after provider completion

Reply

Consumer Node

Writes provided data/Executes an action.

• When [OFF After Providing] is unchecked while [Upper Edge Trigger] in the [Providing

Condition] tab is selected:

• When [ON After Providing] is unchecked while [Lower Edge Trigger] in the [Providing

Condition] tab is selected:

Set providing condition device (via application program).

Reset providing condition device (via application program).

Provider Node

Device Providing

Condition Data

Pro vide data

Reply

Consumer Node

Writes provided data/Executes an action.

Wait for more than 2 check interval until executing next provider.

3-23

3.3 Registering Provider Data

• When [Provider Completion Device] is “designated” and [Automatic Device Reset after Reset of

Provider Settings] is unchecked while [Upper Edge Trigger] is selected in the [Providing Condition] tab:

• When [Provider Completion Device] is “designated” and [Automatic Device Reset after Reset of

Provider Settings] is unchecked while [Lower Edge Trigger] is selected in the [Providing Condition] tab:

Set providing condition device (via application program).

Reset both of providing condition device and provider completion device (via application program).

Provider Node

Device Providing

Condition Data

Pro vide data

An application program recognizes provider completion when provider completion device is reset.

Device Providing

Completion Data

Consumer Node

Reply

Writes provided data/Executes an action.

Set by the system after provider completion

Wait for more than 2 check interval until executing next provider.

• When [Provider Completion Device] is “designated” and [Automatic Device Reset after Reset of

Provider Settings] is checked while [Upper Edge Trigger] is selected in the [Providing Condition] tab:

• When [Provider Completion Device] is “designated” and [Automatic Device Reset after Reset of

Provider Settings] is checked while [Lower Edge Trigger] is selected in the [Providing Condition] tab:

Set providing condition device (via application program).

Reset providing condition device

(via application program).

If both of providing condition device and provider completion device have been reset, an application program can set providing condition device for the next provider.

Provider Node

Device Providing

Condition Data

An application program recognizes provider completion when provider completion device is reset.

Pro vide data

Device Providing

Completion Data

Consumer Node

Reply

Writes provided data/Executes an action.

Set by the system after provider completion

The system resets provider completion device when it recognizes provider condition device to have been reset.

3-24

3.3 Registering Provider Data

The following shows timing among [Providing Condition Device], [Provider Completion Device],

[Provider Result Storage Bit Device] (described later), [Provider Error Code Storage Device] (described later), [Consumer IP Address Storage Device] (described later) and [Provider Receive Alert

Device] to be set in the [Receive Alert Settings] tab.

Set providing condition device (via application program).

Provider Node

Device Providing

Condition Data

Pro vide data

Application program checks if provider was executed successfully from provider result when provider completion device has been set.

Provider completion device is set after saving provider result.

Device Providing

Completion Data

Provider Result

Storage Bit

Provider Error Code

Consumer IP

Address Storage

Consumer Node

Writes provided data/Executes an action.

Reply

If provider reply is an error, the provider result storage bit will be set, the error code will be set to the provider error code, and the consumer IP address will be set to the consumer IP address storage.

If the contents of the response are successful, the provider result storage bit will be reset.

Device Providing

Receive Alert Data

Provider receive alert device is set after the system writes provided data.

Provider receive alert device is reset by an application program at the consumer node.

[Provider Result Storage Bit Device]

Sets “0” if provider result is normal, and “1” if not. Data will be overwritten every time provider is received. You can set only symbols with the “Bit” format.

[Provider Error Code Storage Device]

Stores error codes when provider result is abnormal. You can set only symbols with the “16 Bits” or the “32 Bits” format.

[Consumer IP Address Storage Device]

Stores the IP address of the provider destination when an provider error occurs. You can set only symbols with the “32 Bits” format.

3-25

3.3 Registering Provider Data

t Settings T ab (This tab’ s settings are enab led onl y when the 2-W a y Driver is V er

.4.10 or later)

[Consumer Node]

Displays network entry nodes.

[Row]

Displays the number of provider record. You can set receive alert per provider record.

[Receiver Symbol Name]

Displays device symbols names to receive provider. Symbol names set on entry nodes are displayed.

[Provider Receive Alert Device]

Designate device to set to “1” (ON). Select device from the pull-down menu.

This device is set before provider completion device is set.

For details of set/reset timing between this device and other device, refer to the timing chart in the previous page.

Detailed Settings T ab (This tab’ s settings are enab led onl y when the 2-W a y Driver is

V er .4.10 or later)

[Provider Type]

Select the provider type.

[Reply Check]

Select if the replay for provider completion should be checked. The maximum waiting time is the provider timeout time.

[Retry]

Designates the Retry count when the “Reply Check” option is checked. Enter a numeric value from 0 to 32.

3-26

3.3 Registering Provider Data

[Provider Timeout Time]

Sets the provider timeout time. If you wish to change the provider timeout time to desired numbers, uncheck [Use Provider Timeout Time from Network Settings].

Provider timeout time designated per the network project file (

*

.npj) with Pro-Server V4.0 or older can be set per provider sheet. If you uncheck [Use Provider Timeout Time from Network Settings], you can designate provider timeout time per provider sheet individually.

If provider is executed before provider destination GP is started such as more than one GP is started simultaneously, an error is displayed on the provider destination GP. You can avoid unnecessary error display by setting the number of retry.

If you use the system in the environment where communication errors frequently occur, you can avoid unnecessary error display by setting the number of retry.

When a large volume of data is sent, the GP will not refresh its display whie data is being provided.

The volume of data which can be provided at one time differs depending on an area supported by PLC.

For the volume of data which can be provided at one time, refer to each PLC manual.

Moreover, symbols designated to provider nodes/consumer nodes depend on the maximum number of data which can be provided. The following table shows the relationship between the maximum number of data which can be provided and symbols to be designated.

Device Type to Access

Bit Device

16 Bits

Device

32 Bits

Device

Format

Bit

Bit

16 bits

32 bits

Single precision floating point

Double precision floating point

Character string

Bit

32 bits

Single precision floating point

Double precision floating points

Character string

Maximum Number of

Data When Designating

Special Protocol Symbols to Provider Nodes

255

Maximum Number of

Data When Designating

Special Protocol Symbols to Consumer Nodes

Maximum Number of Data

When Designating Other

Symbols to Provider/

Consumer Nodes

1 16

255

255

127

1

40

20

16

255

255

127

63

255 (single byte)

255

255

255

127

255 (single byte)

20

10

80 (single byte)

1

40

40

20

160 (single byte)

255

255

255 (single byte)

255

255

255

255

255 (single byte)

If you designate values exceeding those maximum numbers, the warning dialog will appear.

You can register 3 “Symbol Names” at maximum per “provider information”.

3-27

3.3 Registering Provider Data

If you select [String Fixed Number] in the [Symbol] field of the provider node, the count calculation will be performed automatically only by entering a fixed number. Although you can change this count to the larger number than the string number entered by a fixed number, do not change the number calculated automatically to avoid unfixed data to be entered.

• The check interval is defaulted to “500” ms.

• The process after providing should be set to “Complete Process”. The process is completed even when a providing error occurred.

If you designate the existing sheet name in the [Title] field of the [Provider Information] dialog, the following dialog will appear.

Change the sheet name in the [Title] field to something new.

If you wish to change a node (topic)’s data after it has been registered, simply right-click on the topic to bring up a list of selections. From these, click either the [Edit Node] or [Delete Node] selections, or, from the menu bar, click the [Edit(E)] menu’s [Edit Node] or [Delete Node] items.

The contents of provider settings may affect system communication speed. In such a case, refer to “A.5

Optimizing Communication Speed” and change settings.

Reference

“A.5 Optimizing Communication Speed”

3-28

3.3 Registering Provider Data

3.3.1

Checking for Provider Data Errors

The following procedure explains how to check provider data. If, after registering provider data, you delete the relevant symbol name or network node, or alter any symbol’s data type, an error message will appear. If no errors are found in the provider data, the data’s file size when it is downloaded to the GP will be displayed. The file size shown in this dialog box reflects the amount of GP screen area used.

(The following description assumes that the program’s main window is open)

1.

Click the [Check Provider Information] item in the [Tools(T)] menu.

3-29

3.3 Registering Provider Data

2. The following dialog box appears.

Although the program checks provider data automatically during saving, it will not display the file size.

In the following cases an error will occur:

After entering provider information,

· the data type of a symbol has been changed,

· a symbol name has been changed or deleted, or

· a node name has been changed or deleted.

If an error occurs, you will not be able to transfer the network project file (

*

.npj) to the GP.

DO NOT edit or delete a symbol, or that symbol’s designated provider node.

Maximum size of provider information data is 60 kbytes.

Rule of thumb

Base.........................................36bytes

Register Node..........................88bytes

Register Provide Information.....120bytes

3-30

3.3 Registering Provider Data

3.3.2

Action Items

Using the action item function, you can designate the desired action item(s) (called action item “contents”) so that a Consumer (only a Windows OS personal computer) which has received provider information will perform them.

You can start action items by setting the symbol name of the Provider node to the action name.

Action items must be set up, however, it is possible that they are not used during normal operation.

For a detailed explanation of action item functions, refer to “Chapter 4 Action Items”.

Reference

“Chapter 4 Action Items”

3-31

3.4 Using the DDE Function

3.4

Using the DDE Function

Pro-Server incorporates the DDE server function and therefore can exchange data with applications that support the DDE client function. The following description assumes that the program’s main window is open.

DDE: String Copy

1. Click the desired symbol name.

• With Excel, you cannot use DDE to write data because Excel does not support data writing as a DDE client. To write data to Excel, use the

VBA function.

Reference

“3.5 Using the VBA Support Function”

• If you use Windows XP, you cannot execute write using the DDE feature.

2. Select [Programming Support(P)]-[DDE: String Copy]. Or, right-click the symbol name, and then select [DDE: String Copy].

3-32

3.4 Using the DDE Function

3. When the following dialog appears you can paste the copied string into any DDE-compatible software.

4. Here, the copied string is pasted into an Excel worksheet to create a DDE link.

When a symbol’s data is text and is copied to an Excel cell, only the first character of the text will be displayed. In this case, edit that Excel cell and add the required characters.

Ex.)

=PROSERVER|GP1!’ SYMBOL .

*

20’

Be sure to put “’ (quotation marks)” around “!”.

Reference

“A.1 DDE Function Details”

3-33

3.4 Using the DDE Function

Workaround Example 1 for Mass Data

Creating an LS Area inside your PC

When using the (data) distribution feature, the creation of an internal LS (Pro Server) area inside your PC will allow you to read out data periodically via GP from one or more PLCs. The setting of the DDE feature to read out collected data from the LS area will allow the data in the LS area to be refreshed faster.

1.

Call up the Register Node feature to register the host PC.

To Register a Node, refer to “3.1 Registering Network Entry Nodes”

2.

Designate the IP address for host PC.

[PLC Type]

Designate the “Windows Personal Computer”.

3-34

3. Enter the settings for the PC’s internal LS area.

3.4 Using the DDE Function

[Consumer Node(s)]

Designate the LS area name that the host PC will use. You should designate the LS area name that you wish to use among LS, LSA, LSB ... LSY and LSZ.

For detailed Provider information, refer to “3.3 Registering Provider Data”.

4. Designate the LS area inside PC by the application which supports DDE.

3-35

3.4 Using the DDE Function

Workaround Example 2 for Mass Data

Creating an LS Area inside your GP

Creating an LS area inside your GP will allow your PC to easily read out data periodically from the GP. The setting of this feature allows data to be read out faster. This feature also speeds up data writing.

However, you must consider validity to the system because it affects GP’s refresh speed.

PC

For registering the read area, refer to “Device/PLC Connection Manual”.

Reference

“Device/PLC Connection Manual”

The GP’s LS area will vary depending on the GP system used. The following table shows LS area sizes according to GP system versions.

LS Area Size

4096

9999

GP

GP77R SERIES

GP-2000 SERIES/GLC2000 SERIES/IT SERIES

For the GP’s LS area size, the 2-Way Driver will automatically decide its accessible range.

GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows Ver. 7.0 or later should be installed on the GP system to use the LS area up to 9999.

3-36

3.5 Using the VBA Support Function

3.5

Using the VB A Suppor t Function

Pro-Server can read and write data both to and from applications supporting Visual Basic and Visual C++ using read and write functions. The following procedures explain how to write data from Excel to a designated symbol via a programming support function.

When developing applications with VB or VC, refer to “Chapter 9 Simple DLL Function”.

VBA: Declare statement

1. Selecting [VBA: Declare Function] from [Programming Support].

2. The declaration is copied to the Clip board.

3. Start-up Microsoft Excel. Select [Visual Basic Editor] from the [Tools] menu’s [Macro] feature.

3-37

4. Select [Module] from [Insert] in the Visual Basic Editor.

3.5 Using the VBA Support Function

5. Paste the declare statement in the inserted standard module.

6. This completes function declaration.

3-38

VBA: Write Function

7. Click the desired symbol name.

3.5 Using the VBA Support Function

8. Select [Programming Support(P)]’s [VBA: Write function] from the Menu Bar.

9. Write Command is now copied to the Clipboard.

3-39

3.5 Using the VBA Support Function

10. In Microsoft Excel, select the [Control Toolbox] from the [Views] menu’s [Tool bars] feature.

11. Paste the command button onto the sheet.

Command Button

12. Double click the button. The following VBA creation screen is displayed.

13. Paste the instruction statement in the program position of the VBA creation screen.

3-40

3.5 Using the VBA Support Function

14. Input the value to be written into the PLC device whose symbol is indicated. Replace the words

‘Input value here’ with the numeric value.

Example) When set to 100,

15. Click on the [Design] icon to quit the Design Mode.

Design Icon

16. Thus, when you click Excel’s Command Button, “100” is written to the PLC symbol’s device.

The Device Monitor feature allows you to easily check that the data has been written successfully.

Reference

“Chapter 6 Tools”

“100” has been written to the device.

3-41

3.5 Using the VBA Support Function

(Reference)

Cells that have been designated as using Excel’s Range Function can write data to a GP or PLC device. If you then change the value entered in this cell and push the Command Button, the device’s data will be immediately refreshed.

Reference

Step 11

1. Input the value to be written to the symbol’s PLC device.

Here, enter “Range(“A1”)” in the space shown by “Enter value here”

“IErr = WriteDevice16(“GP1”,“_DM100_WORD”, Range(“A1”),1,0)”

2. Click the [Design] icon to quit the Design Mode.

Design Icon

3-42

3.5 Using the VBA Support Function

3. Thus, when you enter 100 in Excel’s worksheet cell A1, and press the Command Button, “100” is written to the GP or PLC symbol’s device.

The Device Monitor feature allows you to easily check that the data has been written successfully.

Reference

Chapter 6 “Tools”

“100” has been written to the device.

When using VB.NET, if you insert the declaration according to this procedure, an error will occur when executing it.

You cannot use VBA: Declaration directly because data sizes of

Integer or Long are different between VB.NET and Visual Basic.

VBA: Declaration is for Visual Basic or Basic for Application.

3-43

3.6 Saving Backup Data in SRAM

3.6

Sa ving Bac kup Data in SRAM

Pro-Studio allows you to upload backup data stored in a GP’s SRAM to the host PC as a comma-delimited

CSV (Comma Separated Value) file. You can open CSV files using Excel, Access, or any application that supports the CSV file editing format. There are 13 types of backup data you can upload (or save).

1. Click [Save SRAM Backup Data] on the [Tools(T)] menu.

2. The [Save SRAM Backup Data] window appears. After selecting the network entry node, the data you wish to save, and the file in which the data is saved, click [Save].

For detailed information about each data, refer to GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows Tag Reference Manual.

Reference

“GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows Tag Reference Manual”

3-44

3. After data save starts, the elapsed time is displayed.

3.6 Saving Backup Data in SRAM

Elapsed time display

4. When the saving process has been completed successfully, the following window appears.

To open an SRAM backup data file you saved using Excel, start Excel, click [Open] on the [File] menu, and then select [Text file (

*

.prn;

*

.txt;

*

.csv]) as [Save as type].

3-45

3.7 Device Data Backup and Restoration

3.7

De vice Data Bac kup and Restoration

The device data backup function allows you to collect a series of device data via the Internet and to save it as data files.

The device data restoration function allows you to restore collected data from a series of devices.

The data saving format can be either BIN (binary) or CSV.

3.7.1

Device Data Backup

1.

Click the [Tools (T)] menu in the [Device Backup] window.

2.

The [Device Backup] window appears. After selecting all items, click [Backup].

3-46

3.7 Device Data Backup and Restoration

[Node Name]

Select the node name. If unselected, the error dialog will appear.

[Save Folder]

Enter the path to the folder that you wish to save data. This is defaulted to the “NPJDataBase” folder in the current directory of Pro-Server. If not entered, the error dialog will appear.

[File Name]

Enter the file name. By default, the file name will vary depending on the node name, the device address, the saved type and the data type. If not entered, the error dialog will appear.

[Device Address]

Enter the device address that you wish to start saving. This is defaulted to “LS0000”. If not entered or entered incorrectly, the error dialog will appear.

[Backup Number]

Enter the number of backup data. The maximum number of data that you can backup depends on the device. However, maximum numbers of data that you can backup from Special Protocol symbols are restricted to the contents of the table below.

Device Type to Access

Bit Device

16 Bits

Device

32 Bits

Device

Format

Bit

Bit

16 Bits

32 Bits

Bit

32 Bits

Maximum Number of

Backup Data from Special

Protocol Symbols

255

255

255

127

255

255

Maximum Number of

Backup Data from Other

Device

Depends on a backup data file

If you designate values exceeding those maximum numbers, the warning dialog will appear.

[Mode]

Select the saved type. This is defaulted to “BIN” (binary).

[Format]

Select the data type. This is defaulted to “16 bits unsigned decimal”. Select the number system only when the saved type is CSV.

If you select “CSV” for [Mode] when designating a special protocol symbol in the [Device Address] field, nothing will be output in the “Comment” field of the CSV file for addresses without symbol registration.

3-47

3.7 Device Data Backup and Restoration

3.

The backup processing status is displayed in the [now] dialog.

If the contents set in the [Device Backup] dialog are incorrect, following dialogs will appear.

Dialog Contents

Designate number up to 255 for data backup in the BIT format.

Cannot execute bit-type symbol backup other than in the BIT format.

Cannot execute symbol backup other than a bit-type in the BIT format.

Workaround

Reset the value in the [Backup Number] field, and then execute backup.

If you designated a BIT symbol in the

[Device Address] field, you cannot execute backup in formats other than BIT. Reset the format to “BIT”, and then execute backup.

If you designated a symbol other than a bit-type in the [Device Address] field, you cannot execute backup in BIT. Reset the format to something else but “BIT”, and then execute backup.

4.

When the backup process has been completed successfully, the following window appears.

Click [OK] to exit the process.

3-48

3.7 Device Data Backup and Restoration

• The following shows the data contents for CSV device data.

Node name, (Node name for backup) (CR)

Device name, (Device address to start backup) (CR)

Number, (Number of backup data) (CR)

Device length, (Bit length of the backup device) (CR)

Data type, unsigned decimal (CR)

Date, (Backup date) (CR)

(CR)

Data, comment (CR)

(Value of the first device address), (Name of the first device address) (CR)

(Value of the second device address), (Name of the second device address)

(CR)

• The backup date should be written in a format of (year)/(month)/(day) (space)

(hour):(minute). If (minute), if it is one digit, use 0 (zero) in the second digit.

3-49

3.7 Device Data Backup and Restoration

3.7.2

Restoring Device Data

1.

Click [Device Restore] on the [Tools (I)] menu of the Menu Bar.

2.

The [Device Restore] window appears. After selecting all items, click [Restore].

[File Name]

Enter the file name, which you have created according to the procedure in the section “ 3.7.1 Device Data

Backup”. All buttons except for the cancel button will stay dimmed until you designate the correct file.

[Format]

If you designate a file in the [File Name] field, the following table showing formats corresponding to files will appear.

File Format

Binary

CSV

Bit Length

1

16

32

1

16

32

Write Format

Unsigned decimal

Signed decimal

Hexadecimal

Unsigned decimal

Signed decimal

Hexadecimal

Display

Bit

16 Bits

32 Bits

Bit

16 Bits unsigned decimal

16 Bits singed decimal

16 Bits hexadecimal

32 Bits unsigned decimal

32 Bits signed decimal

32 Bits hexadecimal

3-50

3.7 Device Data Backup and Restoration

[Node Name]

Select the node name from the selection box. If unselected, the error dialog will appear.

[Device Address]

Enter the device address to start the restoration. When you enter the file name, the header address saved in the file is entered. If not entered or entered incorrectly, the error dialog will appear.

[Restore Number]

Enter the number of restoration data. By default, the number of data saved in the file is displayed when entering the filename. The minimum number to data to restore is one. The maximum number of data differs depending on a backup data file, however, you cannot restore the number of data exceeding the restriction in the table below.

Device Type to Access

Bit Device

16 Bits

Device

32 Bits

Device

Format

Bit

Bit

16 Bits

32 Bits

Bit

32 Bits

Maximum Number of

Restore Data from Special

Protocol Symbols

255

255

255

127

255

255

Maximum Number of

Restore Data from Other

Device

Depends on a backup data file

If the contents set in the [Device Restore] dialog are incorrect, following dialogs will appear.

3-51

3.7 Device Data Backup and Restoration

3.

The restoration processing status is displayed in the [now] dialog.

If the contents set in the [Device Restore] dialog are incorrect, following dialogs will appear.

Dialog Contents

Cannot designate a bit-type symbol to data restore other than in the BIT format.

Cannot designate a symbol other than in BIT to data restore in the BIT format.

The designated file is incorrect.

Workaround

If you designated a Bit symbol in the [Device Address] field, you cannot restore data in formats other than BIT. Reset the symbol other than in “BIT” in the

[Device Address] field, and then restore.

If you designated a symbol in formats other than BIT in the [Device Address] field, you cannot restore BIT data. Reset the BIT symbol in the [Device Address] field, and then restore.

If you designate a Bit backup data file by Pro-Server of the older version (V4.0) in the [File Name] field, you cannot restore it. Reset other file in the [File

Name] field, and then restore.

4.

When the restoration process has been completed successfully, the following window appears. Click [OK] to exit the process.

3-52

3.8 GP Capture Data Saving Function

3.8

GP Capture Data Sa ving Function

Pro-Server allows you to read the on-line GP capturing data on your network. This screen capturing is realized by two different ways, the way to execute it using the action item function or the interactive way.

This section describes the interactive capturing procedure.

For the procedure using the action item function, refer to “4.3.12 Upload of JPEG Data”.

Reference

“4.3.12 Upload of JPEG Data”

When you use the save feature of the GP screen, there are following restrictions.

• You can use this function only on GP-2000 series/GLC2000 series/IT series.

• Prior to performing this function with the CF Card inserted into the GP because the read data is temporarily saved in the CF Card.

1.

Click [Save GP Capture Data] on the [Tools (T)] menu of the Menu Bar.

3-53

3.8 GP Capture Data Saving Function

2.

The [Screen Capture & Save] window appears. After selecting all items, click [Save].

[Node Name]

Select the node name. If unselected, the error dialog will appear.

[Folder Name]

Enter the folder name to save data. This defaults to the “NPJDataBase” folder in the current directory of Pro-Server. If not entered, the error dialog will appear.

[File Name]

Enter the file name. This defaults to %NODE%Y%M%D%h%m%s (node name, year, month, day, hour, minute).

[Show Browser]

Select if you wish to display it on your browser after uploading the GP screen. If you check (ON) the box, it will be displayed on your browser. This defaults to unchecked (OFF).

When you execute [Save GP Capture Data], drawings and operations on the GP screen will stop for a few seconds. Therefore, you cannot normally execute the GP screen capturing operation from upperlevel PCs.

You should set the bit “0” of GP’s LS2076 to “ON (1)” to capture GP screens from upper-level PCs.

During capturing, the LS2077 bit is set to “ON” on GP. After finishing carpturing, it will be automatically set to “OFF”.

3-54

3.9 Security Function

3.9

Security Function

Pro-Server has a security function to protect PLC and GP data.

The following items are included in this function:

• Passwords to set up user levels (User level password)

• Password to protect accesses from unregistered personal computers (Remote password)

3.9.1

User Level Password Settings

Pro-Server can restrict the range of functions available to a user via three different password levels.

Be sure to write down every password registered so as not to forget it. You cannot log on to the system without the correct password.

1. Select [Password] in the [Configure(S)] menu.

3-55

3.9 Security Function

2. The Password window appears. Specify whether you enable or disable the password check by turning on the corresponding option. If you select [Enable], enter all the items and then click

[OK].

Operations available for each level are as follows:

Level

Administrator

Read / Write

Read only

Disconnect

Change settings

O x x x

Writing data

O

O x x

Reading data

O

O

O x

Change Settings...Provider information setting changes, etc.

Writing data.........Data write via device monitor

Reading data........Data read via device monitor

If you enter a password, the following Login window will appear at the start of Pro-Server.

3-56

3.9 Security Function

3.9.2

Remote Password Setup

In order to prevent illegal accesses by a personal computer that has not been registered on the network, a password can be registered for the entire network.

When remote access is attempted from a personal computer that has not been registered as a network node, a dialog box will appear asking for the password. After the registered password is correctly entered, remote access can be performed.

Be sure to write down each registered password. If a password is forgotten, remote access cannot be performed.

1. Select [Network] in the [Configure(S)] menu.

3-57

3.9 Security Function

2. The [Network Configuration] dialog box will appear. Enter a password in [Network Remote

Password] and click the [OK] button.

When selecting a node via a personal computer that has not been registered as a network node and selecting [Tool]’s [Remote Logon] from the Menu Bar, a dialog box will appear, asking for the password.

3-58

3.10 Configuring the System

The following describes how to enter Pro-Server and Pro-Studio system information. The following description assumes the program’s main window is open.

1. Select [System] in the [Configure(S)] menu.

3-59

3.10 Configuring the System

2. The [System Configuration] window will appear. Enter all necessary data and click [OK].

[DDE Polling Time]

The DDE polling time designated here will be used as an initial value of the polling time when a symbol is registered.

[GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows Folder]

Designate the folder where GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows is installed.

The default is “C:\Program Files\Pro-face\ProPBWin”.

[Network Project File Auto Load]

The designated network project file is loaded automatically when Pro-Server starts.

For access rights by modes:

Reference

“3.9.1 User Level Password Settings”.

For the detailed information for other items:

Reference

On-line Help.

• The polling time used set for collecting or writing data for each symbol, providing data and monitoring devices may not be able to be performed under certain conditions. These conditions include the currently registered number of GPs, number of Tags used on each screen sent, type of

PLC connection, and number of other currently open Windows applications. Entering “0” will allow the system to operate at its maximum speed.

Use this value as a benchmark when entering other values to “fine-tune” your system.

• If you create and add Pro-Server’s short-cut to the Windows Start Up menu, Pro-Server will start automatically with a network project that has been designated via [Network Project File Auto Load].

3-60

3.11 Configuring the Network

Configuring the Netw ork

Follow the procedure below to change the Network Port Number setting. The ports to be used should be consecutive ports, beginning with the first port number entered. The default port number setting is “8000” which uses ports 8000 and 8001. The following description assumes the Pro-Studio main window is open.

1. Click [Network] in the [Configure(S)].

2. The [Network Configuration] window will appear. Enter all necessary data and click [OK]. To enter advanced settings, click on [Advanced].

[Port No.]

For port numbers, ten numbers in series are used, starting from the designated number.

[Network Remote Password]

For a remote password through network, refer to “3.9.2 Remote Password Setup”.

[Using 32 bit Access with a 16 bit device]

Selects the access order of sequential two 16-bit devices which are regarded as a single 32-bit device.

3-61

3.11 Configuring the Network

3. The [Advanced Configuration] window will appear. Enter all necessary data and click [OK].

[Character Time Out]

Pro-Server is normally used via Ethernet, however, this is the reserved parameter to be used when you improve and use Pro-Server for serial connection. This setup is not used currently. (One byte of data will be sent at one time in serial communication, and if the interval exceeds the value designated here, it will be regarded as receive error and also regarded as timeout.)

[Connection Time Out]

While currently establishing connection, if there is no communication via the connection for the period of time designated here, the connection will be terminated. (You can establish only one connection for one consumer node.)

[Device R/W Time Out]

If there is no response within the time designated here after Pro-Server raised a read/write request, it will be regarded as timeout.

[Action Time Out]

If there is no response within the time designated here after provider or action is executed, it will be regarded as timeout. However, in the case of provider, this is effective only when you checked [Reply

Check] and [Use Provider Timeout Time from Network Settings] in the [Detailed Settings] tab.

Reference

“3.3 Registering Provider Data”

[Frame Time out]

When working on mass data, a provider node sends data dividing those into more than one packet, while a consumer node receives a packet sent in turn. If a consumer node cannot receive the next packet within the time designated here after receiving one packet, it will be regarded as timeout.

3-62

3.11 Configuring the Network

[TCP/IP Time Out]

In TCP communication, “ACK” will be returned to data sent. If “ACK” is not returned, it will be retried, however, if “ACK” is not returned even at retry time, it will be disconnected. Time designated here is maximum waiting time for one action from data sending till ACK return.

After you have selected an advanced setting, the following message appears.

Clicking [Use Defaults] resets all values to the default values.

3-63

3.11 Configuring the Network

3.11.1

Configuring Ethernet Cards

If the PC for Pro-Server has equipped with two or more Ethernet cards, it is required to designate the specific card for Pro-Server to use. If the PC has only one Ethernet card, there is no need to change the settings.

1. Select [Configure(s)]-[Network Configuration] item.

2. Click the [Ethernet Card] button. The Ethernet Card window will appear.

3. Select the IP address of the card to be used by Pro-Server and click [OK].

After changing the Ethernet card, make sure to restart both Pro-Server and Pro-

Studio.

3-64

3.12 Printing the Setting Data

You can Print Pro-Studio Setting data.

The items that can be printed are as follows:

· Provider’s list

IP address, sub net mask, PLC type

· Registered symbol information by provider

Symbol name, symbol type, device address, data type, polling time

· Registered provider information data by provider

Provider title, provider contents (conditions, symbol name, check interval, provider, receiver)

1. Select the [File(F)]-[Print(P)] command.

When no Network Project file (

*

.npj) is open, a dialog box will appear to ask a target file to print.

2. The default printer will print the data.

Printable paper size is A4 only.

3-65

3.13 Other Instructions

This section describes instructions that you need to know for the Pro-Server operation.

3.13.1

Special Protocol

Pro-Server recognizes following 12 kinds of protocols as “Special Protocol”.

• MITSUBISHI MELSECNET/10

• OMRON SYSMAC-CS1 (ETHER)

• HITACHI HIDIC H (ETHER)

• Siemens S7-200 via MPI

• Siemens S7-300/400 via MPI

• SIEMENS S7-300/400 (ETHER)

• AB Slc500 DH485

• AB ControlLogix (EtherNet/IP)

• Allen Bradley SLC5/05 (ETHER)

• Schneider TSX via UNI-TELWAY

• Schneider Modbus TCP (ETHER)

• Schneider Modbus RTU 1:n comm.

The symbol of special protocol cannot display the device address. Therefore, these symbols are described as “Screen

Creation Definition Symbol” on Pro-Studio.

All symbols for screens created by GP-PRO/PB III for Windows are normally screen creation definition symbols, however, only “Special Protocol Symbol” is described as “Screen Creation Definition Symbol” on Pro-Studio. In dialogs, if it is described as “Screen Creation Definition Symbol”, it means the symbol of special protocol.

The following figure shows the operation flow for the symbol of Special Protocol.

If all of symbols ( , and ) aren’t the same, Pro-Server can’t access Special Protcol Symbol.

PC

Ethernet

GP/

GLC

The Inside of PC

Pro-Server

GP-PRO/PB III for Windows

Import created symbols to Pro-Server

(Importing C-Package

Symbol)

Symbol

Checks if symbols imported to Pro-Server are same as those in GP/GLC. (Checking C-

Package Symbol)

Creates screens for

GP/GLC on

GP-PRO/PB III for Windows.

Symbols are created.

Symbol

Transfers created screens

(symbols) to GP/GLC.

Symbol

PLC

3-66

3.13 Other Instructions

Restriction When Using Drawing Definition Symbols with Pro-Server’s Various Features

When you use Special Protocol symbols defined by special protocols with Pro-Server’s various features, there are following restrictions.

Pro-Server Features

Print

Provider (trigger, provider node, consumer node)

Symbol Import, Export (2-Way, ProPB)

Device Monitor

Device Backup

Device Restore

Read Time Measurement

ProEasyAPI (ReadDevice, WriteDevice)

DDE

Device View

Action

O

O

O

GP-Viewer

Data Storage

GP-Web

O ........ no restrictions

No restrictions.

Restriction Contents

The number of device is restricted.

No restrictions.

The number of write device is restricted.

The number of device is restricted.

The number of device is restricted.

The number of device is restricted.

The number of device is restricted.

No restrictions.

The number of device is restricted. For the database storage feature, if symbol device definition is changed on the way, you cannot refer to precise past data.

For the play-back feature, if symbol device definition is changed on the way, you cannot refer to precise past data.

For the database storage feature, if symbol device definition is changed on the way, you cannot refer to precise past data.

When you imported the project file (

*

.prw) on Pro-

Server, you must re-compile it.

......... with restrictions

The maximum access number to special devices is as the following.

Device Type to

Access

Bit Device

16 Bits Device

32 Bits Device

Bit

Bit

16 bits

32 bits

Format

Single precision floating point

Double precision floating point

Character string

16 bits

32 bits

Single precision floating point

Double precision floating points

Character string

Maximum Number of

Read

255

255

255

127

127

63

510 (single byte)

255

255

255

127

1020 (single byte)

Maximum Number of

Write

1

1

40

20

20

10

80 (single byte)

1

40

40

20

160 (single byte)

3-67

3.13 Other Instructions

3.13.2

Address for Windows Computer

You can use up to 27 names as Windows computer exclusive device names, that is, LS, LSA, LSB, LSC,

LSD ... LSY and LSZ. The device address ranges from 0000 to 9999 in decimal word.

In BIT, upper 4 digits are designated in decimal and the lowest 1 digit is in hexadecimal ranging from 00000 to 9999F.

The PC exclusive LS area and be used as the setup area for simple DLL functions, the provider feature or the action item feature.

3-68

4

Action Items

This chapter describes how to set up and use Action Items.

4.1

Overview

4.2

Registering Action Items

4.3

Registering Action Item Parameters

4.4

Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

4.1 Overview

4.1

Over vie w

When you add an Action Item to your PC’s existing Provider data (registered in “3.3 Registering Provider

Data”), that Action (called an Action Item) will operate based on a trigger received from a Windows PC or

GP on the network.

16 types of Action Items are installed during the Pro-Server software’s standard installation. These include

Actions for uploading GP log data, writing data to a designated Excel book, and others.

To use Action Items, you must first register the desired Action and then set the conditions that will trigger that Action.

• Depending on the Action Item chosen, you may need to install Excel,

Access or a RDB (Relational Database) in both the Provider and

Consumer nodes.

This chapter’s description assumes that the required Excel, Access and/ or RDB have already been installed.

• If your PC is running Windows 98, Windows 98SE or Windows Me, and you have set up multiple Action Items, you may not be able to start an

Action Item due to insufficient memory. This problem cannot be solved, however, by adding more RAM memory.

4-2

4.1 Overview

4.1.1

Action Item Registration

The following procedure describes how to register an Action Item.

Designate Action conditions

Set up the type of Action to perform on a GP or on a

Windows computer. These conditions (power ON, timing, switch ON/OFF, etc) areused to perform

Actions (known as “triggers”) when you register

Provider information in the registration procedure .

Reference

“GP-PRO/PB III for

Windows Operation Manual”

Register entry nodes

Register Provider and consumer nodes as entry nodes.

Reference

“3.1 Registering Network

Entry Nodes”

Register symbols

Register symbols used for Action triggers.

Reference

“3.2 Registering Symbols”

Register and set Actions

Select Actions to register, and set Action parameters.

The setup contents differ depending on each selected

Action.

Reference

“4.2.1 Registering Action Items”

Reference

“4.2.2 Setting Action Parameters”

Reference

“4.3 Registering Action Item

Parameters”

Register Provider information

Register Provider conditions, or Provider and consumer nodes. Set an Action to perform as a symbol name of a consumer node.

Reference

“4.2.3 Registering Provider Information”

Reference

“3.3 Registering Provider

Data”

Transfer the network project file

Transfer the designated contents to entry nodes.

Reference

“8.1 Transferring Network

Project Files”

Registering the ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action Item is different from others. For procedures and , refer to “4.4 Using ‘Create Report using

Excel’ Action”.

4-3

4.1 Overview

4.1.2

Available Action Items

The following Action Items are available.

These Action Items are installed during the Pro-Server standard installation.

Start Application

This starts desired applications installed in Windows computers on the network.

Writes Data to Excel Book

This writes designated Provider data to an Excel book.

Alarm Log (with Sound Alert Feature)

This compares provided alarm log data with pre-defined data on the Access table and displays designated contents in a table (e.g. alarm messages) using Table View. You can also add a sound to an alarm notification by designating a Wav file in a table.

Upload of GP Log Data

This reads backup data online from SRAMs and CF Cards of Provider nodes by designating a reading source. You must set the logging and the alarm features on GP-PRO/PB III for Windows in advance and transfer it to GP of the Provider node.

Automatic Download of GP Filing Data

This writes filing data automatically. You can write filing data to SRAMs, CF Cards and internal memories

(FROM) of Provider nodes by designating a writing target.

You must set the filing feature on GP-PRO/PB III for Windows in advance and transfer it to GP of the

Provider node.

Automatic Upload of GP Filing Data

This reads filing data automatically. You can read filing data from SRAMs, CF Cards and internal memories

(FROM) of Provider nodes (GPs) by designating a reading source.

You must set up the GP unit’s filing feature in advance using GP-PRO/PB III for Windows. Once it is created, it must be transfered to the Provider node (GP).

Automatic Upload of Access Data

This reads device data into the Access file.

First, create a Access table in the desired format. This Action will compare Provider data with table data and read device data according to the table’s designated contents.

4-4

4.1 Overview

Automatic Download of Access Data

This writes data from the Access file to the designated device data.

Create the Access table in advance according to the designated format. If you set this Action, it compares

Provider data with table data and writes device data according to the contents designated in a table.

Download Recipe data for Excel

This writes data described in the Excel sheet to the designated device address.

Writes Data to E-Mail

You can send e-mails without programming. You can either use Provider data or choose a message created by Excel in advance as e-mail contents to send.

Upload to the database

This reads data at the device address designated by Excel or Access and writes to the designated relational database server.

- When you use Excel, data will be directly written to relational database.

- When you use Access, data will be written to the Access file once and then to relational database. Even if you fail to connect to the relational database, previously saved data will be written to relational database next time when the Action is started, so no data is lost. The table field for designated contents must exist in the designated relational database.

Download from the database

This reads data saved in the relational database server designated by the Excel or Access file and writes to the designated device address.

When you use Excel, data saved in relational database will be directly written to the designated device address. When you use Access, data saved in relational database will be written to the Access file once and then to the designated device address.

Upload of JPEG Data

This takes in capture data of a GP screen online to your PC. If a VM unit is mounted on a GP, you can also take in video capture data.

You must set the filing feature on GP-PRO/PB III for Windows in advance and transfer it to GP of the

Provider node.

Writes Data to CSV file

This writes designated Provider data to a CSV format file.

4-5

4.1 Overview

Writes Data from CSV file

Writes data from the designated CSV file to the designated device address.

Create Report using Excel

You can create a Excel book that includes a variety of information, that is based on PLC device data, GP screen data or backup data within GP. You can also create various reports such as a work report or an error report.

Available data types will differ depending on the Action Item to be used.

The following table shows data types that can be designated as a Provider node symbol name.

Action Name

Bit

16 Bits 32 Bits

Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD

O O O O O O O O

O O O O O O O O

Single Double

Precision Precision

Character

O

O

O

O

O

O

Start Application

Writes Data to Excel Book

Alarm Log (with Sound

Alert Feature)

Upload of GP Log Data

Automatic Download of

GP Filing Data

Automatic Upload of

GP Filing Data

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

×

×

×

×

Automatic Upload of

Access Data

Automatic Download of Access Data

Download Recipe data for Excel

Writes Data to E-Mail

(Title name)

O

O

O

O

Writes Data to E-Mail

(Table)

×

Writes Data to E-Mail

(no designations)

Upload to the database

Download from the database

Upload of JPEG Data

Writes Data to CSV file

Writes Data from CSV file

Create report using Excel

×

O

×

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

×

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

×

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

×

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

×

×

O

×

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

×

×

O

×

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

×

×

O

×

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

×

×

O

×

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

×

×

O

×

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

×

×

O

×

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

×

×

O

×

O

O

O

O

×

×

×

O

×

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

4-6

4.2 Registering Action Items

4.2

Registering Action Items

The information given here corresponds to registration procedures and (4.1.1 Action Item Registration). See references for registration procedures through and .

This section describes a series of Action registration procedures - from

Action registration to parameter setup and Provider information registration.

The example Action used here is “Writes Data to Excel Book”. Action and

Provider information registration are common to each Action Item, however, parameter registration steps will differ. For an example of entering other types of parameters, refer to “4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters”. The

“Create Report using Excel” Action has its own, unique setup procedures, and these are summarized in “4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action”.

4.2.1

Registering Action Items

Here you can register the name used for an Action Item.

1.

In the Pro-Studio main screen, click to select theNetwork Project tree’s “Action List” feature.

2.

Select [Edit (E)]-[Register Action] from the menu bar.

4-7

4.2 Registering Action Items

3.

In the [Edit Action] dialog box, select the desired Action Item from the pull-down menu and designate the Action name.

This example uses “Writes Data to Excel Book” .

[Action Registration]

If you wish to create your own (custom) Action Item, you must register the Action Item using the

[Action Registration] feature.

Standard Pro-Server with Pro-Studio Action Items are automatically registered during installation.

4.

Enter your desired name for the selected Action Item in the [Action Name] box.

5.

If you click [Parameter], the selected Action Item’s detailed settings dialog box will appear.

4-8

4.2 Registering Action Items

4.2.2

Setting Action Parameters

The following describes the entering of sample parameters for the “Writes Data to Excel Book” Action. For parameter setups of other Action Items, refer to “4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters” and “4.4 Using

‘Create Report using Excel’ Action”.

1.

If you select “Writes Data to Excel Book” and click [Parameter], the following dialog box will appear.

[Book Location:]

Designate the folder to save.

[Book Name]

Designate the book name. Books can be designated indirectly. For details, see 4.2.2 Setting Action

Parameters - Creating a Macro to Use Same Save File for Actions

[Zero Suppress]

If you check this option, no zeros are used in the file name even though the folder name includes

“%M%D%h%m%s” (month, day, hour, minute, second) data.

If you do not check this option, 0 (zeroes) are retained in the file name if the folder name includes

“%M%D%h%m%s” (month, day, hour, minute, second) 0 data, i.e. “07” or “02”.

The default is “checked”.

4-9

4.2 Registering Action Items

Writing in the Excel sheet is performed while searching blank line. A large amount of data in a sheet can slow down the writing process.

If a sheet is allocated using a book name like “%Y%M%D%h%m%s” , the writing process will be faster.

[File Save Method]

When you always wish to create a new book, check [Create new Book]. If you wish to add/append new data to old data, etc, check [Append data to Book].

If you check [Append data to Book], you can use the high-speed data write feature. For details, refer to the next page.

[Template File Location]

If you wish to use an existing template file, check [Use template file], and then designate the template file name (

*

.XLT).

The designated template file should contain only sheet1.

[Book is Currently Open]

Check this option when books with the same filename will be open during writing. Select either [Do not save data] or [Use Temporary Book].

If you check [Do not save data], written data will not be saved and it will be deleted.

If you check [Use Temporary Book], written data will be temporarily saved under a separate filename

(The temporary filename will be “%Y%M%D%h%m%s.xls”.).

[After data were written]

Check this option when you print out written data. Select the printing timing from either [Printing is every time] or [Printing is one every the sheet].

If you check [Printing is every time], printing will be performd every time data is written.

If you check [Printing is one every the sheet], printing will be performed after all data is written to the designated range.

4-10

4.2 Registering Action Items

2.

After setting all parameters and clicking [Next], the following dialog box will appear.

[Select a Data Write Pattern]

Designate the sheet write pattern.

Data is written on cells within a sheet according to the designated write pattern.

[Write Data Range]

If you wish to limit the write range to a single sheet, check [Use designated range].

If you click [Use Excel sheet], the following dialog box will appear and Excel will start.

After designating the write range in Excel (shown below), click [OK] in the above dialog box.

This sets the designated range as the data write range.

When the designated data write range is filled with data, a new sheet is automatically created and the write process is continued on a newly created sheet.

4-11

4.2 Registering Action Items

[High-Speed Data Write]

After you check [Append data to Book] as the data saving method in the [Setting Parameters] dialog box and designate the write cell range, [Utilizes high-speed data write] is enabled.

High-speed data write uses the designated data write cell location to start writing, which speeds up the writing process.

Check [Utilizes high-speed data write] and enter the cell where information for the write start location is saved in [Write Position Save Cell].

If you click [Reference], you can designate [Write Position Save Cell] using the same operation as

[Write Data Range], i.e. calling up the Excel sheet and designating the position with your mouse..

You cannot designate a cell designated by [Write Data Range] for the [Write Position Save Cell].

When you set up multiple Actions that use the “Writes Data to Excel Book” feature and then write to the same sheet using more than one Action, be sure to designate a different cell for each Action’s [Write Position Save Cell].

If you use the same cell for every Action, the write start location may shift.

[Call up Excel display]

If you check [Call up Excel display], Excel will automatically start as soon as the trigger conditions are satisfied and you can refer to write data.

However, Excel will quit (exit) after a preset interval once writing is finished.

[Time Stamp]

If you check [Attaches a Time Stamp in front of data], the provided time will be written in the starting cell. If you check [Attaches a Time Stamp behind data], the provided time will be written in the ending cell.

Time display format is fixed and written in [%Y %M %D %h:%m:%s] format.

4-12

4.2 Registering Action Items

3.

Designate each Action’s parameters and click [OK]. All the registered settings for the Action will then be registered.

User-designated Action name

Action Item used by the User-designated

Action

4-13

4.2 Registering Action Items

Creating a Macro to Use Same Save File for Actions

If the macro codes shown below are designated for the [Save File] name in an Action’s parameter settings, the file name can be changed to [Node Name] or [Save data in Device Name (Symbol Name) of Provider

Node)].

• Provider’s Node Name - Macro Code: %NODE

Ex.) If the participating Node (GP1) is designated using “Data_%NODE”, the filename will become

“Data_GP1”.

• Save data in Device Name (Symbol Name) of Provider Node - Macro Code: %DEV[Device or Symbol name]

Ex.) When saving “2043” to D100, if “Data_%DEV[D100] is used, the filename will change to

“Data_2043”.

When the data saved to the Provider’s device name (symbol name) is converted to a filename, the following usage cautions apply.

• Data Types when designating the Device Name (Default: Decimal, signed 16-bit)

The data type can be changed if after the device name a single-byte space and one of the data type designation shown in the table below are attached.

Ex.) When using decimal, unsigned 16-bit, and storing “40505” to D100, designating

“Lot_No%DEV[D100 .WORD]” will change the filename to “Lot_No40505”.

Data Type

Bit

Decimal Signed 16-bit

Decimal Unsigned 16-bit

Hexadecimal 16-bit

BCD 16-bit

Decimal Signed 32-bit

Designated

Characters

.BIT

.+WORD

.WORD

Data Type

Decimal Unsigned 32-bit

Hexadecimal 32-bit

BCD 32-bit

.HEXWORD

Single precision floating decimal

.BCDWORD

Double precision floating decimal

.+DWORD Character string

Designated

Characters

.DWORD

.HEXDWORD

.BCDDWORD

.FLORT

.DOUBLE

.STR

• Cautions when using Non-character Strings for Symbol Names

The filename is created using the data type registered in the “Register Symbol” dialog box.

Ex.) If the value “0x999” is saved to the BCD format symbol “Product_3”, when “Data_%DEV[Product_3]” is designated, the filename changes to “Data_9999”.

• Cautions when using Character Strings for Symbol Names

Attaching an asterisk (*) plus a number after a symbol name allows you to designate the number of characters. Default value is 32 characters, and the maximum is 255 characters.

Ex.) A string %DEV[MOJI .STR .*10] means that the 10 characters after the symbol name “MOJI” are read out, and file names are created until the string NULL is reached.

4-14

4.2 Registering Action Items

4.2.3

Registering Provider Information

The following describes how to register Provider information using an Action Item.

1.

Select the Provider information list from the main screen’s network project tree.

2.

Select [Edit(E)]-[Register Provider Information] from the menu bar.

3.

Select the Provider source node to use and click [OK].

4.

The [Provider Information] dialog box appears.

5.

Enter the desired Provider information name in the [Title] entry box.

Here, “Sheet2” is entered as an example.

6.

Select the [Providing Condition] item and enter the device address to be written to as the

Provider Node symbol name.

4-15

4.2 Registering Action Items

The following table shows data types that can be designated for the Provider Node symbol name.

Action Name

Writes Data to Excel Book

Bit

O

16 Bits 32 Bits

Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD

O O O O O O O O

Single Double

Precision Precision

Character

O O O

Be sure to use the following codes/values when you designate an Action Item’s data type.

Value

1

2

3

4

5

6

Data Type

Bit

Signed 16 bits decimal

Unsigned 16 bits decimal

16 bits hexadecimal

BCD 16 bits

Signed 32 bits decimal

Value

7

8

9

10

11

12

Data Type

Unsigned 32 bits decimal

32 bits hexadecimal

BCD 32 bits

Single precision floating point

Double precision floating point

Character string

When an Action receives data from Provider Node:

• When an Action receives data of “signed 16 bits decimal/unsigned 16 bits decimal/16 bits hexadecimal”, all data is processed as “signed 16 bits decimal”.

• When an Action receives data of “signed 32 bits decimal/unsigned 32 bits decimal/32 bits hexadecimal”, all data is processed as “signed 32 bits decimal”.

7.

Designate the Action Name used for the Consumer Node’s Symbol Name.

When entering Provider settings, only Consumer Nodes that are Windows PCs can be assigned an

Action Name. For Provider registration setting details, refer to “3.3 Registering Provider Data”.

4-16

4.2 Registering Action Items

8.

After all desired Provider Information settings are entered, click [OK], and that Provider

Information will be registered.

Registered Provider information name

Action name used by registered Provider information

Device address provided by the Provider node

9.

Save the network project file, and then transfer the data to the GP.

For the procedure to save and to transfer the network project file, refer to “8.1 Transferring Network

Project Files”.

4-17

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

4.3

Registering Action Item P arameter

For the procedure of designating an Action to register or registering Provider information using an Action, refer to “4.2 Registering Action Items”.

This section describes how to enter Action Item settings.

4.3.1

“Start Application” Action Item

This feature allows you to start desired applications in Windows computers connected to your network.

The following table shows data types that can be designated as the Symbol Name of the Provider Node.

Action Name

Start Application

Bit

O

16 Bits 32 Bits

Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD

O O O O O O O O

Single Double

Precision Precision

Character

O O O

1.

Select [Start Application] in the [Edit Action] dialog box, click [Parameter], and the following dialog box will appear.

[Application Name]

Designate the

*

.exe file for the application to be started. If you click [Reference], the [Open] dialog box will appear so that you can designate the application’s

*

.exe file.

You can also designate user-defined software applications (e.g.

*

.EXE or

*

.COM).

[Startup Options]

When a startup option or Provider data is used as a parameter, enter that data and click the appropriate check box to designate the type of data.

4-18

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

[Node name]

The Provider node name is automatically added as a startup option.

[Write data]

Provider data (write data) is automatically added as a startup option. If there is multiple Provider data,

<single-byte space> is added between <Provider data> entries .

Example : <starting options><single-byte space><Provider data><single-byte space><Provider data> ...

[Current Folder]

Designate the current folder that contains the [Application Name].

4-19

4.3.2

Alarm Log (with Sound Alert Feature)

This feature allows the simultaneous output of sound data and display of alarm data, while automatically saving a Provider’s Alarm history data.

Also, after creating the following Access table data, the Action Item’s table designation settings can be used to compare the Provider data and a Key Code, and then, based on the result, perform the designated Actions.

Example Access Table mdb file name:

Table name:

ProAlarm.mdb

ProAlarm

Field name

Designate the WAV files.

Enter the message you wish to have appear when the Action Item is started.

Value

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

The sample file “ProAlarm.mdb” is available in the “\Pro-Server with Pro-

Studio\Pro-SDK” folder.

The following table shows the data types that can be designated for the Provider Node symbol name.

Action Name

Bit

16 Bits 32 Bits

Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD

Single Double

Precision Precision

Character

Alarm Log (with

Sound Alert Features)

O O O O O O O O O O O ×

4-20

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

1.

If you select [Alarm Log (with Sound Alert Feature)] in the [Edit Action] dialog box and click

[Parameter], the following dialog box will appear.

Designate the table and field in the mdb file which have been created.

[mdb Filename]

Displays the name of the current folder's Access database file (*.mdb). Select the file with the desired alarm conditions, message(s) and sound (*.wav) information. Ex.“ProAlarm.mdb”

[Table]

Displays the table(s) found in the Access database file designated above. (Any table names containing spaces will not be displayed)

Select the table with the desired alarm condition, message(s) and sound (*.wav) information.

Ex.“ProAlarm”

[Key Field]

Designate the key field. After designating the table, the field within the table will be displayed automatically. Ex.“KEY”

You must also set the number data type to the field within the table designated by the KEY field.

[WAV Data Field]

Designate the sound field. After designating the table, the field within the table will be displayed automatically. Ex.“WAV”

[Message Display Field]

Select the field where you display a message. After designating the table, the field within the table will be displayed automatically. Ex.“DISP1, DISP2”

4-21

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

[Log Data Save Table]

If you check the Save To Folder location in the Action parameter display, and if the folder exists, the contents will display exactly as you designated.

If the folder does not exist, the following window appears.

Click [Yes] to create the folder. The folder creation window will appear. If you click [No], the folder designation window will appear to designate the [Save To] Folder location.

If you click [Cancel], the process is canceled.

[Number of Log Data Items]

Enter the number of items to be logged. When the number of items exceeds this value, the oldest (last saved) item is deleted.

4-22

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

4.3.3

Upload of GP Log Data

Back-up data can be read online from the Provider GP unit’s SRAM or CF Card by designating the read source.

If XLS format is selected for the data save format, Excel must be installed in the PC.

You must also set the GP-PRO/PB III for Windows logging feature to upload GP log data. For details of the logging feature, refer to “GP-PRO/PB III for Windows Operation Manual”.

When you open the network project file that contains the [Upload of GP Log

Data] action in a different environment (Japanese OS/English OS), the contents of the [Data type] are displayed incorrectly. Please make the settings of the [Setting Parameters] once again.

The following table shows the data types that can be designated for the Provider Node symbol name.

Action Name

Upload of GP Log Data

Bit

O

16 Bits 32 Bits

Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD

O O O O O O O O

Single Double

Precision Precision

Character

O O ×

1.

Select [Upload of GP Log Data] in the [Edit Action] dialog box and click [Parameter]. The following dialog box will appear.

[Read Location]

Select the reading source from either SRAM or CF Card.

4-23

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

[Data type]

Select one of the following items from the pull-down box

Logging Data

Trend Graph Data

Sampling Data

Alarm History Data

Alarm Log Data

Block 1 (When designating an alarm block in GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows)

Block 2 (When designating an alarm block in GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows)

Block 3 (When designating an alarm block in GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows)

Block 4 (When designating an alarm block in GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows)

Block 5 (When designating an alarm block in GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows)

Block 6 (When designating an alarm block in GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows)

Block 7 (When designating an alarm block in GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows)

Block 8 (When designating an alarm block in GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows)

[Save To Folder]

If you check the Save To Folder location in the Action Parameter display, and if the folder exists, the contents will appear exactly as you designated.

If the folder does not exist, the following window appears.

Click [Yes] to create the folder. The folder creation window will appear. If you click [No], the folder designation window will appear to designate the Save To Folder location.

If you click [Cancel], the process is canceled.

[File Name]

Designate the name of the file that data are saved to. “%Y%M%D%h%m%s” (Year Month Date Hour

Minute Second) has been set as default. File names can be designated indirectly. For details, see 4.2.2

Setting Action Parameters - Creating a Macro to Use Same Save File for Actions.

4-24

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

[Zero Suppress]

If you check this option, no zeros are supplied to the file name even if the file name includes zeros

“%M%D%h%m%s” (month, day, hour, minute, second). Ex. “04”, or “07”.

If you do not check this option, 0 (zero) is added to the file name if the file name includes

“%M%D%h%m%s” (month, day, hour, minute, second) data and that number is a single digit.

Default is “checked”.

[File Save Method]

Select either [Create new Book] or [Append data to Book].

If you designate a fixed file name, it will be written in sheet1.

[Book is Currently Open]

Select an Action from [Do not save data] or [Use Temporary Book] when books with the same filename are open during writing.

If you selected [Do not save data], written data is not saved when book files with the same filename are opened.

If you selected [Use Temporary Book], data is temporarily saved under a separate filename. The temporary filename will be “%Y%M%D%h%m%s.xls”.

[Save form]

Select either Excel (.xls) or text (.csv) file formats. You can also select both file types, and both types of files will be created.

[Template File Location]

If [Use template file] is selected, be sure to enter the Drive, Folder and Template File name.

• The designated template file should contain only Sheet1.

• If you designate the GP unit’s CF Card as a reading source, you must designate the file No. to be uploaded when entering Provider information, since more than one file exists in the CF Card.

4-25

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

2. Clicking the previous Setting screen’s [Next] button calls up the following screen.

[Select a Data Write Pattern]

Select the radio button that corresponds to the data write direction desired.

[Write Data Range]

Select the data range used for the data saved.

When CSV is selected as the data save format, the [Template] and [Data write] patterns cannot be selected. Settings are fixed to [Data write] : [Z] type, [Use all cells], [Item names are not used], and [Time stamp is not used].

4-26

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

4.3.4

Automatic Download of GP Filing Data

This Action Item will automatically download filing data to a Provider GP unit’s SRAM area, CF-Card, or internal memory FEPROM.

Data that has been previously uploaded from a GP can only be downloaded once. Also, only uploaded Excel data or CSV data can be changed, and even that data cannot be added to or deleted. Also, Comments,

Addresses, Data Formats and other data settings cannot be edited.

When data is being written to a GP’s internal memory (FEPROM) or to its

CF Card, the GP will switch to OFFLINE mode until the data transfer is completed. After the transfer is completed, the GP will be reset.

However, the “Online Transfer” option can be selected when writing to the CF

Card.

The following table shows the data types that can be designated for the Provider Node symbol name.

Action Name

Bit

16 Bits 32 Bits

Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD

Single Double

Precision Precision

Character

Automatic Download

of GP Filing Data

O O O O O O O O O O O ×

1. If you select [Automatic Download of GP Filing Data] in the [Edit Action] dialog box and click

[Parameter], the following dialog box will appear.

[Save Folder]

Select the folder where the downloaded filing data will be saved.

4-27

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

[Filename]

Designates where the write data source file will be saved. (.bin, .xls or .pfg)

When designating CSV files that were uploaded via GP Filing Data’s

Automatic Upload Function, be sure to select a “pfg” file. A pfg file contains

CSV file header information.

[Write to]

Designates the write data’s destination.

• When a CF Card is the write destination, selecting the “Online Transfer” option enables “online” download to the CF Card, i.e., data can be transferred even while the GP is online. This feature is available only with

GP2000 Series units. And you will need to install both GP-PRO/PBIII C-

Package02 or later and the 2-Way Driver version 4.10 or later.

• If you designate CF Card/(FEPROM) as a data read source, you must designate the file No. to be uploaded when entering Provider information settings, since more than one file exists in the CF Card/(FEPROM).

• After an Excel file is uploaded and saved as a CSV file, it cannot be downloaded.

• Grouping uploaded CSV files into an Excel file and downloading them is not possible.

• A CSV file exported from GP-PRO/PBIII can be downloaded to the GP unit by overwriting it with the corresponding uploaded CSV file. However,

Comments, Addresses and Data Formats specified in the uploaded CSV

File will then be downloaded to the GP unit, and all GP-PRO/PBIII settings will be lost.

4-28

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

4.3.5

Automatic Upload of GP Filing Data

This Action Item will automatically upload filing data from a Provider’s SRAM area, CF-Card, or FEPROM.

The following table shows the data types that can be designated for the Provider Node symbol name.

Action Name

Automatic Upload of

GP Filing Data

Bit

O

16 Bits 32 Bits

Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD

Single Double

Precision Precision

Character

O O O O O O O O O O ×

1. If you select [Automatic Upload of GP Filing Data] in the [Edit Action] dialog box and click

[Parameter], the following dialog box will appear.

[Read from]

Designates the read data source file:

SRAM, CF Card, FEPROM

If you designate the CF Card/(FEPROM) as the data read source, you must designate the file No. to be uploaded when entering Provider information settings, since more than one file exists in the CF Card/(FEPROM) .

4-29

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

[Save Folder]

If you check the Save To Folder location in the Action parameter display, and if the folder exists, the contents will appear exactly as you designated.

If the folder does not exist, the following window appears.

Click [Yes] to create the folder. The folder creation window will appear. If you click [No], the folder designation window will appear to designate the Save To Folder location.

If you click [Cancel], the process is canceled.

[Save Name]

Designate the file name used.

Default value is %Y%M%D%h%m%s. The [Reset] button will make your entry back to the default value. File names can be designated indirectly. For details, see 4.2.2 Setting Action Parameters -

Creating a Macro to Use Same Save File for Actions.

[Zero Suppress]

If you check this option, no zeros are supplied to the file name even if the file name includes zeros

“%M%D%h%m%s” (month, day, hour, minute, second). Ex. “04”, or “07”.

If you do not check this option, 0 (zero) is added to the file name if the file name includes

“%M%D%h%m%s” (month, day, hour, minute, second) data and that number is a single digit.

Default is “checked”.

[File’s Save format]

Designates the format used when the file is saved. Select either Excel (

*

.xls), Binary (

*

.bin - for GP-

PRO/PBIII for Windows) or CSV (*.csv) format.

If a CSV file was selected, a “.pfg” file, which contains CSV file header information, is created in the selected destination folder.

Uploaded CSV file data is saved in the same folder as the .pfg file. See the next page for an example folder structure.

4-30

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

CSV format folder structure:

The folder structure used when GP filing data is saved in CSV format-

Data save destination :

Filename :

Zero suppress feature :

C:\Program Files\Pro-face

FileData

Unchecked (Not used)

[Folder structure]

C:\Program Files\Pro-face\

\FileData\

FileData.pfg

0001.csv

0002.csv

0003.csv

The “Zero Suppress” feature is reflected even in the names of CSV files being saved. If “Zero Suppress” is used, the CSV filenames will be 1.csv, 2.csv, 3.csv etc.

4-31

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

4.3.6

Automatic Upload of Access Data

This feature reads device data into an Access file.

Be sure to create an Access table in advance to use this feature. This Action compares Provider Data with table data and then reads device data according to the contents designated in the table.

The following explanation uses the “ProRcp.mdb” file from the [C:\Program Files\Pro-face\Pro-Server with

Studio\Pro-SDK\] folder as an example. ProRcp.mdb contains 4 tables, the ProRcp table, the Data1 table, the Data2 table and the Data3 table.

„

ProRcp Table (Recipe DB Master Table)

If Provider data matches the [KEYCODE], device data is read to the [TBL] table, in the location described by the [MDB] cell.

Example : ProRcp Table

[KEYCODE]

Field compared with Provider data. The field in the Access database is “Number”.

[MDB]

Field used to designate the Access database file that contains the table designated by [TBL]. If the table to designate is included in the same file where the recipe DB master table is set, it can be left blank.

[TBL]

Field to designate the table where the data read source node and the symbol (device address) are set.

For example, if Provider data is “1”, the contents set in the [Data1] table in the [C:\Program Files\Proface\Pro-Server with Studio\Pro-SDK\ProRcp.mdb] file will be performd because the first line of

[KEYCODE] matches to the value.

„

Data1, Data2 and Data3 Tables (Recipe Information Table)

Sets the read data source node and the symbol (device address). These are also tables where read data is written to. You can designate more than one read source for one table.

4-32

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

[NODE]

Designates the read data source node.

[SYMBOL]

Designates the head (first address) of the symbol (device address) to be read.

[TYPE]

Designates the type of data to be read.

Writes here when data are read.

[DATA]

Designates where the read data is written to.

[NUMBER]

Designates the amount of sequential data to be read, starting from the symbol (device address) designated by

[SYMBOL].

As shown above, starting at GP unit internal address 100, data from 3 devices is read as signed 16 bit decimal data. Then, the TBL contents are copied to the file designated as the saving file, and data is written to the [DATA] field of the file. If more than one sequential data item is read, each data item is written separated with a comma.

However, in addition to the [DATA] field, read data is also written to the file designated in the Action as the save file.

The following table shows the different data types and their corresponding codes.

Value

1

2

3

4

5

6

DataType

Bit

Signed 16 bits decimal

Unsigned 16 bits decimal

16 bits hexadecimal

BCD 16 bits

Signed 32 bits decimal

Value

7

8

9

10

11

12

DataType

Unsigned 32 bits decimal

32 bits hexadecimal

BCD 32 bits

Single precision floating point

Double precision floating point

Character string

4-33

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

The following table shows the data types that can be designated for the Provider Node symbol name.

Action Name

Bit

16 Bits 32 Bits

Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD

Single Double

Precision Precision

Character

Automatic Upload of Access Data

O O O O O O O O O O O ×

1.

If you select [Automatic Upload of Access Data] in the [Edit Action] dialog box and click

[Parameter], the following dialog box will appear.

[Access Data Folder]

Enter the save destination (drive and folder).

(Ex. C:\ProgramFiles\Pro-face\Pro-Server with Studio\Pro-SDK\)

[mdb Filename]

Designate the mdb filename. (Ex. ProRcp.mdb)

[Table]

Select the reference table. When an mdb file is selected, all the mdb tables are automatically displayed.

(Ex. ProRcp table)

[Save Folder]

If you check the Save To Folder location in the Action parameter display, and if the folder exists, the contents you designated are displayed.

If the folder does not exist, the following window appears.

4-34

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

Click [Yes] to create the folder. The folder creation window will appear. If you click [No], the folder designation window will appear to designate the Save To Folder location.

If you click [Cancel], the process is canceled.

[Save Filename]

Designate the save filename.

Default value is %Y%M%D%h%m%s. The [Reset] button will delete your entry and revert back to the default value. File names can be designated indirectly. For details, see 4.2.2 Setting Action Parameters

- Creating a Macro to Use Same Save File for Actions.

[Zero Suppress]

If you check this option, no zeros are supplied to the file name even if the file name includes zeros

“%M%D%h%m%s” (month, day, hour, minute, second). Ex. “04”, or “07”.

If you do not check this option, 0 (zero) is added to the file name if the file name includes

“%M%D%h%m%s” (month, day, hour, minute, second) data and that number is a single digit.

Default is “checked”.

4-35

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

4.3.7

Automatic Download of Access Data

This feature writes to device data from a designated Access file.

Be sure to create an Access table in advance to use this feature. This Action compares Provider Data with table data and then reads device data according to the contents designated in the table.

The following explanation uses the “ProRcp.mdb” file from the [C:\Program Files\Pro-face\Pro-Server with

Studio\Pro-SDK\] folder as an example. ProRcp.mdb contains 4 tables, the ProRcp table, the Data1 table, the Data2 table and the Data3 table.

„

ProRcp Table (Recipe DB Master Table)

If Provider data matches the [KEYCODE], device data is read to the [TBL] table, in the location described by the [MDB] cell.

Example : ProRcp Table

[KEYCODE]

Field to be compared with Provider data.

[MDB]

Field to designate the Access database file including the table designated by [TBL]. If the table to designate is included in the same file where the recipe DB master table is set, it can be left blank.

[TBL]

Designates the table where the write destination node, the symbol (device address) and write data is set.

For example, if Provider data is “1”, the contents set in the [Data1] table in the [C:\Program Files\Proface\Pro-Server with Studio\Pro-SDK\ ProRcp.mdb] file will be performed because the first line of

[KEYCODE] matchesthe value.

„

Data1, Data2 and Data3 Tables (Recipe Information Table)

Sets the write destination node, the symbol (device address) and write data.

You can designate more than one read source for one table.

4-36

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

[NODE]

Designates the read data source node.

[SYMBOL]

Designates the head (first address) of the symbol (device address) to be read.

[TYPE]

Designates the type of data to be read.

[DATA]

Designates where the read data is written to.

[NUMBER]

Designates the amount of sequential data to be read, starting from the symbol (device address) designated by

[SYMBOL].

As shown above, starting at GP unit internal address 100, data from 3 devices is read as signed 16 bit decimal data. If more than one sequential data item is written, each data item should be separated with a space (comma) in the [Data] field.

The following table shows the different data types and their corresponding codes.

Value

1

2

3

4

5

6

DataType

Bit

Signed 16 bits decimal

Unsigned 16 bits decimal

16 bits hexadecimal

BCD 16 bits

Signed 32 bits decimal

Value

7

8

9

10

11

12

DataType

Unsigned 32 bits decimal

32 bits hexadecimal

BCD 32 bits

Single precision floating point

Double precision floating point

Character string

The following table shows the data types that can be designated for the Provider Node symbol name.

Action Name

Automatic Download of Access Data

Bit

16 Bits 32 Bits

Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD

Single Double

Precision Precision

Character

O O O O O O O O O O O ×

4-37

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

1.

If you select [Automatic Download of Access Data] in the [Edit Action] dialog box and click

[Parameter], the following dialog box will appear.

[Access Data Folder]

Designate the Access file name (drive and folder). (Ex. C:\ProgramFiles\Pro-face\Pro-Server with

Studio\Pro-SDK\)

When the folder where Access files are saved is checked in the Action setting display, if the folder exists, information set will be displayed. If not, the following will appear.

Click [Yes] to create the folder and the folder creation window will appear. If you click [No], the folder designation window will appear to designate the Save To Folder location.

If you click [Cancel], the process is canceled.

[mdb Filename]

Select the desired mdb file. (Ex. ProRcp.mdb)

[Table]

Select the desired Table file. (Ex. ProRcp table)

Select the mdb file which includes the recipe DB master table.

4-38

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

4.3.8

Download Recipe data for Excel

This feature writes Excel sheet data to a specified device address. The following two types of Excel sheet data can be used for designating write data.

When writing to sequential single-area addresses: Column Change [One Sheet Mode]

When writing to sequential multi-area addresses: Column Change [Any Sheet Mode]

• Device access is performed at a rate of 255 times per scan. Thus, if you designate more than 255, a time lag will occur.

• If you designate a device address that does not exit, a device access error will occur.

Column Chang e [One Sheet Mode] T ype

Block

Item

Address

Data Type

Block1

1

13

18

8

22

Block2

3

5

D108

2

12

2

7

17

9

Block3

21

6

3

10

14

If the Provider’s data and a Block No. matches, the data in that column will be written to the device address specified in [Address]. Only one device address can be specified. [Item] specifies the number of sequential words (up to 10,000 words) to write from the first (top) address specified in [Address].

Designate the write data format (type) in [Data Type].

The following table shows the different data types and their corresponding codes.

Value

1

2

3

4

5

6

Data Type

Bit

Signed 16 bits decimal

Unsigned 16 bits decimal

16 bits hexadecimal

BCD 16 bits

Signed 32 bits decimal

Value

7

8

9

10

11

Data Type

Unsigned 32 bits decimal

32 bits hexadecimal

BCD 32 bits

Single precision floating point

Double precision floating point

Sample table file is in the folder “\Pro-Server with Pro-Studio\Pro-SDK”.

4-39

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

Column Chang e [An y Sheet Mode] T ype

Block

4

Block Name

Address

Item

Data Type

1

D100

7

2

1

2

2

3

Sheet1 Sheet2 Sheet3

2

D200

5

2

2

4

5

6

3

D300

7

2

1

2

2

3

4

D400

2

3

4

4

If the Provider data and a Sheet No. match, the data in that sheet will be written to the device address(es) specified in [Address]. Multiple device addresses can be specified at one time. [Item] specifies the number of sequential words to write from the first (top) address specified in [Address].

Designate the write data type to [Data Type].

Designate the [Data Type] using the same method as used in “Column Change [One Sheet Mode]” on the previous page.

The following table shows the data types that can be designated for the Provider Node symbol name.

Action Name

Download Recipe

Data for Excel

Bit

16 Bits 32 Bits

Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD

Single Double

Precision Precision

Character

O O O O O O O O O O O ×

4-40

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

1. If you select [Download Recipe Data for Excel] in the [Edit Action] dialog box and click [Parameter], the following dialog box will appear.

[Book Location]

Designate the Excel file name.

If you check the Save To Folder location in the Action parameter display, and if the folder exists, the contents you designated are displayed.

If the folder does not exist, the following window appears.

Click [Yes] to create the folder. The folder creation window will appear. If you click [No], the folder designation window will appear to designate the Save To Folder location.

If you click [Cancel], the process is canceled.

[Select Cell:Sheet]

Select the desired Excel sheet name to read. When [Any Sheet Mode] is selected in [Column change], sheet name will change to [Sheet%n].

[Select Cell:Cell]

Designate the first cell to be read. Click [Reference] to allow you to designate the cell using Excel.

[Select Mode]

Designate the data sheet type to be written.

4-41

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

4.3.9

Writes Data to E-Mail

This Action feature allows you to automatically send an E-Mail without special programming. Mail data can be the Provider’s data or the message sheet created by Excel. Multiple error information items can also be sent by E-Mail. This feature allows you to quickly contact employees or managers about site problems, without having to rely on an operator to send the message.

There are three email types.

• Send Provider data as Title

• Send fixed Title

• Send Title and message using Provider data

The following describes how to enter setting data for each method.

“Send Provider Data as Title”

Uncheck [Title name] and [Table] and use the same Symbol Type data used for Provider information.

“Send Fixed Title”

Check the [Title name] field and designate a Title.

“Send Title and Message Using Provider Data”

Check [Table name] and designate the Excel template file created.

If Provider data matches the value in the Key_Code field, the data in that line will be sent by email.

Example Excel Messa g e Sheet

Device A Failure Valve 1 failed.

Device A Failure Stopped device A due to a failure.

Device A Failure Valve 1 failed. The repair part is at F1.

Device C Failure Valve 2 failed.

Device C Failure Stopped device C due to a failure.

Device C Failure Valve 2 failed. The repair part is at F1.

Device B Failure Oil pressure of device B is abnormal.

Device B Failure Oil pressure of device B is abnormal.

Device B Failure Stopped device B due to a failure.

When sending the same message to more than one destination, enter those addresses in the Key_Code field, separating them with commas.

If you do not create the [Address] column, an email is sent to the address designated in the

[Send Mail Address] field of the [Setting Mail Information] dialog box.

4-42

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

• You can register, at maximum, 5 messages with the same Key_Code.

• If an email cannot be sent, an error message will appear in the log viewer.

The following table shows the data types that can be designated for the Provider Node symbol name.

Action Name

Bit

16 Bits 32 Bits

Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD

Single Double

Precision Precision

Character

Writes Data to E-

Mail (Title name)

O O O O O O O O O O O O

Writes Data to E-

Mail (Table)

Writes Data to E-Mail

(no designations)

×

×

O

×

O

×

O

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

O

1. If you select [Writes Data to E-Mail] in the [Edit Action] dialog box and click [Parameter], the following dialog box will appear.

[Mail server settings]

Specify the mail server used to send the email.

[POP before SMTP]

Check this setting to authenticate the POP address when sending mail. If selected, a authentication is performed using a POP3 server prior to connecting to an SMTP server and sending data.

[POP server name]

Designates the POP3 server used for POP authentication.

[POP3 port number]

Designates the port used to communicate with the POP3 server. Range is from 1 to 65535.

4-43

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

[User name]

*1

Designates the user name used when performing POP3 authentication.

[Password] *1

Designates the password used when performing POP3 authentication.

[Mail address]

Enter the sender’s email address

[Send Mail address]

Enter a receiver’s email address.

Enter addresses separated by commas per Key_Code, as shown in the previous page’s sheet example, to send to more than one destination. If the “Address” column does not exist in the sheet, an email is sent to the mail address designated here.

[Message type]

Set when sending a fixed message.

[Table information]

Designates when a Excel message sheet is used.

If the Provider’s data matches the Key_code, the title and message in the specific line will be sent.

If you check the Save To Folder location in the Action parameter display, and if the folder exists, the contents you designated are displayed.

If the folder does not exist, the following window appears.

Click [Yes] to create the folder. The folder creation window will appear. If you click [No], the folder designation window will appear to designate the Save To Folder location.

If you click [Cancel], the process is canceled.

*1 Pro-Server Ver. 4.5 uses the [User Name]and [Password] settings for POP confirmation.

4-44

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

4.3.10

Upload to the database

Reads data from device address(es) specified by Excel or Access and writes the data to a designated relational database. This inserts a new record into the database and saves data to that record.

Enter the device address to read from, or the database to write data to using an Excel book file (

*

.xls) or an

Access database file (

*

.mdb).

You can change the device address to read from or database to write to via the Provider data settings.

Using Excel, the data will directly be written to the relational database. Using Access, data will be temporarily saved in a file and then be written to the relational database. Even if the attempt to connect to the relational database fails, the saved data is not deleted and can be written to the relational database when the

Action is triggered again. Be sure to create the table fields in the desired relational database.

field1 field2

....

Uploaded data is written here.

Example Excel Sheet

Data Base

DBA

DBA

DBB

Table table1 table1 table2

Enter titles in cells on the first line.

Example Access Table

Data Base

DBA

Table table1

DBA

DBB table1 table2

Enter titles in field names.

Device

D100

D101

D102

Device

D100

D101

D102

Field field1 field2 field1

Field field1 field2 field1

Type

2

2

2

Type

2

2

2

4-45

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

The following describes each Excel sheet and Access table item.

[Data Base]

Designates the name of database to write to.

[Table]

Designate the table name of database to write to.

[Device]

Designate the name of device to write to.

[Field]

Designate the field of device to write to.

[Type]

Designate the data type of data to write.

Data types are designated by the following values.

Value

1

2

3

4

5

6

Data Type

Bit

Signed 16 bits decimal

Unsigned 16 bits decimal

16 bits hexadecimal

BCD 16 bits

Signed 32 bits decimal

Value

7

8

9

10

11

12

Data Type

Unsigned 32 bits decimal

32 bits hexadecimal

BCD 32 bits

Single precision floating point

Double precision floating point

Character string

In the case of Microsoft Excel Sheet Example (or Microsoft Access Table Example), the value of [D100] device of the provider node is written to the [field1] field of the [table1] table in [DBA] database as signed

16 bits decimal data (Data Type [2]). Equally, the value of the [D101] device and that of the [D102] device are written to the [field2] field of the [table1] table in [DBA] database and to the [field3] field of the [table2] table in [DBB] database respectively as signed 16 bits decimal data (Data Type [2]).

• The sample table file (ProDB.xls) is available in the “\Pro-Server with Pro-

Studio\Pro-SDK” folder. When using ProDB.xls, DataBase.mdb is in the same folder as the relational database sample.

• When [Type] is designated as “12 (Character string)”, 255 characters are read in from the device address designated in [Device] and until a NULL string is reached, data is written to the database.

The following table shows the data types that can be designated for the Provider Node symbol name.

Action Name

Upload to Database

Bit

O

16 Bits 32 Bits

Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD

O O O O O O O O

Single Double

Precision Precision

Character

O O O

4-46

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

1.

If you select [Upload to Database] in the [Edit Action] dialog box and click [Parameter], the following dialog box will appear.

[Database information]

Designate the information required to access the database server. Select either [SQL Server], [Oracle

ODBC Driver] or [DSN].

• When [Oracle ODBC Driver] is selected, the server name cannot be set.

• Only Oracle8 is supported.

• For [Oracle ODBC Driver], use Version 8.0.5.5.0 or later. If you use an older version, the “A reverse set does not support a reverse scroll.” message will appear and the Action will quit (exit).

• [DSN] supports only Microsoft Access. For setting information, refer to the following [Setting up DSN] section.

• When [DSN] is selected, do not enter any data for the server name.

• Do not use the search feature while the Microsoft Access Design view is open.

[Normally connected to server]

If you wish to connect to the server all the time, check [Normally connected to server].

[If connection request is not received within standard time period, connection is terminated.]

If you wish to disconnect from database when there is no communication with the server for a certain period of time, check this item. This can be set only if [Normally connected to server] is checked.

Designate the time period in [Min.] box.

4-47

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

[Database Access Method]

Select whether to write to the database at once (Excel) or to write to the database after saving data

(Access).

[File designation]

Designate a file location and a sheet/table name.

If you check the Save To Folder location in the Action parameter display, and if the folder exists, the contents exactly as you designated is displayed.

If the folder does not exist, the following window appears.

Click [Yes] to create the folder and the folder creation window will appear. If you click [No], the folder designation window will appear to designate the Save To Folder location.

If you click [Cancel], the process is canceled.

2. When clicking [Details], the following setting window will appear.

[Automatic establishment]

Select when Provider’s name and/or data time are required to be written, and enter the target field name(s).

[A setup of a server]

Enter the communication time-out time and the number of retries used when connecting to the database server . If you have checked [If connection request is not received within standard time period, connection is terminated.] in the [Upload from the database] dialog, designate the time allowed until connection is cut with the database server.

4-48

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

Setting up DSN

This example uses Microsoft Access running on Windows 2000 when registering a DSN to the ODBC Data

Source.

1. Click on [Control Panel] -> [Administrative Tools] -> [Data Sources (ODBC)] and the following dialog box will appear.

2. Select [Microsoft Access Driver (*.mdb)] and click [Finish].

3. Enter the Data Source Name and click [Select].

4-49

4. Select the previously created Access mdb file and click [OK].

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

5. Click [OK].

6. Check that the Data Source Name entered in step 3 is correct and click [OK].

4-50

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

4.3.11

Download from the database

Reads data from the relational database specified by Excel or Access and writes to the specific device address(es).

Device address to write to or database where write data is located is entered in the Excel book file (

*

.xls) or the Access database file (

*

.mdb).

You can change the designation of the device address to write to, or the database where where write data is located using the Provider data settings.

Using Excel, the data will directly be written into the specified device address(es). Using Access, data will once be written once as Access file and then be written into the specified device address(es).

Example Excel Sheet

Data Base

DBA

Table table1

DBA

DBB table1 table2

Enter titles in cells on the first line.

Device

D100

D101

D102

Example Access Table

Data Base

DBA

DBA

DBB

Table table1 table1 table2

Enter titles in field names.

Device

D100

D101

D102

Field field1 field2 field1

Field field1 field2 field1

Type

2

2

2

Type

2

2

2

Table Example in Database (Contents of table1 in “DBA” (database name)) seqNo

F1 F2 F3

1

100 110 130

2

101 111 131

This value will be acquired (read) if you designate

“field1” as the field name.

3

102 112 132

4

103 113 133

If “2” is designated as the “seqNo” to read by the Provider data, this row of data will be read.

4-51

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

The following describes each item in the Excel sheet and the Access table.

[Data Base]

Designate the name of database to be read.

[Table]

Designate the table name of database to be read.

[Device]

Designate the name of device to be read.

[Field]

Designate the field of device to be read.

[Type]

Designate the data type of data to be read.

Data types are designated by the following values.

Value

1

2

3

4

5

6

Data Type

Bit

Signed 16 bits decimal

Unsigned 16 bits decimal

16 bits hexadecimal

BCD 16 bits

Signed 32 bits decimal

Value

7

8

9

10

11

12

Data Type

Unsigned 32 bits decimal

32 bits hexadecimal

BCD 32 bits

Single precision floating point

Double precision floating point

Character string

The following describes the operation contents of this action using “Microsoft Excel Sheet Example”,

“Microsoft Access Table Example”, and “Table Example in Database (the contents of table1 in database called ‘DBA’)” in the previous page as reference examples.

If provider data indicating a line within the sheet/table is [1], it means that the 2nd line of the sheet/table has been designated. The [table1] table in [DBA] database (refer to “Microsoft Excel Sheet Example” and

“Microsoft Access Table Example” in the previous page) is acquired according to the setting in the 2nd line.

Next, the line where the same value as that of provider data designating “seqNo” is stored is searched from the acquired “seqNo” field of the “table1” table in [DBA] database. For example, if the value of provider data designating “seqNo” is “2”, the line with “seqNo” (refer to “Table Example in Database” in the previous page) of “2” will be searched.

When the provider data's data type is not string, if the provider data's value is "0", the bottom-most row is searched. Do not use "0" with "seqNo".

4-52

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

The sheet/table is searched again on the action side to acquire the field name, and the value of the designated part is acquired. In this example, according to the setting of the 2nd line in the sheet/table, “field1” is acquired, and then the value of “101” existing in “field1” in the “2”nd line (refer to “Table Example in

Database” in the previous page) is acquired.

Finally, the acquired value is written to device designated in the sheet/table in the designated data type. In this example, according to the setting of the 2nd line of the sheet/table, the value is written to [D100] device

(Device=[D100]) of the provider node as signed 16 bits decimal data (Type=[2]).

The following table shows data types that can be designated to the symbol name of the Provider node per Action.

Action Name

Download from Database

Bit

×

16 Bits 32 Bits

Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD

O O O × × × × ×

Single Double

Precision Precision

Character

× × O

1. If you select [Download from Database] in the [Edit Action] dialog box and click [Parameter], the following dialog box will appear.

[Database information]

Designate the required information to access the database server. You can select the driver name from either [SQL Server], [Oracle ODBC Driver] or [DSN].

4-53

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

• When [Oracle ODBC Driver] is selected, the server name cannot be set.

• Only Oracle8 is supported.

• For [Oracle ODBC Driver], use Version 8.0.5.5.0 or later. If you use an older version, the “A reverse set does not support a reverse scroll.” message will appear and the Action will quit (exit).

• [DSN] supports only Microsoft Access. For setting information, refer to 4.3.10

Upload to Database [Setting up DSN] section.

• When [DSN] is selected, do not enter any data for the server name.

• Do not use the search feature while the Microsoft Access Design view is open.

[Normally connected to server]

If you wish to connect to the server all the time, check [Normally connected to server].

[If connection request is not received within standard time period, connection is terminated.]

If you wish to disconnect from database when there is no communication with the server for a certain period of time, check this item. This can be set only if [Normally connected to server] is checked.

Designate the time period in [Min.] box.

[Database Access Method]

Selected data is written from the database at once (Excel) or written after being saved (Access).

[File designation]

Designate a file location and a sheet/table name.

If you check the Save To Folder location in the Action parameter display, and if the folder exists, the contents exactly as you designated is displayed.

If the folder does not exist, the following window appears.

Click [Yes] to create the folder. The folder creation window will appear. If you click [No], the folder designation window will appear to designate the Save To Folder location.

If you click [Cancel], the process is canceled.

4-54

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

2. When clicking [Details], the following setting window will appear.

[A setup of a server]

Enter the communication time to the database server and the number of retries performed.

If you have checked [If connection request is not received within standard time period, connection is terminated.] in the [Upload from the database] dialog, designate the time until connection is established with the database server.

4-55

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

4.3.12

Upload of JPEG Data

Pro-Server allows you to read the on-line GP screen data in your PC. If the VM unit is attached to the GP, video capture data can also be read.

Prior to performing this Action, be sure you have a CF Card inserted into the GP, since read data is temporarily saved in the CF Card.

You can use this Action on GP2000 Series, GLC2000 Series and IT Series units.

The following table shows the data types that can be designated for the Provider Node symbol name.

Action Name

Upload of GP JPEG Data

Bit

O

16 Bits 32 Bits

Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD

O O O O O O O O

Single Double

Precision Precision

Character

O O O

1.

If you select [Upload of GP JPEG Data] in the [Edit Action] dialog box and click [Parameter], the following dialog box will appear.

[Capture Data Type]

Select data to read.

If you selected “GP Capture Data”, the displayed GP screen is captured and uploaded.

If you selected “Video Capture Data”, the video screen data saved in the CF Card is uploaded. If you select [Video Capture Data], you cannot designate [File Name], [Zero Suppress] or [Show Browser].

The default is “GP Capture Data”. Also, the maximum number of JPEG files that can be uploaded at one time is 32767.

4-56

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

[Upload from CF Card]

You should select either to upload all the video screen data in the CF Card, or to upload only files that do not exist in the directory designated by [Save To] or that have been updated.

This defaults to “Upload All Files”.

This item can be designated only when [Video Screen Saving Data] has been selected in [Select Data to

Read].

For information about how to capture video screens:

Reference

“GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows Tag Reference Manual Extended Functions of VM Unit”

[Save To Folder]

If you check the Save To Folder location in the Action parameter display, and if the folder exists, the contents exactly as you designated is displayed.

If the folder does not exist, the following window appears.

Click [Yes] to create the folder. The folder creation window will appear. If you click [No], the folder designation window will appear to designate the Save To Folder location.

If you click [Cancel], the process is canceled.

[File Name]

Designate the file name to save JPEG files read. The extension is “

*

.jpg”. This is defaulted to

“%NODE%Y%M%D%h%m%s” (node name, year, month, day, hour, minute, second). The exact file name in the CF Card is used if [Video Screen Saving Data] has been selected at [Select Data to Read].

File names can be designated indirectly. For details, see 4.2.2 Setting Action Parameters - Creating a

Macro to Use Same Save File for Actions.

[Zero Suppress]

If you check this option, no zeros are supplied to the file name even if the file name includes zeros

“%M%D%h%m%s” (month, day, hour, minute, second). Ex. “04”, or “07”.

If you do not check this option, 0 (zero) is added to the file name if the file name includes

“%M%D%h%m%s” (month, day, hour, minute, second) data and that number is a single digit.

Default is “checked”.

4-57

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

[This file name already exists.]

If you wish to overwrite existing files, check [Save Rewrite]. If you do not want to overwrite existing files, check [Number End of File Name].

This is defaulted to [Number End of File Name].

[Show Browser]

When this item is checked, the data uploaded is displayed using a special JPEG file browser.

This browser can be used to print, copy or call (start up) other Windows JPEG “viewer” applications

(Internet Explorer, Paint, etc.).

When you perform [Save GP Capture Data], GPunit screen displays and operation will stop for a few seconds. Therefore, you cannot perform the GP screen capture operation from a host-level PC. You should set the bit “0” of the GP unit’s LS2076 to “ON (1)” to capture GP screens from a host-level PC.

The 0 bit of LS2077 will become ON (1) during capturing, and it becomes OFF (0) when completed.

4-58

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

4.3.13

Writes Data to CSV file

This Action writes designated Provider data to a CSV file.

The following table shows the data types that can be designated for the Provider Node symbol name.

Action Name

Writes Data to CSV File

Bit

O

16 Bits 32 Bits

Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD

O O O O O O O O

Single Double

Precision Precision

Character

O O O

When an Action receives data from Provider Node:

• When an Action receives data of “signed 16 bits decimal/unsigned 16 bits decimal/16 bits hexadecimal”, all data is processed as “signed 16 bits decimal”.

• When an Action receives data of “signed 32 bits decimal/unsigned 32 bits decimal/32 bits hexadecimal”, all data is processed as “signed 32 bits decimal”.

1.

If you select [Writes Data to CSV File] in the [Edit Action] dialog and click [Parameter], the following dialog will appear.

[Save File]

Designate the folder to save files.

[File Name]

Designate the name of the CSV file. File names can be designated indirectly. For details, see 4.2.2

Setting Action Parameters - Creating a Macro to Use Same Save File for Actions

[Save Method]

If you wish to create a new file always, check [Create new file], and if you wish to add data such as history, check [Append data to file].

[Time Stamp]

If you select [Attaches a Time Stamp in front of data.], the time the data was provided will be written in front of data. If you select [Attaches a Time Stamp behind data.], the time the data was provided will be written at the end of data.

4-59

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

4.3.14

Writes Data from CSV file

This Action writes designated CSV file data to the designated device address.

1.

Click on the [Edit Action] dialog box’s [[Writes Data from CSV file] selection to bring up the following dialog box.

[Node Name]

Designates the write destination Node. When the action is started, default setting is “ %NODE”

(original data provider GP).

[Device Name]

Designates the write destination device address or symbol name. Designating “% DEV[Device

Address] indirectly allows you to use the provider’s device name.

Clicking the [Reference] button calls up the following screen and allows you to directly enter the device name and symbol name.

[Data Type]

Designates the data type of write data.

4-60

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

[Readout File Name]

Designates the CSV file to be read. Filenames can be designated indirectly. For details, see 4.2.2

Setting Action Parameters - Creating a Macro to Use Same Save File for Actions.

[Readout Method]

Designates how the CSV data file will be read out. The [Readout Detail Configuration] area can be used to designate detailed readout information, which will vary depending on the data readout method used.

„

All the Row

Readout Detail

Configuration

Start Row

Number of Rows

Description

Designates the start row. Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the last row.

Designates the number of rows. Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the last row.

The shaded area in the following table indicates what data will be read out from a CSV file. Data readout order is from (1) to (10).

„

From the Middle to the Last of a Row

Readout Detail

Configuration

Start Row

Number of Rows

Start Position

Description

Designates the start row. Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the last row.

Designates the number of rows. Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the last row.

Designates the data read start column. Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the last column.

The shaded area in the following table indicates what data will be read out from a CSV file. Data readout order is from (1) to (6).

4-61

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

„

Number of Readouts from the Middle of a Row

Readout Detail

Configuration

Description

Start Row Designates the start row. Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the last row.

Designates the number of rows. Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the last

Number of Rows row.

Designates the data read start column. Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the

Start Position last column.

Number of Readouts Designates the readout data column.

The shaded area in the following table indicates what data will be read out from a CSV file. Data readout order is from (1) to (6).

„

All the Column

Readout Detail

Configuration

Description

Start Column

Number of Columns

Designates the start column. Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the last column.

Designates the number of columns. Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the last column.

The shaded area in the following table indicates what data will be read out from a CSV file. Data readout order is from (1) to (10).

4-62

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

„

From the Middle to the Last of a Column

Readout Detail

Configuration

Start Column

Number of Colums

Start Position

Description

Designates the start column. Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the last column.

Designates the number of columns. Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the last column.

Designates the data read start row. Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the last row.

The shaded area in the following table indicates what data will be read out from a CSV file. Data readout order is from (1) to (8).

„

Number of Readouts from the Middle of a Row

Readout Detail

Configuration

Description

Start Column

Number of Columns

Start Position

Designates the start column. Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the last column.

Designates the number of columns. Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the last column.

Designates the data read start row. Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the last row.

Number of Readouts Designates the readout data row.

The shaded area in the following table indicates what data will be read out from a CSV file. Data readout order is from (1) to (6).

4-63

4.3 Registering Action Item Parameters

Important Information when Writing Device Data from a CSV file

When using this action, be sure to understand the following points.

(1) When setting up the action, the write data format for the destination device is set to a single format.

For example, If the first 5 rows of CSV data are set to “bit”, the following rows of data cannot be read as string data.

(2) Any rows of data with empty cells will be treated as follows.

• When the data type is set to “string”, empty cells are ignored during readout.

Ex. If the CSV data is “ A, , B, C, , D” then the write order is “ A, B, C, D”.

• When the data type is not set to “string” (any other type), “0” is written, however if the last cell of data is empty, the row is ignored.

Ex. If the CSV data is “ 1, , 2, 3, , 4, ,” then the data write will look like “ 1, 0, 2, 3, 0, 4, 0 “.

(3) Except for hexadecimal data, when writing non-string data, only “+”, “-”, and “.” are handled as special single-byte number and value characters. Data is read from the left-most digit and when a character that cannot be handled as a number is found, data read stops at the value immediately prior to that character.

If the left-most position’s data cannot be handled as a value, that data is changed to a “ 0 ” value.

(4) When writing hexadecimal data, be sure to use only data that is from 0 to 9, and from A to F.

(Double-byte, single-byte, uppercase or lowercase).

(5) When values read in exceed the range allowed for the designated data type,

All 16 and 32-bit data that exceeds the allowed range for the designated data type will be converted to hexadecimal and the lower 4 digits (with 32-bit data the lower 8 bits) of data will be written.

However, 16 bit (32 bit) hexadecimal data will cause an error.

(6) Handling double-quotation marks.

• When double-quotation marks are used in the first data position, until the second quotation mark is found, the data is considered to be one unit. If in that row the second double quotation mark cannot be found, the entire row is treated as a single piece of data.

• Double-quotation marks found in any other position in the row of data are treated as characters.

(7) Writing of string data is performed as follows.

Ex. 1) If single-byte string “ AB,CD,E” is written to word address LS100, the data is stored as follows.

LS100

AB

LS101

CD

LS102

E

Ex. 2) If the single-byte string “ABC, DE” is written to LS100 (Word device), the data is stored as follows in the LS area.

LS100

AB

LS101

C

LS102

DE

Ex. 3) To write the single character “E” mentioned in Ex. 1 to LS103, insert two single-byte spaces between “D” and the next comma (“ AB,CD_ _,E”) to push this data to LS103.

LS100

AB

LS101

CD

LS102 LS103

E

4-64

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

4.4

Using ‘Create repor t using Excel’ Action

You can create an Excel book that includes a variety of information, such as PLC device data, GP screen data and GP backup data. You can use this data to create various reports such as a work report or an error report

The following describes the steps for using this Action.

First, create an Excel report template book and designate what kind of information will be written to which part of this template book.

Use a Provider to send this Action’s special command(s).

The Action analyzes the command and performs it.

If the Action receives the command for the first time, the Action reads information from the template book.

The Action performs various operations according to the command such as creating (copying) ( -1 in the figure below) the output book, or reading data from GP/GLC and writing it to the designated output book ( -2 in the figure below). For details of operations you can use, refer to “4.4.2

Information Available in the Report”.

Register the action area in the report template created by Excel to create the template book.

Template book created by Excel

Action area

Template book

Action area

GP/GLC

Sends the command.

‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

If the action receives the command for the first time, the action reads information from the template book.

The action analyzes the command and execute it.

Action area

Reads data from GP/GLC and writes to the output book.

Creates

(copies) the output book.

Output book

GP data

4-65

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

Flow from System Design to Operation Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

Creating the prototype by Excel while considering the report format.

This becomes the template book.

Planning the data sampling method.

Registering entry nodes in the network project.

If you save data in GP/GLC, you must perform the setting on GP-PRO/PB III for Windows and transfer it to GP/GLC.

Register entry nodes of data source and

PCs where the action actually runs.

Selecting the “Create Report using

Excel” action.

Open the [Edit Action] dialog, select

[Create Report using Excel], and then click [Parameter].

Designating the template and output books.

Editing the template book.

Inserting the action area

Designating the data type of the action area

Designate the action area in the template book.

Adding command lines

Command setup

Frequently used command lines have been set by default. You can add your own command lines.

Using the provider feature

Creating provider information using the provider wizard.

When executing the action using provider.

Using the command panel

Creating the command panel layout

When executing the action manually from PC

Define the action for which part is created at what timing when creating the report.

You can use both provider and the command panel.

Transferring the network project file to

GP/GLC

System Operation Start

Using the provider feature

Form the providing condition by touching the GP/GLC screen.

Using the command panel

Click the command panel button.

The action is executed.

4-66

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

4.4.1

Registration Procedure of ‘Create report using Excel’ Action

The following describes the registration procedure to use the ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action.

Designing Action conditions

Registering entry nodes

Registering symbols

For details of the registration procedure for through , refer to “4.1.1 Action

Item Registration”.

Creating the Original Report

Create the book using Microsoft Excel, which becomes the prototype of the report.

Reference

“4.4.3 Creating the Report

Prototype”

Registering and Setting Actions

Select ‘Create Report using Excel’ as the Action to be registered and set parameters. Edit the report prototype created in procedure 4 as the template.

Reference

“4.4.4 Setting the Report

Action”

Registering commands.

Register commands to be used by the Action.

Reference mands”

“4.4.5 Registering Com-

Creating the Command

Panel

Register it when using the Command Panel to operate the output book.

Registering Provider information

Register Provider information according to the Provider information wizard to perform a

Provider command.

Reference

“4.4.6 Creating Command

Panel (Manual Start)”

Reference

“4.4.7 Registering Provider Information (Automatic Start)”

Transferring the network project file

Transfer the registered contents to entry nodes.

Reference

“8.1 Transferring Network

Project Files”

4-67

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

4.4.2

Information Writable to the Report

The following information can be written to the report.

You can create various types of report such as work-site status or production information by placing the following data in the template.

• Real time device value of, for example, PLC, GP/GLC/Factory Gateway or Pro-Server.

• Data saved in SRAM or CF Card of GP/GLC.

- Logging data

- Trend data

- Sampling data

- Alarm data

- CSV data (CSV display data)

- GP screen data (JPEG data)

• GP screen data of GP/GLC captured real time

• Clock data within GP/GLC and Factory Gateway

• Clock data of the PC where Pro-Server is running

• Provider’s node name

In addition, you can perform the following operations on the output book.

• Create a new Excel book (begin on a new book)

• Create a new sheet (begin on a new sheet)

• Printing per book

• Printing per sheet

• Perform a desired macro

• Display a book

• Hide a book

• Close a book

4-68

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

4.4.3

Creating the Report Prototype

Create the report including blank cells where number data is previously written using Excel.

Create the report prototype while considering the contents of “4.4.2 Information Available in the Report”.

Use it as the template by designating what kind of data (e.g. device data, GP screen data) is written in blank cells created on this report prototype.

The “Create Report using Excel” Action creates the report (output book) based on this template book.

Example of Report (Prototype) Creation

The following report is only an example.

Create the report template according to your needs by setting the title of data to be written to the report and/ or the format of the cell(s) where data is written.

4-69

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

4.4.4

Setting the Report Action

The contents described here correspond to registration procedure described in “4.4.1 Registration

Procedure of Report Creation Action”.

1.

If you select [Create Report using Excel] in the [Edit Action] dialog box and click [Parameter], the following dialog box will appear.

[Template Designation]

Designate the sheet file created in the “4.4.3 Creating the Report Prototype” section.

Designate the filename using the file’s full path. You can enter up to 217 single-byte characters. Also, you cannot use ‘,’ (comma) for the template sheet name.

Click [Reference] and designate the file which becomes the report prototype from the [Open] dialog box.

[Output Book]

Designate the folder where the Excel file written by the Action is saved and the filename used.

Designate the folder name using the full path. You do not need to put “\” at the end of the name. Use no more than 74 single-byte characters.

The total number of characters for the full path folder name plus filename should be 216 single-byte characters or less.

If you use a macro, the filename can be the node name, device name or a time. For node name or device name details, see 4.2.2 Setting Action Parameters - Creating a Macro to Use Same Save File for

Actions.

Macro Sign

%Y

%M

%D

%h

%m

%s

%n

%%

Returned Data

The current year

The current month

The current date

The current hour

The current minute

The current second

Year in 4 digits

2 digits

2 digits

2 digits

2 digits

2 digits

Number of output book creation. 1 or more. (For details, refer to 4.4.8 Record

File of the Last Output Book Name)

%

For example, when designating “%Y_%M_%D”, if it is November 1st, 2002, the output book name will be “2002_11_01.xls”.

Date and time on the server PC when newly created are added to the default filename.

4-70

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

[Start from Displayed State]

If you check [Start from Displayed State], you can start with the output book opened when executing the Action.

2.

Click [Edit Template].

Excel is started and the designated sheet file is opened. The [Edit Template] dialog box also appears.

The created report prototype can be changed to suit your needs, for example, by entering the write data title. You must designate the area to write data and set device addresses of data to be written in the report prototype.

The area set here is called the Action area.

[Add Area]

Use to create the Action area to write data on the template.

[Settings]

Designate the method to perform the Action area or commands for Excel.

[Action Area Display]

If you uncheck [Action Area Display], the template’s Action area will be hidden. You can hide it when you wish to modify a template format.

4-71

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

3.

Select cells to create the area and click [Add Area] to add the Action area.

The Action area with grids around selected cells is inserted, and the [Action Area Properties] dialog box appears.

Inserted Action area

Even if a newly created Action area's settings are cancelled while being created, an area with no settings will be placed on the worksheet. In this case, simply select and delete the area.

[Group Name]

Group means a group of an Action area where data is written by one Action.

Perform the process of the Action area belonging to the group at one time by designating the group name. Enter a common group name for Action areas that you wish to perform at one time. A group name is not case sensitive. You cannot use ‘ ‘ (space) or ‘,’ (comma) in a group name, and not ‘#’

(sharp) in front (A name with ‘#’ in front is regarded as a command.), either.

The number on the right of the [Group Name] entry field is the number that the system automatically assigns to this Action area so that you do not have to designate it.

The default value of [GROUP1] is set in the [Group Name] entry field.

[Area Cell Range]

It indicates a cell range occupied by an Action area.

4-72

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

[Write Method]

You can select any of the following 4 types.

- Overwrite Type

In Overwrite type, data write is always started from the same location (cell on the upper left corner of the Action area) when writing data repeatedly.

- Historical Type

In Historical type, data write is started from the next line of the line that writing was completed at the previous time when writing data more than one time. Data written previously remains as historical data.

When the write area is exceeded, writing continues on the next sheet.

- Scroll Type

When performing multiple data writes, the row following the previously written row is used to begin writing, with the previously written data retained as a history.

If the data write area is exceeded, rows of old data are deleted as new data is written. (see below)

Data scrolls upwards as new data is added.

Newest data is added here

- Loop Type

When performing multiple data writes, the row following the previously written row is used to begin writing, with the previously written data retained as a history.

If the data write area is exceeded, the oldest row of data is overwrited as each new data row is written. (see below)

Newest data overwrites old data here

4-73

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

The following data types are not available when the Scroll or Loop functions are used.

• 4 - Logging Data • 5 - Trend Graph Data

• 6 - Sampling Data

• 8 - Alarm History (Block 2)

• 7 - Alarm Block 1 Data

• 9 - Alarm Log (Block 3)

• 10 - CSV Data (CSV Display Data)

• 14 - Alarm Block 5 Data

• 16 - Alarm Block 7 Data

• 13 - Alarm Block 4 Data

• 15 - Alarm Block 6 Data

• 17 - Alarm Block 8 Data

[Write Pattern]

Designate the write direction when writing data in cells.

[Time Stamp]

If you select [Time Stamp in Front], time of a PC’s internal clock when executing a command will be written in front of data. If you select [Time Stamp Behind], time of a PC’s internal clock when executing a command will be written at the end of data.

Time display format is designated via the cell’s “Write Setting/Display Format” settings.

[Data ID]

Select data to write in an Action area from among 13 available kinds of data. Since setup items displayed under data IDs differ depending on data IDs, select a data ID first.

4-74

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

Data ID and Setup Items

The following data shows the contents of data IDs and setup items per data ID.

0 - Device Value

Writes device values such as GP/GLC/Factory Gateway, PLC or PC in cells.

[Node Name]

Normally, designate the Provider node.

If you do not designate the node name, data is read from the Provider source node when an Action is started by Provider information. When the Action is started by the Command Panel, data is read from the PC where the Command Panel exists.

[Device Name]

Designate the data source device name.

[Device Type]

Designate the data type.

[Number]

Designate the number of data items used.

Reads data designated by [Device Type] as many times as designated by [Number] from the device designated by [Device Name], and writes those in designated cells. If there are too many devices, data which cannot be written within the cell range of the Action area will be truncated.

1 - PC Time

Use this ID to write PC internal clock time to a cell. You can use this ID, for example, if you wish to record time when a job is performed. Time display format is designated via the cell’s “Write Setting/

Display Format” settings.

2 - GP Time

Use this ID to write GP/GLC/Factory Gateway internal clock time to a cell. You can use this ID, for example, if you wish to record time when a job is performed. Time display format is designated via the cell’s “Write Setting/Display Format” settings.

[Node Name]

Normally, designate the node name of your GP/GLC/Factory Gateway.

If you omit designating the node name, data is read from the Provider source node when an Action is started by Provider information. You cannot omit the node name when the Action is started by the

Command Panel.

4-75

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

3 - Provider Node

Writes the node name of the Provider source if the Action is started by Provider information. Writes the node name of the PC where the Command Panel exists if the Action is started by the Command Panel.

4 - Logging Data, 5 - Trend Data, 6 - Sampling Data, 7 - Alarm Block 1 Data, 8 - Alarm History (Block 2)

Data, 9 - Alarm Log (Block 3) Data, 10 - CSV Data (CSV Display Data), 13 - Alarm Block 4 Data,

14 - Alarm Block 5 Data, 15 - Alarm Block 6 Data, 16 - Alarm Block 7 Data, 17 - Alarm Block8 Data.

Writes designated data from the GP/GLC’s SRAM and CF Card.

[Node Name]

Normally, designate the GP/GLC node name.

If you omit designating the node name, data is read from the Provider source node when an Action is started by Provider information. You cannot omit the node name when the Action is started by the

Command Panel.

[File Number Set]

Designate which SRAM and CF Card data will be processed.

0 - Current data

: Data in SRAM is processed.

1 - Latest data (data in CF Card)

: The latest file in the CF Card is processed.

2 - Indirect designation by device address (data in CF Card)

: Among data in CF Card, the file with the same number as the device value designated by

[Device Name] is processed.

3 - File number designation (data in CF Card)

: The file with the number designated by [File Number] in CF Card is processed.

If [Write Method] is set to [Overwrite Type], data that cannot be written within a cell range of an

Action area will be truncated. Adjust a cell range so that data can be written within an Action area.

11 - GP Screen Data (JPEG Data)

Writes captured data of the GP/GLC screen in GP/GLC’s CF Card or captured data from current GP/

GLC screens into cells.

[Node Name]

Normally, designate the name of the entry node which reads screen data.

If you omit designating the node name, data is read from the Provider source node when the Action is started by Provider information. You cannot omit designating the node name when starting the Action using the Command Panel.

4-76

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

[File Number Set]

Designate which data in the GP/GLC will be processed.

0 - Current data (capture)

The GP/GLC screen is captured when the Action is started, and captured data is processed.

1 - Latest data (data in the CF Card)

The latest captured data in the CF Card is processed.

2 - Indirect designation by device address (data in the CF Card)

Among data in the CF Card, captured data with the same number as the device value designated by [Device Name] is processed.

3 - File number designation (data in the CF Card)

Captured data with the number designated by [File Number] in CF Card is processed.

12 - Character String

Writes character strings given as a parameter into a cell when executing this Action area. For designating parameters, refer to “Command Description”.

4.

After setting [Action Area Property], set [Details] if necessary. When using “Write Method” to set Scroll Type/Loop Type, this feature cannot be used.

[Spacing between data]

If you write more than one data in one Action area, you can designate spacing between data using the number of cells in Row and Column directions. In the case of GP screen data (JPEG data), designate those not by the number of cell but by the number of points.

[When creating sheet, clear designated cell range before starting]

If any unnecessary data exists in cells designated as an Action area, by checking this item, that unnecessary data will be deleted when the Action is preformed.

4-77

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

5.

After setting [Action Area Property], click [OK].

6.

Create another Action area, referring to setup procedures 3 and 4.

After setting the necessary Action area in the report prototype sheet, the template appears as follows.

Moreover, setup information for the created Action area is displayed in the [Edit Template] dialog box.

Your template is now complete.

If you create many Action areas in the template, it may take a long time to update the setup information (2 to

3 minutes per 100 Action areas). Please keep this in you mind when you create Action areas.

4-78

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

4.4.5

Registering Commands

The items described here correspond to the procedure described in “4.4.1 Registration Procedure of

Report Creation Action”.

1.

If you click [Settings] in the [Edit Template] dialog, the [Settings] dialog will appear.

[Process Name]

9 kinds of frequently used command lines have been registered as samples. Groups created in [Edit

Action] are registered as command lines.

For [Auto Start] information, refer to “4.4.7 Registering Provider Information (Auto Start)”. And for

[Manual Start] information, refer to “4.4.6 Creating Command Panel (Manual Start)”.

2.

After selecting the command line to set/edit using a mouse pointer, if you either double click it or click [Edit Command], the [Process] dialog box will appear.

You can enter or change the command line name, the command and the comment.

For restrictions when registering commands/command lines, refer to “About Commands” on the next page.

4-79

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

3.

If you click the [ ] button on the right of the [Command] field, the [Command List] dialog will appear.

If you click it, group names separated by commas will be added in the command field.

Buttons to add each command separated by a comma in the command field.

4.

When you setup or edit commands, use the buttons in the dialog above to add commands or group names to the process name field.

If you click [BS], commands are deleted one by one. [CLR] deletes all commands.

5.

If you complete setting or editing commands, click [OK]. Next, click [OK] in the [Process] dialog box.

You can create new commands by clicking [Add Command], however, the contents of the dialog displayed are same as those of [Edit Command].

When deleting a process name, select the process name using your, and then click [Delete Command].

About Commands

A command is a specific operation that you wish the designated Action to perform, and you can perform one operation using one command.

A command line consists of more than one command (including a group) so that it can perform a series of operations. The following restrictions apply when naming a command/command line/group/template sheet.

1.

A command line consists of more than one command (or group), and each command/group name is separated by ‘,’ (comma).

2.

In the case of a command name, ‘#’ (sharp) is added in front of the name.

4-80

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

3.

In the case of a group name, you cannot use ‘#’ (sharp) in from of the name.

4.

In the case of a group name, you cannot use ‘ ‘ (space) in the name.

5.

Names which start other than ‘#’ (sharp) are regarded as group names.

6.

A command may have a parameter. You cannot use ‘,’ (comma) in a parameter.

7.

You cannot use ‘,’ (comma) in a template sheet/group/parameter name.

8.

A command/group/template sheet name is not case sensitive.

9.

You can enter up to 255 single-byte characters in a command line.

10. If a command line name includes the ‘&’ (ampersand) character, it may not be displayed on the

Command Panel.

If there is more than one command in a command line, the Action will perform each in order, one by one. If, however, an error occurs when executing a command, the process is terminated at that point.

For example, If “GROUP1,GROUP2,GROUP3” are defined in the command line, it will be performd in the order of GROUP1

GROUP2

GROUP3. However, if an error occurred in GROUP2, the process is terminated at that point and GROUP3 will not be performd.

Moreover, if more than one Action area has been registered within one group (when group names for those

Action areas are same), the Action will perform the Action area in turn, however, if an error occurred midprocess, the process is terminated at that point, and remaining Actions will not be performd.

Command Description

New Book Creation Command

#New Book .......... Creates a new blank book. However, an Action report sheet is automatically attached.

#Copy Book ......... Copies a template book newly and creates an output book. This command functions equally as “#New Book, #Copy Sheets”.

When you create a new book, an error will occur and exit the process if there are no template books existing.

New Sheet Creation Command

#Copy Sheets ....... Creates copies of all template sheets within a template book in an output book.

#Copy Sheet Template Sheet Name

Creates a copy of the template sheet designated by Template Sheet Name within a template book in an output book.

There must be more than one blank space between #Copy Sheet and

Template Sheet Name .

4-81

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

For example, if Template Sheet Name is “Sheet1”, the command should be “#Copy

Sheet Sheet1”.

If the designated Template Sheet Name does not exist in a template book, an error will occur and the setup will quit (exit).

Print Command

#Print Book .......... Prints all sheets other than an Action template sheet in an output book.

#Print Sheet Template Sheet Name

........... Prints the last created sheet based on the template sheet designated by

Template Sheet Name in an output book.

There must be more than one blank space between #Print Sheet and

Template Sheet Name .

Executing a Macro

#Run Macro Name .......... Performs the macro designated by Macro Name . There must be more than one blank space between #Run and Macro Name .

#Run Macro Name Parameter

........... Performs the macro designated by Macro Name with Parameter as the first argument (character type). There must be more than one blank space among

#Run, Macro Name and Parameter .

If you set the same name to Macro Name as cell names used by Excel such as A1 or B1, an error will occur.

Do not set these names to Macro Name .

If the designated macro does not exist or a macro call failed, an error will occur and the setup will exit.

Even if a macro has a return value, it will be ignored.

Displaying an Output Book

#Show .................. Opens and displays an output book.

Hiding an Output Book

#Hide ................... If an output book has been opened by Pro-Server, an output book will not be displayed on the screen. At this time, an output book remains open.

If an output book is not opened by Pro-Server, nothing happens.

4-82

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

Closing an Output Book

#Close .................. If an output book has been opened by Pro-Server, an output book will be closed after saving it automatically. Excel will also exit at this time.

Performing the Contents Designated by “Group Name”

Group Name ........ Pro-Server searches the write area equal to the group name designated by Group Name within the write area designated by the template book.

When Pro-Server finds the write area, it writes values in cells of the output book according to the settings. If there is more than one write area in the template book, it writes to all write areas (you cannot designate the write order).

If an output book contains more than one sheet created from the same template sheet, the latest sheet will be written.

For example, if there are template sheets, Sheet1 and Sheet 2 including “Group1” in the template book and that Sheet1-1, Sheet1-2 and Sheet1-3 were created from Sheet1 and

Sheet2-1 was created from Sheet-2 in the output book.

If you perform “Group1” in this situation, data will be written in Sheet1-3 and Sheet2-1 in the output book.

Group Name String

.......... If the Data ID of the Action area is character strings, character strings are written in the cell. Character strings are designated next to a group name as String (parameter).

Insert a space between a group name and character strings.

You cannot use commas in String .

4-83

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

4.4.6

Creating Command Panel (Manual Start)

To create (write data to) the output book according to the contents designated in the template, you must perform the command to start the Action.

The Command Panel is the toolbar-like dialog box used to issue the “Perform the command” on PCs.

You can perform Actions easily by simply assigning the command line registered in the [Settings] dialog to the button on the Command Panel and clicking the button.

You can perform commands also by using Provider information, in addition to using the Command Panel described here.

For how to use Provider information, refer to “4.4.7 Registering Provider Information (Auto Start)”.

When you perform commands with the Command Panel, the PC that performs the Command Panel becomes the provider Node and the action is performed.

The contents described here correspond to the procedures described in “4.4.1 Registration Procedure of

‘Create Report using Excel’ Action”.

1.

If you click [Settings] in the [Edit Template] dialog, the [Settings] dialog will appear.

[Use Command Panel. (PC Screen)]

If you check this option, the Command Panel will be displayed when starting Pro-Server.

[Auto Register to Panel when adding Command]

If you check this option, commands are added automatically to the Command Panel when selecting new commands.

4-84

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

2.

If you click [Panel Layout], the [Command Panel Layout] dialog box will appear.

Editing the Panel Layout

If you move the mouse pointer to right/left/bottom edges of the dialog box, the mouse pointer will change to the size-adjust pointer. You can also adjust the dialog box’s size to change the number of buttons displayed in the panel. Moreover, the panel display location can be set by moving the [Command Panel Layout] dialog to the desired location on the screen.

If you right-click command buttons, the following command list will appear so that you can designate commands to set to those buttons.

You can use left-click and drag to move existing commands to different locations.

The maximum number of buttons which can be displayed on the Command Panel is 7 (vertical) by 10

(horizontal) = 70 (total). You can display one Command Panel per Action.

4-85

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

Command Panel Display

When you read the network project file that uses the ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action after starting Pro-

Server, the Command Panel will appear on a PC screen if you have checked [Use Command Panel.(PC

Screen)] in the [Settings] dialog box.

If you wish to display the Command Panel after closing it once, right-click the Pro-Server icon displayed in the Windows taskbar and select an Action name from [Action Execute].

The following control list appears. If you select [Show Command Panel], the Command Panel will be displayed again. In the control list, in addition to [Show/Hide Command Panel], you can also select [Show

Book] (Show command), [Hide Book] (Hide command) and [Quit Excel] (Close command).

4-86

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

4.4.7

Registering Provider Information (Auto Start)

This feature registers Provider information per group and command line set in a template.

The following describes the procedures after the [Settings] dialog box is displayed.

The steps described here correspond to the procedures described in “4.4.1 Registration Procedure of

Report Creation Action”.

1.

To enter Provider information, select the groups and commands from the process name list.

2.

Click [Wizard] in the [Auto Start] field.

The [Provider Information Setting Wizard] will appear.

3.

Click on the [Next] button.

4-87

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

4.

After designating the entry node to perform the Action, click on the [Next] button.

To add an entry node, click [Register Node], and register the new entry node in the [Register

Node] dialog box.

5.

After designating the Action to use for the Action trigger, click on the [Next] button.

If [When the screen’s button is touched] is designated as the trigger:

Designate the [Symbol Name], and then click on the [Next] button.

To register a new symbol, click [Register Symbol], and register the new symbol in the [Register

Symbol] dialog box. For how to register symbols, see “3.2 Registering Symbols”.

If [When the designated device is turned ON] is designated as the trigger:

Designate [Symbol Name] and [Check Interval], and then click on the [Next] button.

When registering symbols, the procedure is the same as that of [When the screen’s button is touched].

4-88

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

If [Designated Interval] is designated as the trigger:

Designate [Symbol Name] and [Time Interval], and click on the [Next] button.

When registering symbols, the procedure is the same as that of [When the screen’s button is touched].

If [Designated Time] is designated as the trigger:

Designate [Action start time], and click on the [Next] button.

6.

Designate the [Consumer Node Name], and click on the [Next] button.

To add an entry node, click [Register Node], and then register the new entry node in the

[Register Node] dialog box.

4-89

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

7.

Enter [Provider Information Name], and click on the [Finish] buton.

The [Provider Information Setting Wizard] will quit (exit).

The Provider Information name now appears in the designated [Process Name].

If you select Process Name for the Provider information that has been set, the [Auto Start] button will change from [Wizard] to [Distributor Settings].

8.

If you click [Distributor Settings], the [Provider Information] dialog box will appear.

4-90

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

If you enter Provider information, all character strings in a command line will be registered as <String>. In this case, if you wish to add or edit command line character strings, you should edit only the contents of the fixed value because the data count is calculated automatically.

If you set the data count to more than the number of character strings in the fixed value, unfixed data may be written, so you may not change the count.

For [Provider Information] dialog box information, refer to “4.2.3 Registering Provider Information”.

4-91

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

4.4.8

When Registering/Using ‘Create report using Excel’ Action

The following information should understand prior to registering/using the “Create Report using Excel”

Action.

Important:: When Starting Excel on PCs Running ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

Be aware of the following points in environments where files with “.xls”, “.xlt” or “.csv” extensions are registered to be started by Excel.

When Excel is started by an Action, if you try to open files by double clicking them in Explorer, files may not be opened or may not act as expected. Normally, if Excel has already been started, if you double click files on Explorer, Excel will try to open files. However, the “Create Report using Excel” Action only supports and controls files opened by the Action. Therefore, while this Action starts Excel, if files which have not been opened by this Action are opened by, for example, double clicking, the control will be out of this Action and Action operation will become unstable.

Also, do not open files using any other methods, since the same problem(s) can occur.

If you use Excel as follows, the Action will be uneffected.

In addition to Excel started by the Action, if you start Excel from the [Start] menu of “Windows” and open files from Excel’s [Open] menu, or if you open files by the dragging and dropping on Excel, the Action will not be effected adn will operate normally.

Sheet Name of Template Book

You can use macros to the sheet name of the template book as well as the output book name. When creating a sheet in the output book, this Action adds the sheet name by replacing the registered macro sign with a specific value. The following shows the content of Excel macro symbols.

Macro Sign

%Y

%M

%D

%h

%m

%s

%n

%%

The current year

The current month

The current date

The current hour

The current minute

The current second

Replacement Contents

Year in 4 digits

2 digits

2 digits

2 digits

2 digits

2 digits

Number of sheets created within the book. 1

%

For example, if you wish to create one sheet per day (with date attached) in the output book, set the sheet name of the template book as “%M (month) %D (day)”. If the sheet is created in the output book on

October 31st, the sheet name will be “10 (month) 31 (day)”.

4-92

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

Even if you designate other characters than those in the table in the previous page right after “%”, it will not be recognized as the macro sign, and “%” will be ignored.

If you designate the sheet name in the “#Copy Sheet Template Sheet Name ” or ”#Print Sheet

Template Sheet Name ” command, you should designate the sheet name of the template book in the original way (macro sign before replacement)

Action Report Sheet

When creating the output book, this Action automatically adds the sheet with the name of “Action Report” in the output book.

In this Action Report sheet, the latest record about what kind of data this Action has output to the output book is always written. You can refer to it when checking, for example, the progress state of the process.

Also, when the output book was once closed and then opened again, this Action starts the next operation based on the record in the Action Report sheet.

If you rewrite the contents of the Action Report sheet, it can cause unexpected conditions, such as that the

Action does not run correctly. As a result, do not change/rewrite these contents if it is not necessary.

Record File of the Last Output Book

When creating the output book in the output folder for the first time, this Action creates the file to record the output book name. This filename will be the name of the created output book with the “.INI” extension added (

*

.INI). For example, if the output book name is “Report_%Y%M%D”, the

“Report_%Y%M%D.INI” file will be created.

The name of the latest output book which performd output and the number of output book creation are recorded in this file.

When switching the output destination to other output book, this Action refers to the contents of this file. If you change the contents of the file or delete the file, it can cause unexpected conditions, such as that the

Action does not run correctly.

4-93

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

Important Matters When Using “Create Report using Excel” Action

Be sure to understand these items prior to actually using this Action.

Timing of Opening/Closing Output Book

This Action opens the output book using the following timing.

When running the Action from Provider, the Command Panel or user-defined applications (however,

“#Close” and “#Hide” commands are excluded).

When right clicking the Pro-Server icon in the task tray, selecting [Action Perform]

[ Action Name ], and then executing other menu options than [Hide] or [Close] (refer to “Displaying Command Panel” ).

This Action closes the output book using following timing.

When clicking [Close] in the Command Panel.

When executing the “#Close” command from Provider or user-defined applications (however, it also exits Excel).

When executing the “#NEW Book” or “#Copy Book” command from Provider or user-defined applications. In this case, the new book will be opened automatically after the old book is closed.

When the network project is reloaded.

When Pro-Server exits.

When you close the output book, close it using steps from through described above. Do not close it directly using the [Exit] or the [Save As] menu option of Excel. If you close Excel using these menu options, it can cause unexpected conditions, such as that the Action does not run correctly.

Common Usage Violation of Output Book

While the output book is opened by this Action, if you try to open the output book by another version of

Excel, it will cause a common usage violation of the output book so that you may not be able to open it.

When the output book is not opened by this Action, you can open the output book by another version of

Excel, though, you should close it before starting this Action. If you leave the corresponding output book open, a common usage violation will occur on the Action side (PC) and the process may not be performd.

To avoid this problem, while the Action is running or when the Action may be started, open the corresponding output book by clicking the [Display] button in the Command Panel.

4-94

4.4 Using ‘Create Report using Excel’ Action

Environment to Use This Action

This Action starts one Excel book per one Action, and the Action will occupy Excel when the output book is opened (“Timing of Opening/Closing Output Book” in the previous page).

Therefore, even if you have registered more than one Action within the network project, this Action may not be started simultaneously due to resource problems such as PC or OS memory (the number of Actions which can be started simultaneously differs depending on your PC environment).

If there are any problems when starting this Action simultaneously, adjust the timing of starting or closing

Excel, for example, using the “#Close” command.

Opening Template Book

The template book will be opened automatically in [hide] mode when the Action needs to refer to it (e.g.

when creating a new output book or sheet). When the Action completes referring to the template book, it will be closed automatically.

Switching Timing of Output Book

If you do not change the output destination intentionally using the “#New” or the “#Copy” command, the output book will not be changed automatically. For example, when the file that the output book name is

“Report_%Y_%M_%D” is used, if this Action uses the output book on October 29th, 2002, the Action result will be output to the output book of “Report_2002_10_29.xls”. If this Action uses the output book on the next day, October 30th, 2002, the Action result will be output to the “Report_2002_10_30.xls” output book, however, “Report_2002_10_29.xls” and “Report_2002_10_30.xls” are the same output book of

“Report_%Y_%M_%D” and it means that a new output book will not be created every time the day changes.

Version Compatibility

- When a version of Pro-Server that is lower than 4.5 is used with a template set for either [Write method/

Scroll Type] or [Loop Type], the action area's OCX is copied as it is to the output file. In this case, delete the action area.

- When a version of Pro-Server that is lower than 4.5 is used with a template that has the data type of alarm blocks 4 to 8, the action area's OCX is copied as it is to the output file. In this case, delete the action area.

4-95

5

GP Setup

This chapter explains how to transfer a Pro-Studio network project file (

*

.npj) and a GP-PRO/PB III project file (

*

.PRW) to a connected GP.

5.1

Transferring Data to GPs

5.1 Transferring Data to GPs

5.1

T ransf erring Data to GPs

In the GP-PRO/PBIII screen editor software, select the network project file and node name and transfer the desired data to the connected GPs. The following description assumes that the GP-PRO/PBIII Ver. 3.0

Transfer feature’s window is open.

Be sure to first install the 2-Way driver in order to transfer a network project file

(

*

. npj) from the GP-PRO/PB III for Windows to a GP unit.

Reference

“2.1 Installing the Software”

1.

Click on [2WayDriver] in the [Setup] menu.

• When transferring the network project file with GP-PRO/PBIII for

Windows, use the data transfer cable.

• Transferring your screen data in the on-line mode temporarily causes the GP to display the transfer screen. The initial screen will be restored as soon as the data transfer is completed.

5-2

2. Select [2WayEther] from the [Driver Type] pull-down list.

5.1 Transferring Data to GPs

To send to GP77R series, be sure to click on the [Use 2Way Driver] checkbox.

Otherwise, the 2-Way Driver will not function. [Use 2Way Driver] checkbox is initially checked for GP2000, GLC2000 series.

3. Select [2WayEther] from the [Driver Type] pull-down list.

If you transfer the GP screen data alone to the GP to which the network project file has been already downloaded, the network project file might be deleted depending on transfer settings or a transfer method.

Setting

Transfer with [Send All Screens]

Transfer with [Automatically Send Changed Screens]

Transfer with [Force Sy stem Setup]

Transfer Method

Transfer Cable

Delete

Ethernet Transfer

Remain

Remain

Delete

Remain

Remain

5-3

5.1 Transferring Data to GPs

4. Select the network project file and the network node to which you wish to transfer the information and then click [OK].

5. Click [Send] on the Transfer menu or the Send Screen button to transfer the information to the GP.

Send Screen button

6. The transfer is completed if no error message is displayed.

5-4

6

Tools

This chapter describes monitoring tools.

6.1

Device Monitoring

6.2

GP Status Monitoring

6.3

Read Performance Measuring Tool

6.4

Log Viewer

6.1 Device Monitoring

6.1

De vice Monitoring

Any selected device can be monitored via this feature, which allows you to check the status of data communication. Also, in the [Device Monitor] window, you can specify the IP and device addresses.

1.

Click on the symbol name you want to monitor.

[Symbol (Item)]

The registered symbol names are listed here.

2.

Click [Device Monitor] in the [Tools(T)] menu.

You can right-click the symbol to select [Device Monitor] from the shortcut menu.

6-2

6.1 Device Monitoring

3.

You can be monitored via the device.

To change the polling time and the number of displayed decimal places, click [Polling Time].

You can type in the IP address or device address directly.

Reference

“On-line Help”

When monitoring Special Protocol symbols, the maximum number of symbols to be displayed on the device monitor is restricted to “Maximum Number of Read” in the table below.

Writing is possible only to the head device, and the maximum write number is restricted to “Maximum

Number of Write” in the table below.

If you execute writes exceeding those maximum numbers, the warning dialog will appear.

Device Type to

Access

Bit Device

16 Bits Device

32 Bits Device

Format

Bit

Bit

16 bits

32 bits

Single precision floating point

Double precision floating point

Character string

16 bits

32 bits

Single precision floating point

Double precision floating points

Character string

Maximum Number of

Read

255

255

255

127

127

63

510 (single byte)

255

255

255

127

1020 (single byte)

Maximum Number of

Write

1

1

40

20

20

10

80 (single byte)

1

40

40

20

160 (single byte)

6-3

6.1 Device Monitoring

The polling time set for collecting or writing data for each symbol, distributing data and monitoring devices may not be able to be performed under certain conditions. These conditions include the currently registered number of GPs, number of Tags used on each screen sent, type of PLC connection, and number of other currently open Windows applications. Entering “0” will allow the system to operate at its maximum speed. Please use this value as a benchmark when entering other values to “fine-tune” your system.

If you try to monitor non-existing devices, a communication error will be displayed on the GP screen so that you should be careful about it.

• Setting the Display of Polling Time and Decimal places

Within the [Device Monitor] box, click [Polling Time].

Enter values for [Polling Time(ms)], [Integer places] and [Decimal places], and click [OK]. The maximum value that can be entered for [Integer places] and [Decimal places] is 15.

For each item’s details, refer to Online Help.

Reference

“Online Help”

• Device Write Method

Double-click the desired section to enter device address data.

Enter the value. Pressing [Enter] will write the value to the device address, and the next device address’s Write Dialog Box will appear.

Clicking [0] or [1] will write a value of 0 or 1 to the device address.

Writing address data with the [Address Hold] button pressed down will continue to write data to the same address.

6-4

6.2

GP Status Monitoring

Here, you can monitor the status of any GP connected to the network.

1.

Click the node you wish to monitor.

6.2 GP Status Monitoring

You can right-click the symbol to select [Status Monitor] from the shortcut menu.

2.

Click [Status Monitor] in the [Tools(T)] menu.

6-5

6.2 GP Status Monitoring

3. Monitor the status of the GP. To change the polling time, click [Setting].

Click [Clear] to clear communication error codes of the selected node.

If you click [Clear], the following communication error codes will be cleared.

• PLC communication error code : LS2039

• PLC communication error code (for an extension) : LS2070

• 2-Way communication error code : LS2075

Reference

“A.2.2 2-Way Driver Error Messages and Syslog Features”

4. Set the polling time and then click [OK].

The polling time set for collecting or writing data for each symbol, distributing data and monitoring devices may not be able to be performed under certain conditions. These conditions include the number of currently registered GPs, number of Tags used on each screen sent, type of PLC connection, and number of other currently open Windows software. Entering

“0” will allow the system to operate at its maximum speed. Please use this value as a benchmark when entering other values to “fine-tune” your system.

6-6

6.3 Read Performance Measuring Tool

6.3

Read P erf ormance Measuring T ool

This tool allows you to measure the data read performance from the designated node.

1.

Click [Data Read Performance Measurement] on the [Tools (I)] bar of the Menu Bar.

2.

The [Data Read Performance Measurement] dialog appears. After designating all items, click

[Begin].

[Node]

Select the node name. All entry node names have been registered. If unselected, the error dialog will appear.

6-7

6.3 Read Performance Measuring Tool

[Device Address]

Enter the device address or the symbol name to start measuring. This is defaulted to “LS0000” (This will vary depending on the PLC model). If not entered or entered an incorrect address, the error dialog will appear.

If you click the right-side icon, the [Device Address Entry] window appears and you can designate the device address from this window.

[Number]

Enter [Number]. 255 has been set as default. The minimum number is 1, and the maximum number is

65535 although it changes depending on the device address and the access type.

If you designate Special Protcol symbols imported from the project file (

*

.prw) on GP-PRO/PB III for

Windows to device addresses, the maximum number to be read is restricted to the contents of the table below.

If you designate values exceeding those maximum numbers, the warning dialog will appear.

Device Type to

Access

Bit Device

16 Bits Device

32 Bits Device

Bit

Bit

16 bits

32 bits

Bit

32 bits

Format

Maximum Number of

Read

255

255

255

127

255

255

[Access Type]

Select the access type. This is defaulted to “16 Bit”.

[Read Type]

Designate the read type. This is defaulted to “Direct”.

[Time]

The measured read performance value after the execution is displayed.

3.

The processing status of the read performance measuring is displayed in the [now] dialog.

6-8

6.3 Read Performance Measuring Tool

If the contents set in the [Data Read Performance Measurement] dialog are incorrect, a dialog will appear. The contents of dialog are as following.

Dialog Contents

Cannot designate a bit-type symbol to measurement other than in the BIT format.

Cannot designate a symbol other than in

BIT to measurement in the BIT format.

Workaround

If you designated a BIT symbol in the

[Device Address] field, you cannot measure read time designating the access type other than in Bit. Reset the access type to

“Bit”, and then execute measurement.

If you designated a symbol in formats other than Bit in the [Device Address] field, you cannot measure read time designating the access type in Bit. Reset the access type to something else but Bit, and then execute measurement.

4.

The measured result is displayed in the [Time] field of the [Data Read Performance Measurement] window.

[Time] may vary depending on the environmental condition (number of tags on a screen, PLC connection style, application software running on Windows at the same time and so on).

6-9

6.4 Log Viewer

6.4

Log Vie wer

Pro-Server saves various information occurred during the operation in the internal log.

Log Viewer allows you to view internal log information saved by Pro-Server. Log Viewer can display Pro-

Server’s internal log information classifying it into 8 categories. You can also designate if you would like to save or delete messages per internal log information category.

Log Viewer can display 500 messages at maximum. When the number of messages exceeds 500, the oldest message will be deleted in turn.

Moreover, Log Viewer has online and offline modes.

The online mode displays the online log which is equal to the system log currently running real time.

The offline mode displays the log in the past saved by Log Viewer previously.

6.4.1

2Way Log Viewer

The following describes how to start Log Viewer and the display contents in the screen.

1.

Right-click the icon in the right of the task tray, and then select [2Way Log Viewer].

6-10

2.

Log Viewer starts.

The following shows the name and the role of each part of the Log Viewer screen.

Title Bar

Menu Bar

Tool Bar

Displays dates and times when logs occurred.

6.4 Log Viewer

Status Bar

Displays the log level.

There are 8 kinds of the log level:

• SysMsg System message

• SysErr

• Error

System error message

Error messages of user-defined programs

Displays log messages. Action names designated on Pro-Studio are also displayed.

• Start

• End

Starting messages of user-defined programs

Ending messages of user-defined programs

• Warning Warning messages of user-defined programs

• Message1 Detailed messages 1 of user-defined programs

• Message2 Detailed messages 2 of user-defined programs

Title Bar

Displays the name of the opened log file (

*

.2lg)

Menu Bar

Displays menus to operate Log Viewer. If you click those using a mouse, pull-down menus will be displayed.

Tool Bar

Displays icons of frequently used commands. If you click those icons, commands will be executed.

Status Bar

Displays messages for operations.

6-11

6.4.2

Pull-Down Menu of Each Log Viewer Menu

The following describes the pull-down menu of each menu in the menu bar.

[File(F)] Menu

6.4 Log Viewer

[Current Log (N)]

Displays the online log (currently running system log).

[Open(O)]

Selects and displays the previously saved log file (

*

.2lg).

[Save(S)]

Overwrites and saves to the currently opened log file (

*

.2lg).

[Save as(A)]

Saves as the new log file (

*

.2lg).

[Edit(V)] Menu

[Tool Bar(T)]

Designates ON/OFF of the tool bar. When it is displayed, the check mark is attached in front of [Tool

Bar(T)].

[Status Bar(S)]

Designates ON/OFF of the status bar. When it is displayed, the check mark is attached in front of

[Status Bar(T)].

6-12

[Configure(S)] Menu

[Log]

If you click this, the [2Way Event Log Property] dialog will appear.

6.4 Log Viewer

Select message kinds to be displayed on Log Viewer. Check messages names that you wish to display.

The following shows the contents per message.

Message Kind

System Message

System Error

Application Error

Contents

Indicates system messages for starting and shutting down the server.

Indicates system level errors (e.g. system fatal error).

Indicates action error messages.

Application Start

Application End

Indicates action starting messages.

Indicates action ending messages.

Indicates action warning messages.

Application Warning

Application Message1 Indicates detailed action messages 1 (for debugging).

Application Message2

Indicates detailed action messages 2 (for debugging).

If you check [When a message is remaining in the log, it is saved automatically to a file.], data will be overwritten to the online log every time a new message occurs.

[Log Clear]

If you click this option, all contents of the online log will be deleted.

6-13

6.4 Log Viewer

6.4.3

Switching Between Online and Offline Modes

Log Viewer is started in the online mode. If you open the previously saved log (

*

.2lg), it will be switched to the offline mode. New log messages occurred during the offline mode will remain in the online log.

1.

Select [File(F)]-[Open(O)] from the menu bar.

2.

The [Open] dialog box appears. Designate [File name:], and then click [Open].

3.

Log Viewer switches to the offline mode, and the selected log file (

*

.2lg) will be displayed.

In the offline mode, the Log Viewer background becomes black.

To return to the online mode, select [File(F)]-[Current Log (N)] from the menu bar.

6-14

7

Data View

This chapter describes data sampling/viewing tools, “GP-Viewer” and “Device

View”.

7.1

Data View Overview

7.2

Device View

7.3

GP-Viewer

7.4

Checking the Data Sampling Status

7.5

System Time Bar

7.1 Data View Overview

7.1

Data Vie w Over vie w

The [Data View(D)] menu of the menu bar allows you to start the tool to display data saved on Pro-Server in various formats.

The following shows the overview of the display tool.

Device View

Device View allows you to sample data from devices connected to Ethernet to monitor the status or to playback saved device data on Device View.

GP-Viewer

GP-Viewer allows you to sample screen data from the GP system connected to Ethernet to display screen data or to playback saved GP data on GP-Viewer.

In addition to the above, you can also use the [Data Sampling Status] dialog showing the data sampling status on Pro-Server or the tool such as System Time Bar applicable to user created application software.

The frame structures of Device View, GP_ Viewer and the [Data Sampling Status] dialog differ from other windows. The following shows the general view.

Operation Window

Show/Hide Switching Bar

Time Bar Display Area

(The display area size is fixed and you cannot change it.)

Operation Description Window

7-2

7.1 Data View Overview

You can only install the trial version of “GP-Viewer V1.1” from the “Pro-Server with Pro-Studio for Windows Ver.4.5” CD-ROM. When a trial version of the GP-

Viewer software is used, the words “Trial Edition” will appear on the splash screen. All the program’s features, however, are the same as the official version.

Following four files are created by Device View.

***

.#DV ............. Sampled device information (text format)

***

.#DB ............. Sampling method information (text format)

***

.#SR ............. Sampled device optimal information (text format)

***

.#DR ............. Saved data (binary format)

When using Data View, the database accessed, even if it is only temporarily, will be registered as a network project. If, during data polling the system should go down, once the system is restored, simply restarting Pro-Server will automatically restarts the data polling. (Polling data is saved in a file using the same file extension as a Network Project file - NPJ_DBs.)

When Pro-Server is started, the Network Project’s registered databases are read. As a result, if a large number of databases are registered, Pro-Server’s startup will be slowed, and can result in the use of a large amount of system resources. As a result, please be sure to delete any temporary databases that are no longer used from the Network Project’s registry. To do this, open Pro-

Studio’s [DataView (D)] menu’s [Data Sampling Status] dialog box. Click on the unneeded database names and press your PC keyboard’s [Delete] key.

Even though this deletes the database from the Network Project, the database itself is not deleted. If needed, the database file can reopened by simply re-registering it in the Network Project.

7-3

7.2 Device View

7.2

De vice Vie w

Device View allows you to sample data from devices connected to Ethernet to monitor the status or to playback saved device data on Device View.

You can also view non-sequential devices or devices of multiple entry nodes at one time.

7.2.1

Setting Sampling Target Device

This section describes how to designate the device that you wish to sample data. After you completed the setup, you can monitor data of the target device.

1.

After selecting the entry node that you wish to sample data, click [Device View] on the [Data

View (D)] menu of the Menu Bar.

You can also right-click the entry node to select “Device View”.

7-4

7.2 Device View

2.

The [Data sampling source] window appears. After designating each item for the device that you wish to sample data, click [Next].

[Node Name]

Enter the node name to sample data. Node names registered in the network project file are displayed.

[Device Name]

Enter the device name to sample data. If you click [ ...

], the symbol entry window appears.

[Device Type]

Designate the device model to sample data.

7-5

7.2 Device View

[Count]

Designate the number of sequential device from the device to sample. The maximum numbers to be designated are shown in the following table below.

Device Type to

Access

Bit Device

16 Bits Device

32 Bits Device

Format

Bit

Bit

16 bits

32 bits

Single precision floating point

Double precision floating point

Character string

16 bits

32 bits

Single precision floating point

Double precision floating point

Character string

Maximum Number of

Device When

Designating Special

Protocol Symbols

255

255

255

127

127

63

510 (single byte)

255

255

255

127

1020 (single byte)

Maximum Number of

Device When Designating Other Device

255

255

255

255

255

255

510 (single byte)

255

255

255

255

1020 (single byte)

If you designate values exceeding those maximum numbers or if all devices within the restricted range have not registered as Special Protocol symbols, the warning dialog will appear.

3.

The [Data Input] window appears. Conditions that you have designated so far are displayed in the window. You can also click and edit each item. If you have made a mistake, click [Back]. If you do not have other devices to sample data, click [OK].

7-6

7.2 Device View

Be sure to connect to the GP system since the communication process will start with the designated GP system when you click [OK].

[Append]

Use this button to append the device to sample data.

If you click this button, the [Append] dialog box (same as the [Data sampling source] dialog) will appear so that you can designate devices to append.

[Delete]

Use this button to delete lines.

Select lines to delete and then click [Delete].

[Upper], [Lower]

Use these buttons to change the order of lines.

Select the line that you wish to change the order, and then click either [Upper] or [Lower].

If you designate Special Protcol symbols to [Device name] when you edit items directly in the [Data

Input] dialog, the maximum number of read that you can input in the “Number of Data” field will be restricted to the contents of the table below.

Device Type to

Access

Bit Device

16 Bits Device

32 Bits Device

Format

Bit

Bit

16 bits

32 bits

Single precision floating point

Double precision floating point

Character string

16 bits

32 bits

Single precision floating point

Double precision floating points

Character string

Maximum Number of

Read

255

255

255

127

127

63

510 (single byte)

255

255

255

127

510 (single byte)

If you designate values exceeding those maximum numbers, the warning dialog will appear.

7-7

4.

The selected device data is displayed on Device View.

7.2 Device View

The contents here displayed on Device View are device data at the moment when you click [OK] in the procedure 3. This data is not updated.

7-8

7.2 Device View

7.2.2

Setting the Data Sampling Condition

This feature allows you to setup the data sampling condition from the sampling target device.

This section describes operations after you selected the sampling target device.

1.

Click [Sampling] of Device View.

2.

The following dialog appears. Click [Yes].

3.

The [Save As] dialog appears, and you can create the file to save the sampled data. The file extension is (.DB). After you designated the file name, click [Save].

7-9

7.2 Device View

4.

The [Sampling method] dialog appears.

Check the “Sampling method” that you wish to execute.

The contents of the “Condition” field differ depending on the “Sampling method” selected. You should perform the setting according to the contents displayed.

When You Selected “Regular Sampling” in “Sampling method” :

The setup contents are as the following. You should designate [Data sampling in specified seconds] and [Sampling using cache] in the “Condition” field.

[Data Sampling in specified seconds]

Designate the device data capturing interval in second. This is defaulted to “1 second”.

[Sampling using cache]

Check this box to use the cache to sample device data.

7-10

7.2 Device View

When You Selected “Periodic Sampling” in “Sampling method” :

The following settings are available. You should create the periodical sampling schedule using the

[Append], the [Delete], and the [Edit] buttons in the “Condition” field.

[Delete]

After selecting unnecessary schedules, click [Delete] to delete selected schedules.

[Append]

Click this button to create the new sampling schedule.

If you click the [Append] button, the [Designate the data sampling date] dialog appears. Designate each item in the [Designate the data sampling date] dialog, and then click [Next].

[Date]

Designate the date to sample device data. Device data are sampled on the day designated here.

7-11

7.2 Device View

[Week]

Designate a day of a week to sample device data. Check the day that you wish to sample device data.

You can also click [Everyday] (Fri), [Weekday] (Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri) or [Holiday] (Sat, Sun) under the day check boxes.

[Month]

Designate a day of a month to sample device data. You can designate either a particular day (one day) or the last day every month. Device data are sampled on the day designated here every month.

If you click [Next], the [Designate the sampling time] dialog appears. Designate each item in the

[Designate the sampling time] dialog, and then click [OK].

[Append] allows you to create the new sampling schedule and it will be displayed in the schedule field.

[Start Time]

Designate the time to start capturing device data. The sampling will start at the time designated here.

[Sampling count]

If you wish to sample device data once, check [One time only].

If you wish to repeat device data sampling, designate the sampling condition. You should designate the sampling interval and the number of sampling.

[Edit]

Click this button to change the contents of the selected schedule.

7-12

7.2 Device View

When You Selected “Sampling data after change in device” in “Sampling method”:

The contents of the “Condition” field are as the following. You should designate [Sampling Condition], [Interval Condition], and [Data sampling - from start to finish of data reception] in the “Condition” field.

[Sampling Condition]

Designate the timing to sample device data. You should designate the node name that you wish to perform a sampling, the target device name, the device model, and the device change condition.

[Interval Condition]

Designate intervals to check the device change and to sample data when the status changed.

[Data sampling - from start to finish of data reception]

Designate the intervals to save data “before and after” the device change occurred and the sampling condition was satisfied. Intervals designated here should be longer than the sampling interval.

7-13

7.2 Device View

When You Selected “Sampling data when PC was distributed” in “Sampling method”:

Sampling is executed when PC where Pro-Server to sample data runs is distributed.

The contents of the “Condition” field are as the following.

[Provide Sheet]

If pre-defined Provider information setups exist, select it from the pull-down list.

Be sure to set the [Provide Information] interval to 1000ms or longer.

[Sampling using cache]

Check this box to use the cache to sample device data.

[Data Sampling – from start to finish of data reception]

Designate the sampling method “before and after” receiving the Provider information. You should designate sampling times “before” and “after” receiving (in second), and the sampling interval (in second).

7-14

7.2 Device View

5.

Designate each item in the “Polling data file” field of the [Sampling method] dialog, and then click [OK].

[Change]

Use this button to change the folder used to save sampled data.

[Saving Method]

If you click this button, the [Saving Method] dialog appears. Designate each item in the [Saving

Method] dialog, and then click [OK].

[Designate the maximum size of data (file) to be stored]

Designate the folder to save sampled data. You should designate the total volume (size) of data to save among “No maximum size is designated (as much as storage media allows)”, “Designate maximum size” and “Periodic saving”.

7-15

7.2 Device View

If you selected “Designate maximum size”, you should also designate the maximum data size (in

MByte) and the sampling method.

- Selecting “Continuous numbering for new files”

When the maximum allowed size is exceeded, the following new file is created:

****

.[Sequence number]. #DT ABCD.0.#DT -> ABCD.1.#DT

- Selecting “Save over oldest data”

The oldest Polling data is overwritten when the maximum allowed size is exceeded.

- Selecting “Do not save files after size limit reached”

When the maximum allowed size is exceeded, Polling is stopped and an error message appears.

If you selected “Periodic saving”, you should also designate the interval to upload the files.

6.

Execute the device data sampling.

If you wish to test the sampling, click button. The sampling process starts and the contents are displayed on Device View. The sampled data are not saved at this time.

If you wish to sample data once, click button. Data are sampled and saved every time you click the button regardless of the designated data sampling condition. If you wish to sample data according to the designated data sampling condition, click the button. The data

“Sample & Save” is executed according to the data sampling condition, and the contents are displayed on Device View. The display contents are updated according to the data change.

When you start the device data sampling, various buttons for viewing sampled data are appended on

Device View.

Refer to “7.2.5 Playback Feature” for the viewing method of sampled device data.

Reference

“7.2.5 Playback Feature”

7-16

7.2 Device View

When gathering data, clicking the icon, or selecting the [File | Show/Hide Time Bar] menu item allows you to set the Time Bar as “Show” or “Hide”. The System Time Bar is not displayed when

[Device View] starts up. It is displayed, however, after “Sampling” operation is performed. Show/Hide status data is contained in the #DV file.

7-17

7.2.3

Editing Sampled Data

This feature allows you to edit saved device data.

1.

Click [Data Edit] of Device View.

7.2 Device View

2.

The [Data Edit] dialog appears. You can edit data in various methods. The following part describes the major operation method after the [Data Edit] dialog appeared.

Although you can start multiple Device View windows, you cannot edit data simultaneously.

7-18

7.2 Device View

Appending Sampled Data

1.

Click [Append] of the [Data Edit] dialog.

2.

The next dialog appears. Designate each item about the device that you wish to append, and then click [OK]. Items are equal to those in the [Data sampling source] dialog.

Reference

“7.2.1 Setting Sampling Target Device”

3.

The device data that you wish to append are displayed in the [Data Edit] dialog.

Deleting Sampled Data

1.

Select the data that you wish to delete in the [Data Edit] dialog.

2.

Click [Delete]. The selected data will be deleted.

Searching Sampled Data

1.

Click [Search] in the [Data Edit] dialog.

2.

The [Search] dialog appears. Enter the date that you wish to search, and then click [OK].

3.

The display contents are updated and data are displayed showing one closest to the date entered in the middle.

7-19

7.2 Device View

Editing Data Source

1.

Click the data source field that you wish to edit. The column including the selected field is highlighted so that you can enter data from the keyboard in the selected field. The pull-down list may appear depending on the selected item.

2.

Enter the new contents from the keyboard. The contents of the selected field are updated.

Data cannot be edited during Polling.

Editing Saved Data

1.

Click [Edit] of the [Data Edit] dialog.

2.

The [Edit] button in the [Data Edit] dialog is dimmed, and the [Delete Record] button appears.

3.

Select the data that you wish to delete, and then click [Delete Record]. The selected data will be deleted.

Click on [OK] to set the selections made in [Edit] and/or [Delete Record].

Click on [Cancel] to delete all current selections.

7-20

7.2 Device View

7.2.4

Option

This feature allows you to change the display format of the data display area in Device View.

1.

Click [Option] of Device View.

2.

The [Option] dialog appears. You can change the display contents or format of the data display area in various methods. The following part describes the major operation method after the [Option] dialog appeared.

7-21

7.2 Device View

Setting a Line

1.

Click the [Line setting] tab in the [Option] dialog.

2.

Items on the [Line setting] tab appear. Designate each item in the [Line Style] field, and then click [OK].

[Line]

Select the ruled line that you wish to use among 6 styles. Also designate the thickness of the ruled line.

The unit is point and it is defaulted to 1 point.

[Color]

Select the ruled line color among 16 colors. If you do not find one that you wish to use among those, click [Other]. The [Color Setup] dialog appears so that you can select or create the color that you wish to use.

Setting a Character

1.

Click the [Character Setting] tab in the [Option] dialog.

2.

Items on the [Character Setting] tab appear. Designate each item, and then click [OK].

7-22

7.2 Device View

[Select]

Select which texts you wish to change, “Title” texts on the top or “Data” texts.

[Foreground color]

Select the text color among 16 colors. If you do not find the color that you wish to use among those, click the [Other] button. The [Color Setup] dialog appears so that you can select or create the color that you wish to use.

[Background color]

Select the background color among 16 colors. If you do not find the color that you wish to use among those, click the [Other] button. The [Edit Color] dialog appears so that you can select or create the color that you wish to use.

[Font]

Select the font that you wish to use. Click [Font]. The [Font] dialog appears. Designate each item such as the “font to use”, the “font style”, the “font size” and the “type”, and then click [OK].

[Row height]

Designate the row height of the data display area. The unit is “point” and it is defaulted to 3 points.

7-23

7.2 Device View

Setting the Display Contents

1.

Click the [Display Setting] tab in the [Option] dialog.

2.

Items on the [Display Setting] tab appear. Designate each item, and then click [OK].

[Display Parameter]

Select parameters that you wish to display in the data display area. Check each item that you wish to display. The following describes the overview of each item.

Item name:

Node name:

Device name:

Value:

Data Type:

Item Status:

Error Code:

Data number:

Designated symbol name.

Designated node name.

Designated device name.

The latest data.

Designated device data type.

(reserved)

Error code when an error occurred in sampling. (normaly 0)

(reserved)

Upper Limit: The upper limit value to display the graph. (Even if you designate a greater value than this, the graph remains in the 100% status.)

Alarm Upper Limit: The alarm upper limit value to display the graph. (including this value)

Alarm Lower Limit: The alarm lower limit value to display the graph. (including this value)

Lower Limit:

Graph:

The lower limit value to display the graph. (If you designate a less value than this, the graph will not be displayed.)

The horizontal bar graph is displayed according to values of “Upper Limit”,

“Alarm Upper Limit”, “Alarm Lower Limit” and “Lower Limit”.

7-24

7.2 Device View

[Line count per page]

Designate the number of data lines per page that you wish to display in the data display area. If the actual number of data exceeds the number of data per page, the [Previous] and the [Next] buttons are displayed in the left and the right sides under the data display area respectively. You can switch pages using these buttons.

Setting the Graph Color

1.

Click [Graph Setting] tab in the [Option] dialog.

2.

Items in the [Graph Setting] tab appear. Designate each item, and then click [OK].

[Normal color]

Select the normal graph color among 16 colors. If you do not find the color that you wish to use among those, click the [Other] button. The [Color Setup] dialog appears so that you can select or create the color that you wish to use.

[Warning color]

Select the warning graph color among 16 colors. If you do not find the color that you wish to use among those, click the [Other] button. The [Edit Color] dialog appears so that you can select or create the color that you wish to use.

7-25

7.2.5

Playback Feature

This feature allows you to playback sampled device data on Device View.

1.

Select [Open Data View (O)] on [Data View (D)] of the menu bar.

7.2 Device View

2.

The [Open] dialog appears. Select the device data (.#DV) that you wish to playback, and then click [Open].

You can also playback data in the saving process.

7-26

7.2 Device View

3.

The contents of device data that you wish to playback are displayed on Device View. You can playback device data using various buttons on Device View.

Saved Time

Time Bar

Now/Play Display Switch

Time Setup

[Saved Time]

This field shows the saved time of the saved device data.

The field shows, from the left, the saving start time, the time for currently displayed data and the last saved time. When the current status is displayed, the time for currently displayed data is identical to the last saved time.

[Time Bar]

Saved data can be displayed by sliding the time bar control to either side. The data saving process continues even while you operate the control.

[Time Setup]

You can designate the time unit for one graduation of the time bar.

[Now/Play Display Switch]

[Now] and [Play] buttons are available. You can playback the saved data from the designated time either by sliding the time bar control to the time that you wish to start the playback or by clicking the

[Play] button after clicking the time for currently displayed data (the center field of [Saved Time]) and then entering the time to start the playback.

7-27

7.2 Device View

7.2.6

Other Features

This section describes the File menu and options of Device View.

1.

If you click [File (F)] of Device View, 9 options are available. The following describes the overview of each option.

Exporting Data

1.

Select [Data Export] on the [File(F)] menu.

2.

The [Export] dialog appears. Designate each item, and then click [Export].

[Export File Name]

Designate the location and the file name to save exported data. The file extension is (.CSV).

7-28

7.2 Device View

[Start Time]

Designate the time to start exporting data. To export Polling data immediately, click on the [The First] checkbox. To export Polling data after a specific period of time elapses, click on the [Specified Time] checkbox. If you checked “Specified Time”, you should also designate the start time to export.

[End Time]

Designate the time to end exporting data. To wait until all data is polled before exporting, click on the

[The End] checkbox. To export Polling data after a specific period of time elapses, click on the

[Specified Time] checkbox. If you checked “Specified Time”, you should also designate the end time to export.

[Device Condition]

This is the reserved data. You should not change the designated value.

[Export Header]

If you wish to include the header information in exported data, check “Yes”. If not, check “No”.

[Export]

Executes the data export.

[Cancel]

The process is stopped and goes back to Device View.

• Although you can start multiple Device View programs, you cannot export data simultaneously.

• Data can be exported during Polling. However, if the [Designate maximum size/Save over oldest data] selection is used, data export cannot be performed.

Saving Data

1.

If you wish to save displayed data on Device View, click [Save (S)] on the [File (F)] menu.

Data are overwritten.

If you wish to save displayed data on Device View as a separate file name, click [Save As (A)] on the

[File (F)] menu. The [Save As] dialog appears. Enter the file name, and then click [Save].

Print

1.

Click [Print] on the [File (F)] menu. The printing process is executed.

7-29

Page Setup

1.

Click [Page setup(P)] on the [File (F)] menu.

2.

The [Print Setup] dialog appears. Designate each item, and then click [OK].

7.2 Device View

The contents of the [Page setup] dialog differ depending on your printer.

Refer to the user manual of your printer for details.

Preview

1.

Click [Preview] on the [File (F)] menu.

2.

The print preview appears.

Copy to Clipboard

1.

Click [Copy to Clipboard] on the [File (F)] menu.

2.

The data value displayed on Device View is copied into the clipboard.

3.

Paste the data value onto the application used.

You can only copy data in the data display area of Device View into the clipboard. You cannot copy data such as a title.

Show / Hide Time Bar

1.

Clicking [File | Show/Hide Time Bar] enables setting the System Time Bar to “Show” or “Hide” mode.

Exit

1.

Click [Exit(X)] on the [File (F)] menu. Exits Device View.

7-30

Option

This is selected on [Data View (D)] of the menu bar.

1.

Select [Option] on [Data View (D)] of the menu bar.

7.2 Device View

2.

The [Data View Options] dialog appears.

You can select “Show/Hide” of the setup menu and the save button.

If you uncheck “Display menu”, the [Option], the [Data Edit], and the [Sampling] menus are hidden on

Device View.

If you uncheck “Display button”

Device View.

, , , buttons are hidden on

7-31

7.3 GP-Viewer

7.3

GP-Vie wer

GP-Viewer allows you to sample screen data from the GP system connected to Ethernet to display screen data or to playback saved GP data on GP-Viewer.

If you install Pro-Server V4.5 while GP-Viewer V1.0 remains on PC, a problem will occur when you reinstall GP-Viewer. Be sure to install Pro-Server V4.5 after uninstalling GP-Viewer V1.0 and Pro-Server with Pro-Studio of any older versions.

7.3.1

Starting GP-Viewer

When you start GP-Viewer, screens on the GP system are displayed on the GP-Viewer browser in real time.

1.

After selecting the entry node to use GP-Viewer, select [GP-Viewer] on [Data View (D)] of the menu bar.

• You should make sure to connect to the GP system because the communication process will start when you click [GP-Viewer].

• You can upload the connected GP screen on GP77R SERIES, however, the GP system is reset once. If your model does not support the online uploading function, the warning window appears.

• If the password protection has been set to the GP screen, the password entry dialog appears.

7-32

7.3 GP-Viewer

• The GP-Viewer screen refresh period is set via Pro-Studio’s -> [Configure] -> [System] -> [DDE Polling Time] dialog box (Default: 1000ms). If the

GP-Viewer’s screen refresh time becomes too slow, increasing the [DDE

Polling Time] value will speed it up.

2.

While the upload process from the GP system is running, the following dialog appears. The dialog will disappear when the upload process is completed.

3.

The selected GP screen data are displayed on GP-Viewer.

• Data have been monitored but not been saved at this stage.

• If the selected GP’s screen size is smaller than the GP-Viewer’s default window size, a portion of the GP-Viewer window may be blank. (GP2300, etc.)

7-33

7.3.2

Setting the Data Sampling Condition

This feature allows you to set the data sampling condition from the target device.

The following part describes the procedure after GP-Viewer is started.

1.

Click [Sampling] of GP-Viewer.

7.3 GP-Viewer

If the selected GP’s screen size is smaller than the GP-Viewer’s default window size, a portion of the GP-Viewer window may be blank. (GP2300, etc.)

2.

The next dialog appears. Click [Yes].

3.

The [Save As] dialog appears so that you can create the file to save sampled data. The file extension is (.DB). Designate the file name, and then click [Save].

7-34

7.3 GP-Viewer

4.

The [Sampling method] dialog appears.

Check the desired “Sampling Method”.

The contents of the “Condition” field differ depending on the “Sampling method” selected. You should perform the setting according to the contents displayed.

When You Selected “Regular Sampling” on “Sampling method”:

The setup contents are as the following. You should designate [Data Sampling in specified seconds] and

[Sampling using cache] in the “Condition” field.

[Data Sampling in specified seconds]

Designate the device data capturing interval in second. This is defaulted to “1 second”.

[Sampling using cache]

Check this box to use the cache to sample device data.

7-35

7.3 GP-Viewer

When You Selected “Periodic Sampling” in “Sampling method” :

The setup contents are as the following. You should create the periodical sampling schedule using the

[Append], the [Delete], and the [Edit] buttons in the “Condition” field.

[Delete]

After selecting unnecessary schedules, click [Delete] to delete selected schedules.

[Append], [Edit]

Click these buttons to append or to edit the sampling schedule.

If you click either the [Append] button, the [Designate the data sampling date] dialog appears. Designate each item in the [Designate the data sampling date] dialog, and then click [Next].

7-36

7.3 GP-Viewer

[Date]

Designate the date to sample device data. Device data are sampled on the day designated here.

[Week]

Designate a day of a week to sample device data. Check the day that you wish to sample device data.

You can also click [Everyday] (Fri), [Weekday] (Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri) or [Weekend] (Sat, Sun) under the day check boxes.

[Month]

Designate a day of a month to sample device data. You can designate either a particular day (one day) or the last day every month. Device data are sampled on the day designated here every month.

If you click [Next], the [Designate the sampling time] dialog appears. Designate each item in the [Designate the sampling time] dialog, and then click [OK].

[Append] allows you to create the new sampling schedule and it will be displayed in the schedule field.

[Edit] allows you to change the contents of the selected schedule.

[Start Time]

Designate the time to start capturing device data. The sampling will start at the time designated here.

[Sampling count]

If you wish to sample device data once, check [One time only].

If you wish to repeat device data sampling, designate the sampling condition. You should designate the sampling interval and the number of sampling.

[Edit]

Click this button to change the contents of the selected schedule.

7-37

7.3 GP-Viewer

When You Selected “Sampling data after change in device” in “Sampling method” :

The contents of the “Condition” field are as the following. You should designate [Sampling Condition],

[Interval Condition], and [Data sampling - from start to finish of data reception] in the “Condition” field.

[Sampling Condition]

Designate the timing to sample device data. You should designate the node name that you wish to perform a sampling, the target device name, the device model, and the device change condition.

[Interval Condition]

Designate intervals to check the device change and to sample data when the status changed.

[Data sampling - from start to finish of data reception]

Designate the intervals to save data “before and after” the device change occurred and the sampling condition was satisfied. Intervals designated here should be longer than the sampling interval.

7-38

7.3 GP-Viewer

When You Selected “Sampling data when PC was distributed” in “Sampling method” :

The contents of the “Condition” field are as the following. You should enter the Provider information setup name in [Provider Sheet] of the “Condition” field, and then click [Provider Data Registration] to designate the new Provider information setup. If you have already designated Provider information setups, you can select it from the pull-down list.

[Provide Sheet]

If pre-defined Provider information setups exist, select it from the pull-down list. If it does not exist, you should enter the name.

Be sure to set the [Provide Information] interval to 1000ms or longer.

[Sampling using cache]

Check this box to use the cache to sample device data.

[Data sampling - from start to finish of data reception]

Designate the sampling method “before and after” receiving the Provider information. You should designate sampling times “before” and “after” receiving (in second), and the sampling interval (in second).

7-39

7.3 GP-Viewer

5.

Designate each item in the “Polling data file” field of the [Sampling method] dialog, and then click [OK].

[Change]

Use this button to change the folder to save sampled data.

[Saving Method]

If you click this button, the [Saving Method] dialog appears. Designate each item in the [Saving

Method] dialog, and then click [OK].

7-40

7.3 GP-Viewer

[Designate the maximum size of data (file) to be stored]

Designate the folder to save sampled data. You should designate the total volume (size) of data to save among “No maximum size is designated (as much as storage media allows)”, “Designate maximum size” and “Periodic saving”.

If you selected “Designate maximum size”, you should also designate the maximum data size (in

MByte) and the sampling method.

- Selecting “Continuous numbering for new files”

When the maximum allowed size is exceeded, the following new file is created:

****

.[Sequence number]. #DT ABCD.0.#DT -> ABCD.1.#DT

- Selecting “Save over oldest data”

The oldest Polling data is overwritten when the maximum allowed size is exceeded.

- Selecting “Do not save files after size limit reached”

When the maximum allowed size is exceeded, Polling is stopped and an error message appears.

If you selected “Periodic saving”, you should also designate the interval to upload the files.

6.

Execute the device data sampling.

To perform sampling registration for GP display screens, click the button.

To poll sample registered device data, click the button.

If you wish to sample data according to the designated data sampling condition, click the button. The data “Sample & Save” is executed according to the data sampling condition, and the contents are displayed on GP-Viewer. The display contents are updated according to the data change.

When you start the device data sampling, various buttons for viewing sampled data are appended on

GP-Viewer.

Refer to “7.3.5 Playback Feature” for the viewing method of sampled device data.

Reference

“7.3.5 Playback Feature”

7-41

7.3 GP-Viewer

When gathering data, clicking the icon, or selecting the [File | Show/Hide Time Bar] menu item allows you to set the Time Bar as “Show” or “Hide”. The System Time Bar is not displayed when

[GP-Viewer] starts up. It is displayed, however, after “Sampling” operation is performed. Show/Hide status data is contained in the #DV file.

7-42

7.3.3

Editing Sampled Data

This feature allows you to edit sampled device data.

1.

Click [Data Edit] of GP-Viewer.

7.3 GP-Viewer

2.

The [Data Edit] dialog appears. You can edit data in various methods. The following part describes the major operation method after the [Data Edit] dialog appeared.

7-43

7.3 GP-Viewer

Appending Sampled Data

1.

Click [Append] of the [Data Edit] dialog.

2.

The next dialog appears. Designate each item about the device that you wish to append, and then click [OK]. Items are equal to those in the [Data sampling source] dialog.

Reference

“7.2.1 Setting Sampling Target Device”

3.

The device data that you wish to append are displayed in the [Data Edit] dialog.

Deleting Sampled Data

1.

Select the data that you wish to delete in the [Data Edit] dialog.

2.

Click [Delete]. The selected data will be deleted.

Searching Sampled Data

1.

Click [Search] in the [Data Edit] dialog.

2.

The [Search] dialog appears. Enter the date that you wish to search, and then click [OK].

3.

The display contents are updated and data are displayed showing one closest to the date entered in the middle.

7-44

7.3 GP-Viewer

Editing Data Source

1.

Click the data source field that you wish to edit. The column including the selected field is highlighted so that you can enter data from the keyboard in the selected field. The pull-down list may appear depending on the selected item.

2.

Enter the new contents from the keyboard. The contents of the selected field are updated.

Data cannot be edited during Polling.

Editing Saved Data

1.

Click [Edit] of the [Data Edit] dialog.

2.

The [Edit] button in the [Data Edit] dialog is highlighted, and the [Delete Record] button appears.

3.

Select the data that you wish to delete, and then click [Delete Record]. The selected data will be deleted.

Click on [OK] to set the selections made in [Edit] and/or [Delete Record].

Click on [Cancel] to delete all current selections.

7-45

7.3.4

Setting Drawing

This feature allows you to change the display format of the data display area in GP-Viewer.

1.

Click [Option] of GP-Viewer.

7.3 GP-Viewer

2.

The [Wizard] dialog appears. Perform required settings, and then click [Option] of GP-Viewer to close the dialog.

7-46

7.3 GP-Viewer

[Synchronous Mode]

You can designate the synchronization style between GP screens and GP-Viewer. There are 3 synchronous modes available, Full Synchronous, GP Synchronous and Asynchronous. The following describes the detail of each style.

Asynchronous

(Async)

GP Synchronous

(GP Sync)

Full Synchronous

(Full Sync)

Screens can be switched on GP-Viewer. Switching a screen on GP-

Viewer does not synchronize with a screen on the GP system.

Screens cannot be switched on GP-Viewer. Switching a screen on the GP system synchronizes with a screen on GP-Viewer. (This is the default setting.)

Screens can be switched on GP-Viewer. Switching a screen on GP-

Viewer synchronizes with a screen on the GP system and vice versa.

[Screen No]

This feature allows you to change the displayed screen of GP-Viewer according to screen numbers predefined on the GP system.

If you click [Previous], the previous screen from the currently displayed screen is displayed and the value in the “Screen No” field is deceased by one.

If you click [Next], the next screen from the currently displayed screen is displayed and the value in the

“Screen No” field is increased by one.

If you enter the screen number that you wish to display in the “Screen No” field and click [Set], the corresponding screen to the number entered is displayed.

• The screen switching feature of GP-Viewer is effective only when the synchronous mode is either “Asynchronous” or “Full Synchronous”.

• You cannot normally switch screens by GP-Viewer from upper-level PCs.

You should set the bit “4” of GP’s LS2076 to “ON (1)” to switch screens in the

“Full Synchronous” mode from upper-level PCs.

[Refresh Screen Data]

If you changed the GP screen contents, click [Refresh Screen Data]. GP-Viewer re-captures the setup contents of the GP system.

7-47

7.3.5

Playback Feature

This feature allows you to playback sampled device data on GP-Viewer.

1.

Select [Open Data View (O)] on [Data View (D)] of the menu bar.

7.3 GP-Viewer

2.

The [Open] dialog appears. Select the device data (.#DV) that you wish to playback, and then click [Open].

You can also playback data in the saving process.

7-48

7.3 GP-Viewer

3.

The contents of sampled data are displayed on GP-Viewer. You can playback saved data using various buttons on GP-Viewer.

Saved Time

Time Bar

Now/Play Display Switch

Time Setup

[Saved Time]

This field shows the saved time of the saved device data.

The field shows, from the left, the saving start time, the time for currently displayed data and the last saved time. When the current status is displayed, the time for currently displayed data is identical to the last saved time.

[Time Bar]

Saved data can be displayed by sliding the time bar control to either side. The data saving process continues even while you operate the control.

[Time Setup]

You can designate the time unit for one graduation of the time bar.

[Now/Play Display Switch]

[Now] and [Play] buttons are available. You can playback the saved data from the designated time either by sliding the time bar control to the time that you wish to start the playback or by clicking the

[Play] button after clicking the time for currently displayed data (the center field of [Saved Time]) and then entering the time to start the playback.

7-49

7.3 GP-Viewer

7.3.6

Other Features

This section describes the File menu and options of GP-Viewer.

1.

If you click [File (F)] of GP-Viewer, 9 options are available. The following describes the overview of each option.

Exporting Data

1.

Select [Data Export] on the [File (F)] menu.

2.

The [Export] dialog appears. Designate each item, and then click [Export].

[Export File Name]

Designate the location and the file name to save exported data. The file extension is (.CSV).

7-50

7.3 GP-Viewer

[Start Time]

Designate the time to start exporting data. If you wish to start exporting immediately after you clicked

[Export], check “The First”. If you wish to start exporting at the designated time, check “Specified

Time”. If you checked “Specified Time”, you should also designate the start time to export.

[End Time]

Designate the time to end exporting data. If you wish to export the entire sampled data, check “The

End”. If you wish to export until the designated time, check “Specified Time”. If you checked

“Specified Time”, you should also designate the end time to export.

[Device Condition]

This is the reserved data. You should not change the designated value.

[Export Header]

If you wish to include the header information in exported data, check “Yes”. If not, check “No”.

[Export]

Executes the data export.

[Cancel]

The process is stopped and goes back to GP-Viewer.

• Although you can start multiple GP-Viewer programs, you cannot export data simultaneously.

• You can export data even while storing data. However, if you checked

[Designate maximum size/Save over oldest data] in the [Saving Method] dialog, you cannot export while storing data.

Saving Data

1.

If you wish to save displayed data to GP-Viewer, click [Save (S)] on the [File (F)] menu. Data are overwritten.

If you wish to save displayed data to GP-Viewer as a separate file name, click [Save As (A)] in the [File

(F)] menu. The [Save As] dialog appears. Enter the file name, and then click [Save (S)].

Print

1.

Click [Print] on the [File (F)] menu. The printing process is performed.

7-51

Page Setup

1.

Click [Page Setup(P)] in the [File (F)] menu.

2.

The [Print Setup] dialog appears. Designate each item, and then click [OK].

7.3 GP-Viewer

The contents of the [Page Setup] dialog differ depending on your printer.

Refer to the user manual of your printer for details.

Preview

1.

Click [Preview] in the [File (F)] menu.

2.

The print preview appears.

Copy to Clipboard

1.

Click [Copy to Clipboard] in the [File (F)] menu.

2.

The data value displayed on GP-Viewer is copied into the clipboard.

3.

Paste the data value onto the application used.

You can only copy data in the data display area of GP-Viewer into the clipboard. You cannot copy data such as a title.

Show / Hide Time Bar

1.

Clicking [File | Show/Hide Time Bar] enables setting the System Time Bar to “Show” or “Hide” mode.

Exit

1.

Click [Exit(X)] in the [File (F)] menu. Exits GP-Viewer.

7-52

Options

This is selected on [Data View (D)] of the menu bar.

1.

Select [Option] on [Data View (D)] of the menu bar.

7.3 GP-Viewer

2.

The [DataView Option] dialog appears.

You can select “Show/Hide” of the setup menu and the save button.

If you uncheck “Display menu”, the [Option], the [Data Edit], and the [Sampling] menus are hidden on

GP-Viewer.

If you uncheck “Display button”, , , , buttons are hidden on

GP-Viewer.

7-53

7.3 GP-Viewer

Suppor ted Dra wing Commands

Among GP-PRO/PBIII drawing commands, the following commands are supported by GP-Viewer.

Only the following drawing features are function properly.

• line/poly-line command rectangle command circle/ellipse command arc/sector command polygon fill command ruler command text string command mark call-up command

Among these drawing commands, there are some functions not available with GP-Viewer. Functions available and not available with GP-Viewer are listed below for each drawing command.

The display may differ between GP and GP-Viewer even if drawing commands are supported.

Line/Poly-line Command

specifying a display color blinking a display color specifying a background color blinking a background color drawing an arrow drawing a solid line drawing a dotted line

Rectangle Command

specifying a display color blinking a display color specifying a background color blinking a background color drawing a solid line drawing a dotted line chamfering specifying the number of dots in chamfering solid fill pattern fill patterns except for a solid fill

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

7-54

Circle/Ellipse Command

specifying a display color blinking a display color specifying a background color blinking a background color drawing a solid line drawing a dotted line solid fill pattern fill patterns except for a solid fill

Arc/Sector Command

specifying a display color blinking a display color specifying a background color blinking a background color drawing a solid line drawing a dotted line

Polygon Fill Command

specifying a display color blinking a display color specifying a background color blinking a background color drawing a solid line drawing a dotted line solid fill pattern fill patterns except for a solid fill

Ruler Command

specifying a display color blinking a display color specifying a background color blinking a background color drawing a solid line drawing a dotted line ruler type number of graduations to be divided

7.3 GP-Viewer

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

7-55

Text String Command

specifying a display color blinking a display color specifying a background color blinking a background color specifying a shade color of a carving style blinking a shade color of a carving style text direction text style text size text rotation angle text font

Mark Call-up Command

specifying a display color blinking a display color specifying a background color blinking a background color specifying a mark size

7.3 GP-Viewer

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

7-56

7.3 GP-Viewer

Suppor ted T a g Commands

The following GP-PRO/PBIII tag commands are supported by GP-Viewer.

Only the following tags are supported.

C tag

E tag

F tag

G tag

K tag

L tag

M tag

N tag

S tag

T tag

• U tag

Among these tag commands, there are some features not available with GP-Viewer. Refer to the following list for each tag command.

The display may differ for GP and for your GP-Viewer even if drawing commands are supported.

C Tag

character size specifying a display color blinking a display color specifying display rotation specifying a tiling pattern specifying a background color character size (full/half)

E Tag

specifying a background color at tiling specifying data (absolute/relative) specifying a sign rounding off numbers specifying a display data form specifying display address (indirect) bit length when [relative] is selected input sign when [relative] is selected input display when [relative] is selected input range when [relative] is selected display range when [relative] is selected character size the number of digits to be displayed the number of decimals display style

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

7-57

E Tag

specifying a range the number of ranges setting a range specifying a number color blinking a number color specifying a background pattern specifying a background color blinking a background color operation

F Tag

specifying display rotation specifying a display (direct/indirect) type of screen (base screen/image screen) type of screen (CF card image screen) screen number specifying a word address specifying a display data form when [relative] is selected operation mode (area move/move between 2 points) displaying a display data form

G Tag

specifying data (absolute/relative) display mode display a data form when [absolute] is selected (BIN/BCD) input range when [relative] is selected chart type (bar chart/pie chart/half-pie chart) fill patterns for a bar chart chart fill patterns except for a bar chart indicating a starting point of a meter-type pie or half-pie chart specifying a display color specifying a background color blinking a background color displaying alarm specifying alarm background color blinking alarm background color specifying display rotation

7.3 GP-Viewer

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

7-58

K Tag

specifying a data (absolute/relative/character string) specifying a word address specifying a starting bit address specifying a display address (indirect) specifying a sign rounding off numbers specifying display/write data form bit length when [relative] is selected input sign when [relative] is selected input range when [relative] is selected display range when [relative] is selected the number of characters to be displayed when [character string] is selected character size the number of digits to be displayed the number of decimals (direct/indirect) specifying display style automatic clear checking the number of digits to be input bar code input alarm (direct/indirect/color change) specifying an alarm display color blinking an alarm display color specifying an alarm background color blinking an alarm background color operation specifying display rotation

L Tag

screen number (direct/indirect/state) starting method calling the base screen and the image screen delete action (enable/unable) display a data form when [indirect] is selected (BIN/BCD) calling image screens in the CF Card

7.3 GP-Viewer

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

7-59

M Tag

screen number (direct/indirect) starting method display data format when [indirect] is selected (BIN/BCD) offset value specifying a display size display color (0) foreground color display color (0) blinking foreground color display color (0) background color display color (0) blinking background color display color (1) foreground color display color (1) blinking foreground color display color (1) background color display color (1) blinking background color

N Tag

specifying data (absolute/relative) specifying if to show a negative number specifying a display data form access a data length input range when [relative] is selected text size text font number of digits to be displayed specifying a display color blinking a display color specifying a background color blinking a background color alarm process specifying an alarm color blinking an alarm color specifying an alarm background color blinking an alarm background color operator process specifying display rotation

7.3 GP-Viewer

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

7-60

S Tag

starting method post-start read text size text font number of texts to be displayed specifying a text color blinking a text color specifying a background color blinking a background color display location clearing display specifying display angle

T Tag

write action mode (bit/word/special) specifying an operator hierarchical screen switching special actions except for T tag extension

Q tag extended action function key process interlock capability grouping with the automatic disable capability addition/subtraction on/from a specified digit

GP reset

AUX output buzzer sound

U Tag

reverse display specifying method of the window registration screen (direct/ indirect) display a data form when [indirect] is selected (BIN/BCD) action mode reshuffling of overlapped screens

7.3 GP-Viewer

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

7-61

7.4 Checking the Data Sampling Status

7.4

Chec king the Data Sampling Status

This section describes the procedure to check the sampling status of device data.

1.

Select [Data Sampling Status] on [Data View (D)] of the menu bar.

2.

The [Data Sampling Status] dialog appears. The sampling status of each registered database is displayed so that you can check the contents.

[File (F)]

You can open a database not displayed here, or close the [Data Sampling Status] dialog.

[Option (O)]

You can set the [Data Sampling Status] dialog to be “displayed on the front always”.

7-62

7.4 Checking the Data Sampling Status

[Registered Database]

Database Name Database name currently registered.

Access Count

Scan Time

Overrun Count

Status

Number of data view (e.g. Device View, GP-Viewer) displaying database.

Time for one sampling.

Number of times that sampling failed at the designated timing.

Database status.

[Polling Start]

If you select a database that a sampling is not currently executed, this button becomes active.

If you click this button, the data save is started.

[Polling Stop]

If you select the database that a sampling is currently executed, this button becomes active.

If you click this button, the data save is stopped.

[Detail]

After selecting the database that you wish to check the detail, click the [Detail] button.

If you click it, the [Detail] dialog appears. The detailed contents of the selected database are displayed.

[Property]

After selecting the database that you wish to change the data sampling condition, click the [Set] button.

If you click it, the [Sampling method] dialog appears so that you can change the data sampling condition of the selected database. The operation procedure is equal to the procedure after Step 4 in

“7.2.2 Setting the Data Sampling Condition“” or in “7.3.2 Setting the Data Sampling Condition”.

Reference

“7.2.2 Setting the Data Sampling Condition”, “7.3.2 Setting the Data Sampling

Condition”

7-63

7.5

System Time Bar

This section describes the operation procedure of System Time Bar.

1.

Select [System time bar] on [Data View (D)] of the menu bar.

7.5 System Time Bar

2.

System Time Bar appears.

Click [Change Database] to open the database (file) that you wish to display.

7-64

7.5 System Time Bar

3.

The contents of the selected database is displayed in System Time Bar.

Saved Time

Time Bar

Now/Play Display Switch

Time Setup

[Saved Time]

This field shows the saved time of the saved device data.

The field shows, from the left, the saving start time, the time for currently displayed data and the last saved time. When the current status is displayed, the time for currently displayed data is identical to the last saved time.

[Time Bar]

Saved data can be displayed by sliding the time bar control to either side. The data saving process continues even while you operate the control.

[Time Setup]

You can designate the time unit for one graduation of the time bar.

[Now/Play Display Switch]

[Now] and [Play] buttons are available. You can playback the saved data from the designated time either by sliding the time bar control to the time that you wish to start the playback or by clicking the

[Play] button after clicking the time for currently displayed data (the center field of [Saved Time]) and then entering the time to start the playback.

[Polling Start]

If you click this button, the data save is started.

[Polling Stop]

If you click this button, the data save is stopped.

[Close]

If you click this button, you can exit the System Time Bar.

7-65

7.5 System Time Bar

[Change Database]

If you click this button, the [Open] dialog appears. If you select the database that you wish to display and click [Open], it is displayed in System Time Bar.

Purpose of System Time Bar

System Time Bar has been developed for the purpose of using the Time Bar (data playback) feature on your own applications.

If you read the file used on your own application (e.g. application to display the database value in a bar graph format) that is equal to the Pro-Server Database File (

*

.#DB) into System Time Bar, you can synchronize the action of System Time Bar with the display contents of your application (e.g. length change of a bar graph) so that you can playback the database contents on various applications.

If you set back data from the present to the past using the system time bar, it may cause an error or work incorrectly in user-defined applications.

Example1) For the temperature monitoring system of a fireplace, suppose that the system always checks temperature going up when a fire place is powered on, and creates an error when temperature goes down. When storing data of this system and setting back from the present to the past using the system time bar, an application recognizes that fireplace temperature went down and creates an error.

Example2) For the data upper/lower edge trigger detecting system, when setting back from the present to the past using the system time bar, an application recognizes that upper/lower edge trigger actually exists and work incorrectly.

7-66

Maintenance via Ethernet

This chapter explains the maintenance procedures you can perform via the Ethernet network.

8.1

Transferring Network Project Files

8.2

Transferring Only Updated Screen Data to GPs

8.1 Transferring Network Project Files

8.1

T ransf erring Netw ork Pr oject Files

The following procedures explain how to transfer a modified network project file (

*

.npj) via the Ethernet network to a previously set up GP (i.e. that has had its system data file sent to it).

1.

On the Network Entry Node list, click the destination GP.

If you are currently editing a network project file, the file must be saved before it can be sent to a GP.

2.

Click [Transfer Network Project] in the [Tools(T)] menu.

3.

The [Transfer Network Project File] window appears and then the transfer of the network project file begins.

You can transfer the file to multiple GPs at the same time by selecting [Network

Entry Node List] and then entry nodes that you wish to transfer the file from the listed entry nodes on the right side.

8-2

8.2 Transferring Only Updated Screen Data to GPs

8.2

T ransf erring Onl

If you have modified screen data via the GP-PRO/PB III screen editor software, follow the procedure below to transfer only screen data to the GP. The following description assumes that GP-PRO/PB III’s data transfer window is open.

1.

Click [Transfer Settings] in the [Setup] menu.

2.

When the [Transfer Settings] window appears, click [Ethernet] in the [Send To] pull-down list and click [OK].

8-3

8.2 Transferring Only Updated Screen Data to GPs

Ethernet can be used to transfer only the updated screen data to the GPs whose setup has been completed.

However, set-up via Ethernet is also possible with the GP2000 Series.

Reference

“GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows Help Files”

Transferring your screen data in on-line mode temporarily causes the GP to display the transfer screen. The initial screen will be restored as soon as data transfer is completed.

3. Click [Send] in the Transfer menu or on the Send Screen button to transfer the information to the GP.

Send

Screen button

8-4

8.2 Transferring Only Updated Screen Data to GPs

The GP displays the following information when the screen data is being transferred.

Receive the application data

Downloading the screen data from the upper screen for maintenance. Don’t turn the GP power off. To turn the GP power off while downloading might destroy the data inside the GP.

For how to setup a GP for Ethernet, refer to “A.4 GP Ethernet Settings”.

Reference

“A.4 GP Ethernet Settings”

From GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows Ver. 4.0, only screen data transfer is required. The Network Project file’s data is not sent.

As a result, the sending of the same screen data to multiple GPs at the same time is possible. When the Network Project file is modified, use the

Pro-Studio [Tool] menu’s [Transfer Network Project] selection to send this updated data.

Reference

“8.1 Transferring Network Project Files”

8-5

Simple DLL

Function

This chapter describes the Simple DLL function.

9.1

Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

9.2

Examples of Simple DLL Function

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

9.1

Simple DLL (Pr oEasy .DLL) Function

The Simple DLL is a series of API. Using the Simple DLL, you can read and write data of PLC connected to GP/

GLC/Factory Gateway from applications in Visual Basic or Visual C++ via Pro-Server. The Simple DLL

(ProEasy.DLL) is embedded in Windows System folder at the installation.

The sample Pro-Easy.DLL program is included in the [Pro-SDK] folder within the Pro-Server CD-ROM.

9.1.1 Simple DLL Structure

The Simple DLL is structured as follows.

Simple DLL

Function

Single-Handle

Function

Read Function Cache Type

Write Function

Direct Type

Direct Type

Write with Cache

Refresh

Other Control

Function

Multi-Handle

Function

Read Function Cache Type

Write Function

Direct Type

Direct Type

Write with Cache

Refresh

Other Control

Function

System Function

Single-Handle Function

This function uses sequential communication so that you cannot call other functions while calling a certain function.

You can however call the function without having to acquire an access handle.

9-2

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

Multi-Handle Function

This function allows you to use more than one single-handle function with multiple partners simultaneously.

The multi-handle function name has an upper case “M” at the end to distinguish it from the single-handle function.

For example, the multi-handle function which has the equal functionality as the single-handle function,

“ReadDeviceVariant ()”, is “ReadDeviceVariantM ()”.

You can use the multi-handle function when you use a multi-thread or access to more than one PLC simultaneously.

Reference

“Precautions When Using Simple DLL in Multi-Thread Applications”

System Function

This is the Pro-Server’s system function which does not belong to either the single-handle or the multihandle function.

Cache Read

When more than one application reads from the same device, it takes time if Pro-Server reads the PLC one by one according to those requests.

If Application A and B both request reads to the same PLC device, the cache read function reads data from

PLC according to the request from Application A first, saves data in a cache buffer within Pro-Server and responds to Application A as the answer to the read request.

Next, for the read request from Application B, the cache read function returns data read for Application A and saved in a cache buffer. For detail, refer to “Details of Cache Read (Polling Time and Life Time)”

PC

Application

A

Application

B

DDEs are all cache reads.

Pro-Server

Cache Buffer

GP PLC

9-3

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

Direct Read

Independent of the cache status, this reads the latest data from PLC.

PC

Pro-Server

Application

A

GP PLC

Application

B

The direct read function name has upper case “D” or “DM” at the end.

Direct Write

The direct write function is to write data. The direct write function name has upper case “D” or “DM” at the end.

Write with Cache Refresh

In the case of the write with cache refresh function, when certain device data have been cached, after writing data, it reads from the corresponding device again and refreshes cache data.

The execution speed is slower than that of the direct write function. While a device is read using the cache read function, use the write with cache refresh function.

9-4

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

9.1.2 Device Read/Write Function

Single-Handle Cache Read Function

Bit data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceBit(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,WORD* pwData,

WORD wCount);

16-bit data

INT WINAPI ReadDevice16(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,WORD* pwData,

WORD wCount);

32-bit data

INT WINAPI ReadDevice32(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,DWORD* pdwData,

WORD wCount);

16-bit BCD data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceBCD16(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,WORD* pwData,

WORD wCount);

32-bit BCD data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceBCD32(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,DWORD* pdwData,

WORD wCount);

Single-precision floating-point data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceFloat(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,FLOAT* pflData,

WORD wCount);

Double-precision floating-point data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceDouble(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,DOUBLE* pdbData,

WORD wCount);

String data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceStr(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,LPTSTR psData,

WORD wCount);

General-use data

INT WINAPI ReadDevice(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,LPVOID pData,WORD wCount,

WORD wAppKind);

General-use data(for VB)

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceVariant(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,LPVARIANT pData,

WORD wCount,WORD wAppKind);

9-5

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

Single-Handle Direct Read Function

Bit data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceBitD(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,

WORD* pwData,WORD wCount);

16 bit data

INT WINAPI ReadDevice16D(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,

WORD* pwData,WORD wCount);

32 bit data

INT WINAPI ReadDevice32D(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,

DWORD* pdwData,WORD wCount);

16 bit BCD data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceBCD16D(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,

WORD* pwData,WORD wCount);

32 bit BCD data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceBCD32D(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,

DWORD* pdwData,WORD wCount);

Single precision floating-point data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceFloatD(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,

FLOAT* pflData,WORD wCount);

Double precision floating-point data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceDoubleD(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,

DOUBLE* pdbData,WORD wCount);

String data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceStrD(LPCTSTR bsNodeName, LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,

LPTSTR psData, WORD wCount);

General-use data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceD(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,

LPVOID pData,WORD wCount,WORD wAppKind);

General-use data(for VB)

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceVariantD(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,

LPVARIANT pData,WORD wCount,WORD wAppKind);

9-6

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

Single-Handle Direct Write Function

Bit data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceBitD(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,WORD* pwData,

WORD wCount);

16-bit data

INT WINAPI WriteDevice16D(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,WORD* pwData,

WORD wCount);

32-bit data

INT WINAPI WriteDevice32D(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,DWORD* pdwData,

WORD wCount);

16-bit BCD data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceBCD16D(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,WORD* pwData,

WORD wCount);

32-bit BCD data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceBCD32D(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,DWORD* pdwData,

WORD wCount);

Single-precision floating-point data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceFloatD(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,FLOAT* pflData,

WORD wCount);

Double-precision floating-point data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceDoubleD(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,DOUBLE* pdbData,

WORD wCount);

String data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceStrD(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,LPTSTR psData,

WORD wCount);

General-use data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceD(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,LPVOID pData,

WORD wCount,WORD wAppKind);

General-use data(for VB)

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceVariantD(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,LPVARIANT pData,

WORD wCount,WORD wAppKind);

9-7

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

Single-Handle Write with Cache Refresh Function

Bit data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceBit(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,

WORD* pwData,WORD wCount);

16 bit data

INT WINAPI WriteDevice16(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,

WORD* pwData,WORD wCount);

32 bit data

INT WINAPI WriteDevice32(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,

DWORD* pdwData,WORD wCount);

16 bit BCD data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceBCD16(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,

WORD* pwData,WORD wCount);

32 bit BCD data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceBCD32(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,

DWORD* pdwData,WORD wCount);

Single precision floating-point data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceFloat(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,

FLOAT* pflData,WORD wCount);

Double precision floating-point data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceDouble(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,

DOUBLE* pdbData,WORD wCount);

String data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceStr(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,

LPTSTR psData,WORD wCount);

General-use data

INT WINAPI WriteDevice(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,

LPVOID pData,WORD wCount,WORD wAppKind);

General-use data(for VB)

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceVariant(LPCTSTR bsNodeName,LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,

LPVARIANT pData,WORD wCount,WORD wAppKind);

9-8

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

Multi-Handle Cache Read Function

Bit data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceBitM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,WORD* pwData,WORD wCount);

16 bit data

INT WINAPI ReadDevice16M(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,WORD* pwData,WORD wCount);

32 bit data

INT WINAPI ReadDevice32M(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,DWORD* pdwData,WORD wCount);

16 bit BCD data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceBCD16M(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,WORD* pwData,WORD wCount);

32 bit BCD data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceBCD32M(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,DWORD* pdwData,WORD wCount);

Single precision floating-point data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceFloatM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,FLOAT* pflData,WORD wCount);

Double precision floating-point data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceDoubleM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,DOUBLE* pdbData,WORD wCount);

String data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceStrM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,LPTSTR psData,WORD wCount);

General-use data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,LPVOID pData,WORD wCount,WORD wAppKind);

General-use data(for VB)

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceVariantM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,LPVARIANT pData,WORD wCount,WORD wAppKind);

9-9

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

Multi-Handle Direct Read Function

Bit data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceBitDM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,WORD* pwData,WORD wCount);

16 bit data

INT WINAPI ReadDevice16DM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,WORD* pwData,WORD wCount);

32 bit data

INT WINAPI ReadDevice32DM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,DWORD* pdwData,WORD wCount);

16 bit BCD data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceBCD16DM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,WORD* pwData,WORD wCount);

32 bit BCD data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceBCD32DM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,DWORD* pdwData,WORD wCount);

Single precision floating-point data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceFloatDM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,FLOAT* pflData,WORD wCount);

Double precision floating-point data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceDoubleDM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,DOUBLE* pdbData,WORD wCount);

String data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceStrDM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,LPTSTR psData,WORD wCount);

General-use data

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceDM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,LPVOID pData,WORD wCount,WORD wAppKind);

General-use data(for VB)

INT WINAPI ReadDeviceVariantDM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,LPVARIANT pData,WORD wCount,WORD wAppKind);

9-10

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

Multi-Handle Direct Write Function

Bit data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceBitDM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,WORD* pwData,WORD wCount);

16-bit data

INT WINAPI WriteDevice16DM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,WORD* pwData,WORD wCount);

32-bit data

INT WINAPI WriteDevice32DM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,DWORD* pdwData,WORD wCount);

16-bit BCD data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceBCD16DM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,WORD* pwData,WORD wCount);

32-bit BCD data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceBCD32DM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,DWORD* pdwData,WORD wCount);

Single-precision floating-point data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceFloatDM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,FLOAT* pflData,WORD wCount);

Double-precision floating-point data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceDoubleDM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,DOUBLE* pdbData,WORD wCount);

String data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceStrDM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,LPTSTR psData,WORD wCount);

General-use data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceDM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,LPVOID pData,WORD wCount,WORD wAppKind);

General-use data(for VB)

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceVariantDM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,LPVARIANT pData,WORD wCount,WORD wAppKind);

9-11

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

Multi-Handle Write with Cache Refresh Function

Bit data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceBitM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,WORD* pwData,WORD wCount);

16 bit data

INT WINAPI WriteDevice16M(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,WORD* pwData,WORD wCount);

32 bit data

INT WINAPI WriteDevice32M(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,DWORD* pdwData,WORD wCount);

16 bit BCD data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceBCD16M(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,WORD* pwData,WORD wCount);

32 bit BCD data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceBCD32M(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,DWORD* pdwData,WORD wCount);

Single precision floating-point data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceFloatM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,FLOAT* pflData,WORD wCount);

Double precision floating-point data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceDoubleM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,DOUBLE* pdbData,WORD wCount);

String data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceStrM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,LPTSTR psData,WORD wCount);

General-use data

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,LPVOID pData,WORD wCount,WORD wAppKind);

General-use data (for VB)

INT WINAPI WriteDeviceVariantM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR bsNodeName,

LPCTSTR bsDeviceName,LPVARIANT pData,WORD wCount,WORD wAppKind);

9-12

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

Read/Write Function Parameters

<Return value>

Executed successfully: 0

Not executed successfully: Error code

<Arguments> bsNodeName......Pointer to the node name (char.string)

Specify directly the network node name registered with Pro-Studio or the IP address.

Ex.1) To specify the node name: “GP2

Ex.2) To specify directly the IP address: “192.9.201.1” bsDeviceName....Pointer to the symbol (char. string) to perform Read/Write

Specify directly the symbol name or the device address.

Ex.1) To specify the symbol: “SWITCH1”

Ex.2) To specify directly the device: “M100”

Function

XXXDeviceBit

XXXDevice16

XXXDevice32

XXXDeviceBCD16

XXXDeviceBCD32

XXXDeviceFloat

XXXDeviceDouble

XXXDeviceStr

XXXDevice

-

-

-

-

O

-

-

O

-

Bit 16Bit

S/U/HEX

-

BCD

-

-

-

O

-

O

-

-

-

-

O

-

-

-

O

-

-

Symbol Data Type

32Bit

S/U/HEX

-

BCD

-

-

-

-

O

-

O

-

-

-

O

-

-

-

O

-

-

Float

-

-

-

O

O

-

-

-

-

Double String

-

-

-

-

O

-

-

-

O

-

O

-

-

O

-

-

-

pxxData......Pointer to the Read/Write Data

The following table shows types of data to access and of arguments.

Bit data

Type of data to access

16 bit data

32 bit data

16 bit BCD data

32 bit BCD data

Single precision floating-point data

Double precision floating-point data

String data

General-use data

General-use data (for VB)

Data Type

WORD * pwData

WORD * pwData

DWORD * pdwData

WORD * pwData

DWORD * pdwData

FLOAT * pflData

DOUBLE * pdbData

LPTSTR psData

LPVOID pData

LPVARIANT pData

9-13

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function wCount....Read/Write data quantity

With the Read/WriteDeviceStr function, the quantity of string data is counted as the number of bytes. Always specify the data quantity as a multiple of 2 for devices with 16-bit data, and a multiple of 4 for devices with 32-bit data.

The following table shows the maximum numbers of read and write.

Type of data to access

Bit

16 bit

32 bit

16 bit BCD

32 bit BCD

Single precision floating-point

Double precision floating-point

Character string

Maximum number of read

255

1020

510

1020

510

510

255

1020 (single byte)

Maximum number of write

16

1020

510

1020

510

510

255

1020 (single byte) wAppKind ....Data type specification

Value

1

2

3

4

5

6

Data Type

Bit

Signed 16 Bit

Unsigned 16 Bit

HEX 16 Bit

BCD 16 Bit

Signed 32 Bit

Value

7

8

9

10

11

12

Data Type

Unsigned 32 Bit

HEX 32 Bit

BCD 32 Bit

Float

Double

Character string

The Read/WriteDevice function allows the data type to be changed dynamically because it is specified as a parameter.

<Supplement>

When Using Read/WriteDeviceBit Function:

The function stores data as many as wCount from the D0 bit in pwData.

Example : When wCount is 20

PwData

PwData+1

F

16

*

E

15

*

D

14

*

C

13

*

B

12

*

A

11

*

9

10

*

8

9

*

7

8

*

6

7

*

5

6

*

4

5

*

3

4

20

2

3

19

1

2

18

0

1

17

When handling sequential plural bit data, it is more effective to read/write in 16/32 bits using Read/

WriteDevice16 or Read/WriteDevice32 than Read/WriteDeviceBit.

Irregular values are stored in the bits shown as “

*

”. Mask those using an application program.

9-14

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

When Using Read/WriteDeviceBCD16/32 Function:

Use these functions when handling data as BCD within PLC. However, data (contents of pxxData) to receive from and to give to these functions are not BCD but binary data (BCD conversion is performed within Pro-Server.). You cannot handle negative numbers.

Function Name

Read/WriteDeviceBCD16

Read/WriteDeviceBCD32

Decimal Expression

0 - 9999

0 - 99999999

Hexadecimal Expression

0000 - 270F

00000000 - 05F5E0FF

When Using Character String Data Function:

For variables to receive character string data, be sure to secure sufficient data area to be able to receive those data.

9-15

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

9.1.3 System and Other Control Functions

Acquiring Pro-Server Handle

HANDLE WINAPI CreateProServerHandle();

<Function>

Acquires the Pro-Server handle to use when utilizing multi-handle functions.

<Return value>

Executed successfully: Other than 0 (handle code)

Not executed successfully: 0

Releasing Pro-Server Handle

INT WINAPI DeleteProServerHandle (HANDLE hProServer);

<Function>

Releases the Pro-Server handle already acquired.

<Return value>

Executed successfully: 0

Not executed successfully: Error code

<Arguments> hProServer ..... Pro-Server handle to be released.

Loading Network Project File

Single

INT WINAPI EasyLoadNetworkproject (LPCTSTR sDBName, DWORD dwSetOrAdd = TRUE);

Multi

INT WINAPI EasyLoadNetworkprojectM (HANDLE hProServer, LPCTSTR sDBName, DWORD dwSetOrAdd = TRUE);

<Function>

Loads the network poroject file designated by an argument.

<Return value>

Executed successfully: 0

Not executed successfully: Error code

9-16

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

<Arguments> sDBName .......... Designate the full path to the network project file.

dwSetOrAdd ..... Reserved (fixed to 1) hProServer ........ Pro-Server handle

Character String Conversion of Error Codes

BOOL WINAPI EasyLoadErrorMessage (INT iErrorCode, LPTSTR osErrorMessage);

<Function>

Converts error codes returned by Pro-Server’s various functions to error messages.

<Return value>

Other than 0: Executed successfully

0: Failed in character string conversion. (e.g. unused error code)

<Arguments> iErrorCode ........... Error code returned by Pro-Server’s functions.

osErrorMessage ... Pointer to the storage area for converted character strings.

(Secure the area more than 512 bytes.)

Reference

“Appendix Pro-Server with Pro-Studio for Windows Error Messages”

9-17

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

Reading SRAM Backup Data

Single

INT WINAPI EasyBackupDataRead(LPCTSTR sSaveFileName,LPCTSTR sNodeName,

INT BackupDataType,INT SaveMode);

Multi

INT WINAPI EasyBackupDataReadM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR sSaveFileName,

LPCTSTR sNodeName,INT BackupDataType,INT SaveMode);

<Function>

Reads SRAM data of GP/GLC, and stores in files on PCs.

<Return value>

Executed successfully: 0

Not executed successfully: Error code

<Arguments> sSaveFileName .... Pointer to the path name and file name(string)of the estination storage file sNodeName ......... Pointer to the node name(string)

BackupDataType .. Types of Readout Data

4

5

2

3

No.

0

1

8

9

6

7

10

11

12

13 or above

Type

Reserved

Filing Data

Logging data

Line data

Sampling data

Alarm block 1

Alarm history data, Alarm block 2

Alarm log data, Alarm block 3

Alarm block 4

Alarm block 5

Alarm block 6

Alarm block 7

Alarm block 8

Reserved

SaveMode ............ Saving Method

No.

0

1

Mode

Stores data as a new file.

Appends data to an existing file.

Note

If the file exists, deletes the existing contents and overwrites data.

If the file does not exist, creates a new file.

9-18

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

Backup Data’s Write Function

Single

INT WINAPI EasyBackupDataWrite(LPCTSTR sSourceFileName,LPCTSTR sNodeName,

INT BackupDataType);

Multi

INT WINAPI EasyBackupDataWriteM(HANDLE hProServer,LPCTSTR sSourceFileName,

LPCTSTR sNodeName,INT BackupDataType);

<Function>

Writes the designated binary file to SRAM within GP.

<Argument>

HProServerPro-Server handle sSourceFileName .... File path for the value to be written to the GP’s SRAM sNodeName ............ Node name of GP to be written to.(Node must be previously registered as a Pro-Server

Network Project.)

BackupDataType ..... Designates the type of write file.(Must be the EasyBackupDataType_FILING type[filing data]supported by Ver. 2.0)

<Return value>

Executed successfully: 0

Write Error: Error Code

Entry Node Status Read Function

Single

INT WINAPI GetNodeProperty (LPCTSTR sNodeName, DWORD dwTimeLimit, LPCTSTR GPType,

LPCTSTR SystemVersion, LPCTSTR ComVersion, LPCTSTR ECOMVersion)

Multi

INT WINAPI GetNodePropertyM (HANDLE hProServer, LPCTSTR sNodeName, DWORD dwTimeLimit,

LPCTSTR GPType, LPCTSTR SystemVersion, LPCTSTR ComVersion, LPCTSTR ECOMVersion)

<Function>

The connected GP status can be acquired. This can also be used to check a connection since the response timeout value can be a variable.

9-19

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

<Argument> hProServer .......... Pro-Server handle sNodeName ........ Node name of GP to be read from. (Node name must be previously registered as a Pro-

Server network project.) dwTimeLimit ...... Response timeout setup value (If you designate 0, this will be defaulted to 3000 msec.)

The setup range is from 1 through 2,147,483,647. (unit:msec)

Secure the area more than 32 bytes for each of followings.

GpType: GP model code

SystemVersion: GP system version

ComVersion: PLC protocol driver version

ECOMVersion: 2-Way Driver version

<Return value>

Executed successfully: 0

Not executed successfully: Error codes (refer to the separate table)

CF Card Status Read Function

Single

INT WINAPI EasyIsCFCard (LPCTSTR sNodeName)

Multi

INT WINAPI EasyIsCFCardM (HANDLE hProServer, LPCTSTR sNodeName)

<Function>

The CF Card connection status of the connect GP can be acquired.

<Argument> hProServer ........... Pro-Server handle sNodeName ......... Node name of GP to be read from. (Node name must be previously registered as a Pro-

Server network project.)

<Return value>

0x00000000 (0) -

0x10000001 (268435457) -

0x10000002 (268435458) -

0x10000004 (268435460) -

0x10000008 (268435464) -

Other error codes -

A usable CF Card is inserted.

No CF Card available.

Unsupported Device was detected by the CF Card’s driver.

CF Card’s driver has detected a card error.

CF Card not initialized.

Refer to separate Error Code chart.

9-20

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

CF Card File List Read Function (Arbitrary Folder Name)

INT WINAPI EasyGetListInCfCard (LPCTSTR sNodeName, LPCTSTR sDirectory, INT

*

pioCount,

LPCTSTR szSaveFileName);

<Function>

Outputs the file list in CF Card inserted to GP/GLC to the file given via a parameter. You can designate the file type using a parameter.

An error occurs because GP77R Series does not support this function.

<Arguments> sNodeName ...... Node name of GP to be read from.

sDirectory ......... Folder name to be acquired (upper case only).

pioCount ........... The number of files read.

szSaveFileName

............ Name of the file that directory information read is stored to. Data stored to array in the stEasyDirInfo format as many as designated by pioCount are stored as binary data.

Moreover, the filename and the file extension are stored as upper case characters only.

struct stEasyDirInfo {

BYTE bFileName [8+1];

BYTE bExt[3+1];

// Filename (ends with 0)

// File extension (ends with 0)

BYTE bDummy [3];

DWORD dwFileSize;

BYTE bFileTimeStamp [8+1];

BYTE bDummy2[3];

} ;

// Dummy

// File size

// File time stamp (ends with 0)

// Dummy2

<Return value>

Executed successfully: 0

Not executed successfully: Error code (refer to the separate table)

9-21

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

<Supplement>

As supplement of “bFileTimeStamp”, time and date are shown as hexadecimal character strings where upper

4bytes out of 8 bytes indicate time in MS-DOS and remaining lower 4 bytes indicate date also in MS-DOS.

The format of date and time in MS-DOS is as the following.

(Example : In the case of 20C42C22, 2C22 expressed as hexadecimal corresponds to date in MS-DOS, and

20C4 also expressed as hexadecimal corresponds to time in MS-DOS so that 20C42C22 indicates 2002/1/2

4:6:8.)

Designates date in MS-DOS. This date is packed as one 16 bits value according to the following format.

Bit

0 - 4

5 - 8

9 -15

Day (1 - 31)

Contents

Month (1=January, 2=February, ..., 12=December)

Year. However, it is expressed as past years since 1980.

The actual year can be obtained by adding 1980 on the value shown by these bits.

Designates time in MS-DOS. This time is packed as one 16 bits value according to the following format.

Bit

0 - 4

5 - 10

11 - 15

Contents

Value that seconds are divided by 2. (0 - 29)

Minute (0 - 59)

Hour (0 - 23 using 24 hours expression)

9-22

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

CF Card File List Read Function (Type Designation)

INT WINAPI EasyGetListInCard (LPCTSTR sNodeName, LPCTSTR sDirectory, INT

*

pioCount,

LPCTSTR szSaveFileName);

<Function>

Writes the file list in CF Card inserted to GP/GLC to the file designated via a parameter. The file list that can be read out is limited to those designated in “sDirectory”.

An error will occur if a GP77R Series unit is used with this function.

<Arguments> sNodeName ...... Node name of GP to be read from.

sDirectory ......... Directory name to be acquired (upper case only). Only following directories are supported.

LOG (Logging Data)

TREND (Trend Data)

ALARM (Alarm Data)

CAPTURE (Capture Data)

FILE (Filing Data) pioCount ........... The number of files read.

szSaveFileName

............ Name of the file that read-out directory information is stored to. The amount of data stored to array in the stEasyDirInfo format as many as designated by pioCount are stored as binary data. Moreover, the filename and the file extension are stored as upper case characters only.

struct stEasyDirInfo {

BYTE bFileName [8+1];

BYTE bExt[3+1];

BYTE bDummy [3];

// Filename (ends with 0)

// File extension (ends with 0)

// Dummy

DWORD dwFileSize;

BYTE bFileTimeStamp [8+1];

BYTE bDummy2[3];

} ;

// File size

// File time stamp (ends with 0)

// Dummy2

<Return value>

Executed successfully: 0

Not executed successfully: Error code (refer to the separate table)

9-23

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

CF Card File Read Function (Arbitrary File Name Designation)

INT WINAPI EasyFileReadInCfCard (LPCTSTR sNodeName, LPCTSTR sFolderName, LPCTSTR sFileName, LPCTSTR pWriteFileName, DWORD

*

podwFileSize);

<Function>

Reads the designated file from CF Card. Read out file can be arbitrarily (freely) designated. An error will occur if a GP77R Series unit is used with this function.

<Arguments> sNodeName ............. Node name of GP to be read from.

sFolderName ............ Name of folder to be read from CF Card. (Max. 32 char single-byte.) sFileName ................ Name of a file to be read from CF Card. (Max. 8.3 format string - ********.***) pWriteFileName ...... Name of the file to save a CF file read. (full path) podwFileSize ........... Size of a CF file read.

<Return value>

Executed successfully: 0

Not executed successfully: Error code (refer to the separate table)

9-24

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

CF Card File Read Function (Type Designation)

INT WINAPI EasyFileReadCard (LPCTSTR sNodeName, LPCTSTR pReadFileType, WORD, wReadFileNo, LPCTSTR pWriteFileName, DWORD

*

podwFileSize);

<Function>

Reads the designated file from CF Card. Read file can only be files designated in “ pReadFileType”.

An error occurs because GP77R Series does not support this function data.

<Arguments> sNodeName ............. Node name of GP to be read from.

pReadFileType ......... Type of a file to be read from CF Card.

wReadFileNo ........... No. of a file to be read from CF Card.

pWriteFileName ...... Name of the file to save a CF file read. (full path) podwFileSize ........... Size of a CF file read.

<Return value>

Executed successfully: 0

Not executed successfully: Error code (refer to the separate table)

<Supplement>

Following 17 file types are supported. You can read only files saved in the designated folder in CF Card.

The following table shows those types of file supported.

File Type

ZF

ZR

ZI

ZO

ZT

ZS

Z4 to Z8

Folder

\FILE

\FILE

\DATA

\DATA

\TREND

\TREND

\ALARM

File Type

ZL

ZG

ZH

ZA

ZC

CP

--

Folder

\LOG

\ALARM

\ALARM

\ALARM

\MRM

\CAPTURE

--

9-25

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

CF Card File Write Function (Arbitrary File Name Designation)

INT WINAPI EasyFileWriteInCfCard (LPCTSTR sNodeName, LPCTSTR pReadFileName, LPCTSTR sFolderName, LPCTSTR sFileName);

<Function>

Writes the designated file to the CF Card. Write file can be arbitrarily (freely) designated. An error will occur if a GP77R Series unit is used with this function.

<Arguments> sNodeName ............. Node name of GP to be written to.

pReadFileName ....... Name of file to be read from. (full path) sFolderName ............ Folder name used when writing the file to CF Card (Max. 32 char single-byte.) sFileName ................ Name of the file to be witten to CF Card. (Max. 8.3 format string - ********.***)

<Return value>

Executed successfully: 0

Not executed successfully: Error code (refer to the separate table)

CF Card File Write Function (Type Designation)

INT WINAPI EasyFileWriteCard (LPCSTR sNodeName, LPCTSTR pReadFileName, LPCTSTR pWriteFileType, WORD wWriteFileNo);

<Function>

Writes the designated file to CF Card. Write file can only be files designated in “ pWriteFileType”.

An error occurs because GP77R Series does not support this function.

<Arguments> sNodeName ............. Node name of GP to be written to.

pReadFileName ....... Filename of a write source to CF Card. (full path) pWriteFileType ........ Type of file to be written to CF Card. (Refer to the supplement of the CF Card file read function.) wWriteFileNo .......... No. of a file to be written to CF Card.

<Return value>

Executed successfully: 0

Not executed successfully: Error code (refer to the separate table)

9-26

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

CF Card File Delete Function (Arbitrary File Designation)

INT WINAPI EasyFileDeleteInCfCard (LPCTSTR sNodeName, LPCTSTR sFolderName, LPCTSTR sFileName);

<Function>

Deletes the designated file on the CF Card. Delete file can be arbitrarily (freely) designated. An error will occur if a GP77R Series unit is used with this function.

<Arguments> sNodeName ............. Node name of GP containing the data to be deleted.

sFolderName ............ Name of the folder used when deleting the CF Card file (Max. 32 char single-byte.) sFileName ................ Name of file to be deleted from CF Card. (Max. 8.3 format string - ********.***)

<Return value>

Executed successfully: 0

Not executed successfully: Error code (refer to the separate table)

CF Card File Delete Function (Type Designation)

INT WINAPI EasyFileDeleteCard (LPCTSTR sNodeName, LPCTSTR pDeleteFileType, WORD wDeleteFileNo)

<Function>

Deletes the designated file on the CF Card. Files deleted are limited to those designated by “ pDeleteFileType”. An error will occur if a GP77R Series unit is used with this function.

<Arguments> sNodeName ............. Node name of GP containing the data to be deleted.

pDeleteFileType ....... Designates the type of file to be deleted (refer to supplemental table) wDeleteFileNo ......... No. of a file to be deleted from CF Card.

<Return value>

Executed successfully: 0

Not executed successfully: Error code (refer to the separate table)

<Supplement>

If the file does not exist and this function is performed, no error will occur and it will be completed normally. Following 17 file types are supported.

File Type

ZF

ZR

ZI

ZO

ZT

ZS

Z4 to Z8

Folder

\FILE

\FILE

\DATA

\DATA

\TREND

\TREND

\ALARM

File Type

ZL

ZG

ZH

ZA

ZC

CP

--

Folder

\LOG

\ALARM

\ALARM

\ALARM

\MRM

\CAPTURE

--

9-27

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

CF Card File Name Change Function

INT WINAPI EasyFileRenameInCfCard (LPCTSTR sNodeName, LPCTSTR sFolderName, LPCTSTR sFileName, LPCTSTR sFileReName);

<Function>

Renames the designated file on the CF Card. An error will occur if a GP77R Series unit is used with this function.

<Arguments> sNodeName ............. Node name of GP containing the data to be written to.

sFolderName ............ Folder name of the CF Card file to be changed. (Max. 32 char.) sFileName ................ Name of the file to be changed. (Max. 8.3 format string - ********.***) sFileReName ........... File name used after name is changed. (Max. 8.3 format string - ********.***)

<Return value>

Executed successfully: 0

Not executed successfully: Error code (refer to the separate table)

CF Card Free Space Size Acquisition Function

INT WINAPI EasyGetCfFreeSpace (LPCTSTR sNodeName, INT

*

pioUnallocated);

<Function>

Acquires a free space size in CF Card connected to the designated entry node. If ECOM older than V4.1 is mounted on GP, an error occurs.

<Arguments> sNodeName ............. Node name of GP to be read from.

pioUnallocated ......... Fee space size in CF Card. (acquired in byte)

<Return value>

Executed successfully: 0

Not executed successfully: Error code (refer to the separate table)

9-28

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

GP Time DWORD Type Read Function

DWORD WINAPI EasyGetGPTime (LPCTSTR sNodeName, DWORD

*

podwTime); (for VC)

<Function>

Acquires the current time of the designated node as number (DWORD type). However, this function is effective from LS2048 which saves time in 6 words.

<Arguments> sNodeName ............. Node name to acquire data from. (You cannot designate Windows computer nodes.) podwTime ................. Acquired time (time in DWORD type (actually acquired in time_t type defined by ANSI))

<Return value>

Executed successfully: 0

Not executed successfully: Error code (refer to the separate table

GP Time VARIANT Type Read Function

DWORD WINAPI EasyGetGPTimeVariant (LPCTSTR sNodeName, LPVARIANT povTime); (for VB)

<Function>

Acquires the current time of the designated node as number (Variant type). However, this function is effective from LS2048 which saves time in 6 words.

<Arguments> sNodeName ............. Node name to acquire data from. (You cannot designate Windows computer nodes.) povTime ................... Acquired time (acquired time is in VARIANT type (internal process format is Date))

<Return value>

Executed successfully: 0

Not executed successfully: Error code (refer to the separate table)

GP Time STRING Type Read Function

DWORD WINAPI EasyGetGPTimeString (LPCTSTR sNodeName, LPCTSTR pFormat, LPTSTR posTime); (for VC)

<Function>

Acquires the current time of the designated node as character string (LPTSTR type). However, this function is effective from LS2048 which saves time in 6 words.

<Arguments> sNodeName ............. Node name to acquire data from. (You cannot designate Windows computer nodes.) pFormat .................... Format setup character string of time to be acquired as character string. The format designation code after the percentage sign (%) is converted as shown in the following supplement. Other characters will remain and be displayed as they are.

9-29

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function posTime ................... Time acquired as character string. (However, if the area more than the acquired character string length plus 1 (NULL) is not secured, unexpected memory area damage will occur. If not secured, actions are not guaranteed.)

<Return value>

Executed successfully: 0

Not executed successfully: Error code (refer to the separate table)

<Supplement>

The format designation code after the percentage sign (%) is converted as the following. Other characters will remain and be displayed as they are. (They are internally given to the argument used by the member

Format of the CTime class of MFC.) For example, if the actual time is 2002/1/2 12:34:56, the character string will be “2002_34 56” when designating “%Y_%M %S”.

Format Designation Code

%a

Folder

Abbreviation of day of the week (*2)

%A

Complete name of day of the week (*2)

%b

%B

Abbreviation of month (*2)

Complete name of month (*2)

%c

Day and time expression according to the locale.

%#c

%d

Long expression of day and time according to the locale.

Day expressed in decimal (*1)

%H

%I

Hour in 24 hours expression (00 - 23) (*1)

Hour in 12 hours expression (01 - 12) (*1)

%j

Days in decimal since the year beginning (001 - 366) (*1)

%m

%M

Month in decimal (01 - 12) (*1)

Minute in decimal (00 - 59) (*1)

%p

AM/PM of the current locale (*2)

%S

Second in decimal (00 - 59) (*1)

%U

Sequential number of the week in decimal. Sunday is regarded as the first day of the week (00 - 53). (*1)

%w

Day of the week in decimal. Sunday is regarded as 0 (0 - 6). (*1)

%W

Sequential number of the week in decimal. Monday is regarded as the first day of the week (00 - 53). (*1)

%x

%#x

%X

%y

%Y

Day according to the current locale.

Long expression of day according to the current locale

Time according to the current locale. (*2)

The last 2 digits of year in decimal (00 - 99) (*1)

%z, %Z

%%

Year in 4 digits in decimal (*1)

Name or abbreviation of the time zone. If the time zone is unknown, do not enter any characters. (*2)

Percent sign (*2)

*1 : If you add “#” before d, H, I, j, m, M, S, U, w, W, y or Y (e.g. %#d), leading zeros will be deleted if there are (e.g. 05 becomes 5.).

*2 : If you add “#” before a, A, b, B, p, X, z, Z or % (e.g. %#a), “#” will be ignored.

9-30

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

GP Time STRING VARIANT Type Read Function

DWORD WINAPI EasyGetGPTimeStringVariant (LPCTSTR sNodeName, LPCTSTR pFormat,

LPVARIANT povTime); (for VB)

<Function>

Acquires the current time of the designated node as character string (Variant Type). However, this function is effective from LS2048 which saves time in 6 words.

<Arguments> sNodeName ............. Node name to acquire data from. (You cannot designate Windows computer nodes.) pFormat .................... Format setup character string of time to be acquired as character string. The format designation code after the percentage sign (%) is converted as shown in the following supplement. Other characters will remain and be displayed as they are. (For details, refer to <Supplement> of “GP TIME STRING Type Read Function”.) povTime ................... Acquired time (acquired time is in VARIANT type (internal process format is Date))

<Return value>

Executed successfully: 0

Not executed successfully: Error code (refer to the separate table)

Simple DLL Initialization

INT WINAPI EasyInit();

<Function>

Initializes Simple DLL and declares the usage internally.

<Return value>

Executed successfully: 0

Not executed successfully: Error code(Refer to the attached table.)

For details, refer to “Precautions When Using Simple DLL in Multi-Thread Applications”. If you execute

EasyInit ( ) without starting Pro-Server, Pro-Server is automatically started.

9-31

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

Simple DLL Termination

INT WINAPI EasyTerm();

<Function>

Releases resource that Simple DLL holds.

<Return value>

Executed successfully: 0

Not executed successfully: Error code(Refer to the attached table.)

For details, refer to “Precautions When Using Simple DLL in Multi-Thread Applications”.

Even if you execute EasyTime ( ), Pro-Sever does not exit.

The Simple DLL function which exits Pro-Server is not supported.

Message Processing Suppression

Single

INT EasySetWaitType (DWORD dwMode)

Multi

INT EasySetWaitTypeM (HANDEL hProServerHandle, DWORD dwMode)

<Function>

If it takes time to process, most of Simple DLL functions process Windows messages within those functions, however, you can designate if you wish to suppress this Windows message processing.

If you suppress it, Windows messages are left in the message queue and will not be processed while executing functions.

As its result, you can avoid unexpected accident such as the double function call due to clicking icons while executing functions.

However, in this case, because all Windows message processing are suppressed in addition to that of the

“Icon is clicked” message, be careful that important message processing will not be preformed, either, such as redrawing of the timer or windows.

You can designate it per every Pro-Server handle if you suppress processing. The default is to execute processing.

<Return value>

Executed successfully: 0

Not executed successfully: Error code (refer to the separate table)

<Arguments>

HANDLE hProServerHandle .... Pro-Server handle to change the processing mode.

dwMode ... 1 for executing message processing.

2 for suppressing message processing.

9-32

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

Acquiring Message Processing Method

Single

INT EasyGetWaitType ( )

Multi

INT EasyGetWaitTypeM (HANDLE hProServerHandle)

<Function>

This function is to acquire which mode the message processing method is currently set to. In the case of multi-handle, the function returns the current mode per handle.

<Arguments>

HANDLE hProServerHandle ....... Handle to acquire the state.

<Return value>

1: Executes message processing.

2: Suppresses message processing.

9-33

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

9.1.4 Precautions When Using Function

Precautions When LPVARIANT Returns an Undefined Error at ProEasy.h Compilation by VC

When Visual C++ ver. 6 is used to compile Pro-SDK\VC\Public\ProEasy.h, or the header data copied to the clipboard via Pro-Studio’s (Programming extension], [VC Text], the LPVARIANT may return an undefined error. Since the LPVARIANT is defined within afxdisp.h, if the data is not included, an error will occur. To avoid this error to occur, you should define “#include<afxdisp.h>” in stdafx.h in a normal case.

GLC 32 Bit Device Bit Access Method

The GLC unit’s 32-bit addressing (integer variables, integer array variables) can access data in individual bit units.

Adding a single space and a suffix (descriptor). Xm to a variable name allows this type of bit unit access. Also, adding the suffix<n>+ single space to a variable name allows you to designate individual array elements.

Therefore, if you wish to access the Integer_Array’s n+1 element’s m+1 position bit, you would write

Integer_Array<n>_.Xm.

Ex. To access the Integer_Variable’s 7th position bit, you would write

Integer_Variables_.X6.

Ex. To access the Integer_Array’s 2nd element’s 30th position bit, you would write

Integer_Array<1>_.X29.

Precautions When Using Simple DLL in Multi-Thread Applications

All Simple DLL functions are synchronous (If a function is called once, the process will not return from a function until it is completed.).

Therefore, even if you access to more than one entry node, each access will be processed sequentially in the case of a single-thread program.

In the case of a multi-thread program, you can access to another node using another thread even while you access to a certain node using one thread.

Simple DLL supports multi-thread.

The following describes precautions when you build multi-thread programs.

1. Use multi-handle functions basically to multi-thread programs.

2. You need to acquire Pro-Server handle to use multi-handle functions. Acquire separate Pro-Serve handle per thread. Although you can acquire and use more than one Pro-Server handle within one thread, you may not use Pro-Server handle created by another thread. When you release Pro-Server handle, you should release it in the thread that you created the handle as well.

9-34

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

3. When using Simple DLL, you must call EasyInit () in the beginning and EasyTerm () at the end.

At this time, the thread to call EasyInit () must be same as that for EasyTerm ().

Most of Simple DLL functions automatically call EasyInit () internally if they are called before EasyInit

() is called.

Moreover, when applications compete, Simple DLL will also exit automatically, however, if EasyTerm () is not called until then, Simple DLL will automatically call EasyTerm () internally.

According to these functionalities, in the case of single-thread, you do not have to consider (program)

EasyInit () or EasyTerm ().

However, in the case of a multi-thread program, there are cases that the thread to call the Simple DLL function in the beginning is different from the last thread when an application exits, or when you do not know if they are same.

In such cases, you should insert EasyInit () and EasyTerm () in your program.

In most programs, the initially started thread (main thread) remains until the end, so insert EasyInit () in the beginning of the main thread and EasyTerm () at the end.

1. Execute EasyInit () and EasyTerm () once in one program, i.e. at the beginning and at the end of the main thread.

2. One or more Pro-Server handles should be created per thread and used only within the thread that each handle is created for. Furthermore, you should cancel the handle within the thread.

9-35

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

Processing Windows Messages

Most Windows programs are event driven programs which display dialogs or make sounds according to events such as “An icon is clicked.”, “A mouse is moved.”, “A key is pressed.” and so on.

When an event occurs, Windows sends the message indicating the event kind to an application.

An application recognizes an even occurrence by receiving the message and executes corresponding process.

In this manual, the part where a message is received from Windows in turn and breaks up to each process (for VB, it corresponds to DoEvents, and for VC, it is the part where GetMessage ( ) and DispatchMessage ( ) are executed) is called the message pump.

When you normally program in VC or in VB, the message pump is concealed in the VC or VB framework so that you do not particularly worry about it, however, if this message pump does not run properly, Windows applications become awkward.

For example, when a routine takes time to process a certain message and the process does not return for a while, because an application cannot receive an event occurred during that time from Windows, an application cannot process the event.

Example) Suppose that messages are send from Windows according to the order of Message1 and then Message2.

The message pump takes Message1 out and calls the subroutine for Message1. Then, after returning from the subroutine, it takes the next message (Message2) out and calls the subroutine for Message2.

Message1

Processing

Message1

Message2

Message

Pump

Message2

Processing

9-36

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

At this time, suppose that it takes a long time to process Message1.

Then, Message2 cannot be processed because the process cannot return to the message pump.

Message1

Message1

Processing

The process stop here.

Message

Pump

Message2

Message2

Processing

In such a case, force the message pump run. (Call DoEvents for VB and call GetMessage( ) and

DispatchMessage ( ) for VC.)

Message1

Message

Pump

Message1 Processing

Call the message pump since it takes a long time to process.

Continues processing and returns when it completed.

Message2

Message

Pump

Message2

Processing

The Windows application is the OS developed on the assumption that the application runs the message pump cleverly. Simple DLL functions run message pumps within themselves to avoid the thing described in the example for the process which takes a long time.

9-37

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

Prohibiting Function Double Call

Simple DLL functions prohibit to perform separate communication (double call) while they perform communication with certain partners (while calling Simple DLL functions). (It is possible using a multihandle function. For details, refer to the section about multi-handle functions.)

However, because Simple DLL functions run message pumps within themselves, applications will start when events occur.

If you call a function within the message process routine, the double call may occur. The following describes double call examples.

1. Double Call due to Pressing Two Buttons

Suppose that there are two buttons, A and B. If A is pressed, a device read function is called, and if B is pressed, a device write function is called.

In this case, if the B button is pressed while calling a device read function due to the A button pressed, a device write function is called. At that time, the function double call occurs and turned out to be an error.

Message

Pump

Processing

Routine for the A Button

Function

Call

The function calls the message pump because it takes time to process.

Read

Processing

Message

Pump

Processing

Routine for the B Button

Function

Call

Process

Completion

Write

Processing

Error return due to the function double call.

2. Double Call due to Timer

When a periodical process is executed in Windows program, the timer event is frequently used. If you are not careful enough in programming using the timer event, the function double call may occur.

Reads a device by calling a device read function once every second periodically, and displays data.

Calls a device write function when a certain button is pressed, and writes data to a device.

These programs cause errors at the following timing.

• When the timer event occurred for , and the button mentioned in was pressed while reading, and then the process started.

• When the timer event occurred while writing ( ), and reading is executed ( ).

9-38

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

Avoiding Function Double Call

The following describes how to avoid the function double call.

Improve the algorithm of the application to stop the function double call. For example:

1. Be sure to cancel the timer in the beginning of timer and button processing routines.

2. While process is executed due to a certain button pressed, ignore the event even if that button or another button is pressed.

Use the multi-handle function.

If Pro-Server handle differs, it does not cause the function double call.

Use the multi-handle function, and use separate handle to the program which includes the function double call possibility.

Do not process messages within functions.

Call EasySetWaitType ( ) using the argument 2, however, since messages other than those which cause the function double call will not be processed, applications may execute unexpected actions or may cause other problems.

Reading Character Strings in VB

There are following two methods to read character strings in VB.

When reading character strings using ReadDeviceStr in VB:

In this case, you must designate (fix) the size of the area to save character strings read in advance.

Public Sub Sample1 ()

Dim strData As String

*

10 ’ Correct designation method because it designates the size to read.

’Dim strData As String ’ Incorrect designation method because it does not designate the character

’ string size.

Dim lErr As Long lErr = ReadDeviceStr (“GP1”, “LS100”, strData, 10)

If lErr <> 0 Then

Else

MsgBox “Read Error = ” & lErr

MsgBox “Read String = ” & strData

End If

End Sub

9-39

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

When reading character strings using ReadDeviceVariant in VB:

If you do not designate the size of the area to save character strings read in advance, use the Variant type.

Public Sub Smaple2 ()

Dim lErr As Long

Dim vrData As Variant ’ Designate the Variant type to the area to save data read.

lErr = ReadDeviceVariant (“GP1”, “LS100”, vrData, 10, EASY_AppKind_Str)

If lErr <> 0 Then

Else

MsgBox “Read Error = ” & lErr

MsgBox “Read String = ” & vrData

End If

End Sub

Be careful that GP/GLC uses NULL characters to complete character strings. Therefore, if character strings acquired by the above method include NULL characters to complete character stirrings, you must shorten those.

The following shows the sample function to trim NULL characters.

Public Function TrimNull (strData As String) As String

Dim i As Integer i = InStr (1, strData, Chr$(0), vbBinaryCompare)

If 0 < i Then

Else

TrimNull = Left (strData, i - 1)

TrimNull = strData

End If

End Function

9-40

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

Details of Cache Read (Polling Time and Life Time)

Pro-Server has the feature internally to cache read data when it is requested to read a device by cache read.

If the read request is raised to the same device, Pro-Server returns cached data. Pro-Server can respond quickly because it does not read data every time.

If a device does not change at all, Pro-Server can always return cache data. If not, it is necessary to reflect device changes to cache data.

Therefore, Pro-Server automatically reads devices to cache according to a particular interval and updates cache data. The action is called polling and the interval is called a polling time.

Polling is automatically executed when cache read is executed, and polling for the device that the usage is completed stops automatically.

After a certain device was read, if any read requests are not given to the device for a certain period, Pro-

Server recognizes that the usage of the device is completed.

This period is called life time.

If any read requests are raised within life time, life time will be reset at that moment.

After life time passed, polling to the device stops automatically.

The figure on the next page shows Pro-Server’s behavior when a cache read request is given from an application via Simple DLL.

9-41

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

Pro-Server’s behavior when a cache read request is given from an application via

Simple DLL

Application Pro-Server PLC

Reads PLC data directly because cache data do not exist.

Cache

Data

Executes polling to

PLC according to polling time.

Returns cache data existing.

Cache data is deleted after life time passed.

When life time passed after the last read request is raised, polling stops automatically.

9-42

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

Designating Polling Time

Pro-Server decides polling time according to the following priority.

Designating polling time directly using Simple DLL or DDE:

Designate it as part of character string to the device designation part of Simple DLL or DDE. The format is as the following.

.<Polling Time>

<Polling Time> = Polling time value in ms

Example) When designating 20 seconds as polling time: lErr=ReadDeviceVariant (“GP1”, “D100 .20000”, Data, 1, EASY_AppKind_SignedWord)

Separate this with blank space after a device (or a symbol) and designated it in ms after “.”.

When a device is registered as a symbol:

The [Polling Time] value in the [Register Symbol] dialog is used.

When a device is not registered as a symbol and designating polling time without polling time designation:

The [DDE Polling Time] value in the [System Configuration] dialog is used.

9-43

9.1 Simple DLL (ProEasy.DLL) Function

Designating Life Time

Although Pro-Server calculates life time automatically from polling time, you can designate any desired values. In this case, designate time as part of character strings in the device designation part of Simple DLL or DDE. The format is as the following.

.L<Life Time>

<Life Time> = Life time value in ms

Example) When designating 20 seconds as life time: lErr=ReadDeviceVariant (“GP1”, “D100 .L20000”, Data, 1, EASY_AppKind_SignedWord)

Separate this with blank space after a device (or a symbol) and designated it in ms after “.L”.

When using a Visual Studio .NET environment

This example uses a Visual Basic.NET sample. For details, refer to 9.2.3 Using simple DLL functions with

Visual Basic .NET.

When using Visual C++.NET, the VCC++ sample can be compiled and run. However, when creating a new project, the method of designating an LIB file is different. For details 9.2.2 VC Function Help.

9-44

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

9.2

Examples of Simple DLL Function

Using read/write functions provided by Pro-Server allows you to read/write data from VB or VC applications.

This section describes the procedure to read/write designated symbols using the programming help feature.

Procedures are different between VP and VC applications. They’re described separately.

9.2.1 VB Feature Help

VBA: Declaration

1.

Click [VBA: Declare Function] on [Programming Support].

2.

The declaration is copied to the Clipboard.

9-45

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

3.

Start-up Microsoft Visual Basic, and then click [New Project] on [File] from the menu.

4.

Select [Standard EXE], and then click [OK].

5.

Click [Add Module] on [Project] of the Microsoft Visual Basic menu.

9-46

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

6.

Select [Standard Module] on the [New] tab, and then click [Open].

7.

Click [Paste] on [Edit] of the Microsoft Visual Basic menu to paste the declaration (the contents in the Clipboard) to the added standard module.

9-47

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

8.

The declaration will be pasted.

This completes function (read/write functions) declaration.

Operations from Step 1 through 8 mentioned above are common to both read and write.

For the subsequent part, each procedure is described separately because procedures are different between read and write.

Refer to Step 9 through 21 to create the [Read] application.

Refer to Step 22 through 33 to create the [Write] application.

9-48

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

Creating [Read] Application

9.

This section describes the application to read and display three data (16 bits signed) when clicking [Command1].

Displays three read data.

10. Click [Toolbox] on [View] of the Microsoft Visual Basic menu.

9-49

11. Select [ListBox], and then paste to [Form1].

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

ListBox

12. Select [CommandButton], and then paste to [Form1].

ComandButton

9-50

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

13. Select the symbol name that you wish to read among symbols registered on Pro-Studio

(Select the heading symbol to read from.).

14. Click [VBA: Read function] on [Programming Support] of the menu.

15. The read function will be copied into the Clipboard.

16. Double click [Command1] on [Form1] to paste the contents (read function) in the Clipboard between the Sub and the EndSub statements.

9-51

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

17. Declare the area to store read data. You should designate three or more area elements if the number of read data is three (The number of area elements is from 0 to 2 in this example).

However, the area type (Integer in this example) needs to be matched to the symbol data type to use.

18. Designate the header area to store read data (wData (0)), and also designate 3 as the number of read data.

19. Set three data read (wData(0), wData(1), wData(2)) in the ListBox one after another.

20. Click [Start] on [Run] of the Microsoft Visual Basic menu.

9-52

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

21. Click [Command1] to display three data form the symbol “_D40_WORD” in the ListBox.

9-53

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

Creating [Write] Application

22. This section describes the application to write three data (16 bits signed) read when clicking

[Command1].

Writes three data.

23. Select [TextBox], and then paste in [Form1]. Paste three [TextBox]s.

TextBox

9-54

24. Select [CommandButton], and then paste to [Form1].

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

CommandButton

25. Select the symbol name that you wish to write to among symbols registered on Pro-Studio

(Select the heading symbol to write to).

26. Click [VBA: Write function] on [Programming Support] of the menu.

9-55

27. The write function will be copied into the Clipboard.

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

28. Double click [Command1] on [Form1] to paste the contents (write function) in the Clipboard between the Sub and the EndSub statements.

29. Declare the area to store data to write. You should designate three or more area elements if the number of write data is three (The number of area elements is from 0 to 2 in this example).

However, the area type (Integer in this example) needs to be matched to the symbol data type to use.

30. Set entered data in [TextBox] to the area.

9-56

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

31. Designate the header area (wData (0)) where written data have been set. Also designate three as the number of write data.

32. Click [Start] on [Run] of the Microsoft Visual Basic menu.

33. After entering three data to write in [TextBox], click [Command1] to write three data form the symbol, “_D40_WORD”.

When using VB.NET, if you insert the declaration according to this procedure, an error will occur when executing it.

You cannot use VBA: Declaration directly because data sizes of Integer or

Long are different between VB.NET and Visual Basic.

VBA: Declaration is for Visual Basic or Basic for Application.

9-57

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

9.2.2 VC Function Help

This section describes how to create the dialog-based application example using MFC (Microsoft

Foundation Class).

VC: Declaration

1.

Start Microsoft Visual C++, and then click [New] on [File].

2.

Select [MFCAppWizard (exe)] in the [Projects] tab, enter [Project name] and [Location], and then click [OK].

This example uses “Sample” for [Project name] and “C:\Program Files\Pro-Server with Studio\Pro-

SDK\VC” for [Location].

9-58

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

3.

Select [Dialog based] in the “What type of application would you like to create?” field, and then click [Finish].

4.

Click [OK] to complete the project.

5.

Pro-Serer provides read/write functions as DLLs. You should designate the LIB file to use those DLLs.

Click [Setting] on [Project] of the Microsoft Visual C++ menu.

9-59

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

6.

Designate the LIB file using [Object/library modules] in the [Link] tab, and then click [OK].

“Pro-SDK\Vc\Public\ProEasy.lib” is designated in this example because the LIB file (ProEasy.lib) exists in “Pro-SDK\Vc\Public” under the folder where Pro-Server has been installed.

Designating LIB files via Visual C++ .NET

When designating LIB files using Microsoft Visual C++ .NET, right-click the project’s name within the [Solution Explorer] window (shown below), and select [Properties].

9-60

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

In the resulting Property Pages, select [Linker | Input]. Designate the LIB file

(ProEasy.lib) in the [Additional Dependencies] column. ProEasy.lib is located in the [Install] folder’s [Pro-SDK\Vc\Public] sub-folder.

(C:\Program Files\Pro-face\Pro-Server with Pro-Studio\Pro-

SDK\Vc\ProEasy.lib in the following figure.)

7.

You should install the header file (ProEasy.h) to use read/write functions provided by Pro-

Server. Click the [FileView] tab in the Microsoft Visual C++ [Workspace] window, and then double click the SampleDig.cpp file.

In this example, read/write functions are used in the SampleDig.cpp file.

9-61

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

8.

Add #include “Pro-SDK\Public\ProEasy.h” in the SampleDig.cpp file to complete the read/write function declaration.

Operations from step 1 through 8 mentioned above are common to both read and write.

For the subsequent part, each procedure is described separately because procedures are different between read and write.

Refer to step 9 through 32 to create the [Read] application.

Refer to step 33 through 51 to create the [Write] application.

9-62

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

Creating [Read] Application

9.

This section describes the application to read and display three data (16 bits signed) when clicking [Button1].

Displays three read data.

10. Click the [ResourceView] tab in the Microsoft Visual C++ [Workspace] window, and then double click [IDD_SAMPLE_DIALOG].

Select and delete [Static Text] in the center of the dialog.

9-63

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

11. Click [Customize] on [Tools] of the Microsoft Visual C++ menu.

12. Check [Controls] in the [Toolbars] tab, and then click [Close].

13. Select [ListBox], and then paste it in the dialog.

ListBox

9-64

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

14. Right-click the pasted [ListBox], and then select [Property]. After the [ListBox Properties] window appears, uncheck [Sort].

15. Click [ClassWizard] on [View] of the Microsoft Visual C++ menu.

16. Select the [Member Variables] tab, and then select “IDC_LIST1” in [Control ID].

9-65

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

17. Click [Add Variable...], and then enter “m_List” in [Member Variable name]. Select “Control” in

[Category], and then click [OK].

18. Make sure if the member variable has been added, and then click [OK].

19. Select [Button], and then paste it in the dialog.

Button

9-66

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

20. Select the symbol name that you wish to read among symbols registered on Pro-Server

(Select the heading symbol to read from.).

21. Click [VC: Read Function] on [Programming Support] of the menu.

22. The read function will be copied into the Clipboard.

9-67

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

23. Double click [Button1] pasted to [Dialog] of the Microsoft Visual C++ menu.

24. Click [OK].

25. Paste the contents of the Clipboard (read function) into the OnButton1 member function.

9-68

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

26. Declare the area to store read data. You should designate three or more area elements if the number of read data is three.

27. Designate the header area to store read data (wData(0)), and 3 as the number of read data.

You should also add a semicolon ( ; ) at the end of the read function.

28. Convert read data to CString type characters once to display three read data (wData(0), wData(1), wData(2)) in the ListBox.

9-69

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

29. Set three data read (wData(0), wData(1), wData(2)) in the ListBox one after another.

30. Click [Execute Smaple.exe] on [Build] of the Microsoft Visual C++ menu.

31. Click [Yes].

9-70

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

32. Click [Button1] to display three data from the symbol “_D40_WORD” in the ListBox.

9-71

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

Creating Write Application

33. This section describes the application to write three read data when clicking [Button1].

Execute the same operations, step 10 through 12, as in “Creating Read Application”.

Write three read data.

34. Select [EditBox], and then paste it in [Dialog]. You should paste three [EditBox]s.

EditBox

35. Click [Class Wizard] on [View] of the Microsoft Visual C++ menu.

9-72

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

36. Select “IDC_EDIT1” in [Control IDs] of the [Member Variables] tab, and then click [Add Variable...].

37. Enter “m_Edit1” in [Member variable name], select “short” in [Variable type], and then click [OK].

Repeat step 36 and 37 for other two [EditBox]s. However, you should designate their member variables as “m_Edit2” and “m_Edit3” respectively.

38. Click [OK].

9-73

39. Select [Button] and paste it to [Dialog].

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

Button

40. Select the symbol name to write to among symbols registered on Pro-Server (Select the heading symbol to write to.).

41. Click [VC: Write Function] on [Programming Support] of the menu.

9-74

42. The write function will be copied into the Clipboard.

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

43. Double click [Button1] pasted on [Dialog] of the Microsoft Visual C++ menu.

44. Click [OK].

9-75

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

45. Paste the contents of the Clipboard (write function) into the OnButton1 member function.

46. Declare the area to store write data. You should designate three or more area elements if the number of write data is three.

47. Set three write data entered into the EditBox to the area.

9-76

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

48. Designate the header area where write data have been set (wData(0)), and 3 as the number of read data. You should also add a semicolon ( ; ) at the end of the write function.

49. Click [Execute Smaple.exe] on [Build] of the Microsoft Visual C++ menu.

50. Click [Yes].

9-77

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

51. After entering three write data to [EditBox]s, click [Button1] to execute writing three data from the symbol “_D40_WORD”.

9-78

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

9.2.3 Using simple DLL functions with Visual Basic .NET

Visual Basic .NET differs from Visual Basic 6.0 regarding format specifications for Integers, etc. Therefore,

Pro-Studio’s [VBA: Declare Function] cannot be used. When using Visual Basic .NET, instead of [VBA:

Declare Function] be sure to use the ProEasy.vb file, located in the [Install] folder.

Structure of Pro-SDK

Included in the [Install] folder are the declaration file and sample program, to enable easy use of DLLs with

Visual Basic .NET.

The diagram below shows the structure of Visual Basic .NET related files in the [Install] folder:

Pro-SDK\VB.NET\

\API\

ProEasy.vb

\EasySmplVBDotNet\

\SampleMVBDotNet\

Declaration file

Sample Program

(Visual Basic .NET)

Sample Program

(Visual Basic .NET)

Example Visual Basic .NET Project

1.

Start up Microsoft Visual Studio .NET, and select the [File | New | Project] menu item.

9-79

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

2.

Select [Visual Basic Projects] for the [Project Types], and [Windows Application] for the

[Templates].

Declare Function

3.

Copy the [Pro-SDK\VB.NET\API\ProEasy.vb] file from Pro-Server with ProStudio’s [Install] folder to the new project.

4.

To add the copied ProEasy.vb file to the project, open Visual Basic .NET and select [Project |

Add Existing Item].

9-80

5.

Select [ProEasy.vb], and click [Open].

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

6.

Declare Function is now added to the project and Function declaration is complete.

9-81

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

Creating the Device Access Section – Example

7.

The application to be created has the following features – clicking the [Write] button writes signed 16-bit data, and clicking the [Read] button reads signed 16-bit data.

write value read value

8.

Select the [View | Toolbox] menu item.

9.

When the Toolbox appears, click [Windows Forms].

9-82

10. Place two Buttons and two TextBoxes on [Form1].

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

11. Right-click on the Buttons and TextBoxes, and select [Properties]. Enter “Write” for Button1’s

[Text] property, and “Read” for Button2’s [Text] property. Delete TextBox1 and TextBox2’s default [Text] property values. Set TextBox2’s [ReadOnly] property to [True].

9-83

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

12. Double-click Form1’s [Write] button (Button1). Enter the code for 16-bit device write

(WriteDevice16) between the Sub and End Sub statements.

Here, the TextBox value is converted to a numeric value. The data will be written into a device designated by [PC] node’s [_LS0100_WORD] symbol.

13. Double-click Form1’s [Read] button (Button2). Enter the code for 16-bit device read

(ReadDevice16) between the Sub and End Sub statements.

The data stored in the device designated by [PC] node’s [_LS0100_WORD] is read and displayed in TextBox2.

This completes the program.

9-84

9.2 Examples of Simple DLL Function

Executing the Program

14. Before executing this program, start up Pro-Studio and create and load the NPJ file where

[PC] is registered as the node and [_LS0100_WORD] is registered as the symbol.

15. To run the program, start up Visual Basic .NET, and select the [Debug | Start] menu item.

16. Entering the value in TextBox1 and clicking [Write] will write the value to the device. Clicking

[Read] will read the current value from the device and display it in TextBox2.

9-85

10

OPC Server

This chapter describes OPC server for Pro-Server.

10.1 OPC Server

10.2 Connecting from an OPC Client

10.1 OPC Server

OPC Ser ver

Installing the Pro-Server OPC Server allows you to use applications which contain the OPC Client feature(ex. Intellution’s iFIX, etc.).

· The OPC I/F functions like a DLL to the OPC Client(In-Process Server)

· EXE format is used for OPC I/F for an OPC Client existing in the same PC(Local Server)

· EXE format is used for the OPC I/F for an OPC Client existing in a remote PC(Remote Server)

Read/Write Functions

The Read/Write functions can be used either sychronously or asynchronously. The Read function can use either CACHE or DEVICE, and the Write function can use only DEVICE.

Synchronous

This method will require other processing to wait while the OPC Client is either reading or writing data to/ from the OPC Server.

Asynchronous

This method utilizes a CALLBACK to ackowlege to the Client the reception and completion of a Client’s read/write requests. This allows the OPC Client to perform other processing while waiting for the

CALLBACK notice.

CACHE

CACHE means the storage and handling method used for processing requests (collected periodically from the Clients) in the OPC Server. With Pro-Server, this means the polling tool’s internal data. This method, while it allows the returning of data at high speed to a Client, does not allow Real-Time processing.

DEVICE

Device data refers to handling of data from the final target (PLC). Current target data can be provided in real time, however, the response to that data is usually slower than the CACHE method.

OPC Server’s Operating Environment

OS Requirement

(Japanese or English)

Hard disk capacity

Required memory

Windows XP

Windows NT

Windows 2000

100MB or more

64MB or more

• OPC cannot be used on Windows 98, Windows 98 SE or Windows Me.

• When using Windows XP, the security level should be set to the same level as

Windows 2000. For setup procedures, refer to Appendix 6 Changing Windows

XP Security Level.

10-2

10.1 OPC Server

The following data explains the settings required when using the OPC Server. These settings should be entered in each of the OPC Clients used.

ItemID

The ItemID format is as follows:

ItemID = “XXX:DDDDD,SIG(NUMCHAR),SCL,SCH,EGUL,EGUH”

• XXX

• DDDDD

• SIG

Node name to be accessed

Symbol name to be accessed or applicable PLC’s device address

Signal condition (Can be omitted. When omitted, this becomes “NONE”)

Corresponding signal condition type: LIN, BCD, and SQRT

•NUMCHAR When the Item’s data type is set to VT_BSTR, the NUMCHAR value is used to place a character string in the position designated by the SCL value. Using VT_BSTR will automatically disable all options after SCL. Designate the character string using byte values.

• SCL

• SCH

• EGUL

• EGUH

The default value is 40 bytes.

Lower limit value before scale conversion(Can be omitted. When omitted, this becomes “0”)

Upper limit value before scale conversion(Can be omitted. When omitted, this becomes

“65535”)

EGU’s lower limit value(Can be omitted. When omitted, this becomes “0”)

EGU’s upper limit value(Can be omitted. When omitted, this becomes “65535”)

When the data type is set to VT_BSTR, designate the number of characters(NUMCHAR)for SIG as the value of bytes. In that case, optional items(values)after SIG will become ineffective. The default value is 40 bytes.

Ex.)

When converting D100(from 0 to 4096)of PLC connected to GP1(node name)to LIN(0 to 100)and accessing:

ItemID = “GP1:D100,LIN,0,4096,0,100”

Program ID

The accompanying OPC server’s Program ID is as follows:

“DIGITAL.OPCPRO.1”

Since CLSID is automatically registered to the registry at program installation, use this Program ID to perform the connection.

10-3

10.1 OPC Server

Initialization File

You can change initial values by editing the OPCPRO.INI file. The contents of the OPCPRO.INI file is as the following. Values are initial values.

[Server]

Server_MAX=10

Group_MAX=10

(Number of servers.)

(Number of servers.)

Item_MAX=100 (Number of items.)

InproSvr_ScanRate=250 (Scan interval for the In-Proc server unit:ms)

LocalSvr_ScanRate=500 (Scan interval for the Local server unit:ms)

[Client]

CharacterStringCode=0

ItemID_Separator=.:!

(Character string format 0:UNICODE, 1:muti-bytes)

(Designating the separator for ItemIDs)

Data Type

The following describes VARIANT data types supported by attached OPC server.

For the I/O driver, all analog data are internally process by being converted to 4 bytes real numbers.

Therefore, VT_I2, VT_I4, VT_U12, VT_U14 and VT_R8 are converted to VT_R4.

• VT_I4 4 bytes signed integer

• VT_I2 2 bytes signed integer

• VT_UI2

• VT_UI4

• VT_R4

2 bytes unsigned integer

4 bytes unsigned integer

4 bytes real

• VT_R8 8 bytes real

• VT_BSTR character string

• VT_BOOL BOOL

10-4

10.1 OPC Server

Interface

Interfaces that this software’s OPC server supports are as follows:

Object

OPCServer

OPCGroup

IEnumOPCItemAttributes

IEnumString

IEnumUnknown

Interface

IOPCServer

IOPCServerPublicGroups

(Optional)

IOPCBrowsServerAddressSpace

(Optional)

IPersistFile

(Optional)

IOPCItemProperties

IOPCGroupStateMgt

IOPCPublicGroupsStateMgt

(Optional)

IOPCSyncIO

IOPCAsyncIO

(Optional)

IOPCAsyncIO2

IOPCItemMgt

IDataObject

(Optional)

IConnectionPointContainer

IConnectionPoint

IEnumOPCItemAttributes

IEnumString

IEnumUnknown

Method

AddGroup

GetErrorString

GetGroupByName

GetStatus

RemoveGroup

CreateGroupEnumerator

GetPublicGroupByName

RemovePublicGroup

QueryOrganization

ChangeBrowsePosition

BrowseOPCItemIDs

GetItemID

BrowseAccessPaths

IsDirty

Load

Save

SaveComplated

GetCurFile

QueryAvailableItemProperties

GetItemProperties

LookupItemID

GetState

SetState

SetName

CloneGroup

GetState

MoveToPublic

Read

Write

Read

Write

Refresh

Cancel

Read

Write

Refresh

Cancel2

SetEnable

GetEnable

AddItems

ValidateItems

RemoveItems

SetActiveState

SetClientHandles

SetDatatypes

CreateEnumerator

Dadvise

Dunadvise

EnumConnectionPoints

FindConnectionPoints

GetConnectionInterface

GetConnectionPointContainer

Advise

Unadvise

EnumConnections

Next

Skip

Reset

Clone

Next

Skip

Reset

Clone

Next

Skip

Reset

Clone

Status x x x x x x x x x x x

Remaek

Supports only Flat

Always returns an error due to supporting only Flat

Supports only Flat

:Supported x :Not supported

10-5

10.2 Connecting from an OPC Client

Connecting fr om an OPC Client

[Server Items]

• Use the OPC Client program’s Server designation to designate the OPC server’s unique program ID as the program ID. When using the OPC server for Pro-Server, enter “digital.opcpro.1”.

• Next, designate the server type. If an In-Process server is used, enter “in process”, if a Local server is used, enter “local”, and if a Remote server isused, enter “remote”.

• If “remote” is entered as the server type, enter the PC name or IP address (***.***.***.***) of the computer used for the OPC server.

[Group Items]

• In the OPC Client program’s group section, the OPC server’s group object designation is performed.

The OPC server supports read/write in group units.

• The group name can be any text string, however, please be sure the name used is unique and not already in use. Even if the name is abbreviated, the OPC server will arbitrarily allocate a group name.

• Readout of data can be performed synchronously or asynchronously. If synchronous is used, the OPC client must wait until the “return” is received from the OPC server. If asynchronous is used, since the

OPC server will use a callback to inform of completion, the OPC client does not need to wait for a response.

• If asynchronous is used, the connection method must be selected. With asynchronous communication,

OPC DA (Data Access) Ver. 1.0 standard IDataObject I/F and OPC DA Ver. 2.0 standard

IConnectionPoints I/F are available. Depending on the OPC client, there are cases where only one of the I/F methodds is supported, so be sure to check the type of I/F supported when making this selection.

[Item-ID]

• This performs the OPC Server’s Item-ID allocation. Designate the Item-ID.

When using OPC Server for Pro-Server, enter the data as “Node:PLC device (or symbol name).

(option)”. The option section can be abbreviated. For detailed option information, refer to the OPCPRO

Help feature’s “Item-ID Settings” section. An example is. “test:tag1”. Entering this setting means that a participating node will use “test” to access the symbol “tag1”. The option can be abbreviated.

• When using OPC Server for Pro-Server, the feature “access path” is not supported by OPC Server and no setting is required.

• Enter “VARIANT” for the “Data Type”. Since certain OPC Servers do not support VARIANT, be sure to confirm this setting before entering. This data, for example, can be used for the 1 byte signed data type.

After entering and registering the above items, teh OPC Client will connect to the OPC Server and begin collecting data.

10-6

Appendices

A.1

DDE Function Details

A.2

Error Messages

A.3

Scale Conversion using Excel

A.4

GP Ethernet Settings

A.5

Optimizing Communication Speed

A.6

Changing Windows XP Security Level

A.1 DDE Function Details

The Pro-Server software contains the DDE server function and can therefore exchange data with applications that support the DDE client function.

A.1.1 DDE Address

Sending/receiving data to/from the DDE server is accomplished by specifying an address that consists of three components; the application name, the topic name, and the item name.

Address components required for connecting to a DDE server

Application Name...........The name of the DDE server application. To have access to Pro-Server data, use the name “PROSERVR”.

Topic Name ....................The name of the data group in the DDE server. In Pro-Server, specify the node name of the GP on the network.

Item Name .....................The actual data name used in the data group on the DDE server. In Pro-Server, specify the device address of the PLC connected to the GP. You can use the symbol name defined in Pro-Studio for this name.

Address example

=PROSERVR|GP’s Node Name!Symbol Name

The actual address of the PLC can be used.

The IP address itself can be used.

Example:

To read the data stored in address D100 of a Mitsubishi PLC, which is connected to a GP running the

Mitsubishi protocol and with an IP address of 160.187.2.101, enter the following data:

=PROSERVR|’ 160.187.2.101’!’ D100’

When creating names, do not use cell names and an identifier character.

A-2

A.1 DDE Function Details

A.1.2 Device Address Options

If you use symbol names defined in Pro-Studio, the data type and the sampling frequency for the symbols will be set automatically. However, when the device address is specified directly, you can specify the data type and the sampling frequency as options.

Available Data Types

The available data types are as follows.

Contents

Data Type

Data Format Value

Bit Data

Unsigned Word(Default)

Signed Word

HEX Word

BCD Word

.BIT

.WORD

.+WORD

.HEX

.BCD

.DWORD

0 or 1

0 to 65,535

-32,768 to 32,767

0000 to FFFF

0 to 9,999

0 to 4,294,967,295

Unsigned Long Word

Signed Long Word

HEX Long Word

BCD Long Word

Float

.+DWORD

.HEXDWORD

.BCDDWORD

.FLOAT

-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647

00000000 to FFFFFFFF

0 to 99,999,999

-9.9E+16 to 9.9E+16

String(default length = 1)

String

.STRING.

* length

*

1

*

1 If the data type is “String”, the data length is the maximum number of characters. If Null

Data is included, the characters up to that point will be sent/received as data.

Polling Time

.Polling Time: Polling Time is designated in ms units.

Device Designation Example

Here, the Device Address D100 is BCD data and the sampling frequency is 500 ms.

=PROSERVR|GP Node Name!’ D100 .BCD .500’

When designating the data type or polling time, be sure to put a space ( ) in front of the period (.).

A-3

A.2 Error Messages

Err or Messa g es

A.2.1 Pro-Server with Pro-Studio for Windows Error Messages

This section describes Pro-Server with Pro-Studio’s error messages.

The error codes and error messages will be displayed on the personal computer where Pro-Server is currently operating. In addition, these error codes will be used when the simple DLL completes abnormally.

“%s” indicates character strings, and “%??x” indicates hexadecimal values.

9362

9363

9364

9365

9366

9367

9368

9369

9370

9354

9355

9356

9357

9358

9359

9360

9361

9344

9345

9346

9347

9348

9349

9350

9351

9352

9353

Error Code

Decimal

9300

Hex.

2454h

9301

.

.

9329

2455h

.

.

2471h

9330

9331

9332

9333

9334

.

.

9339

9340

9341

9342

9343

2472h

2473h

2474h

2475h

2476h

.

.

247Bh

247Ch

247Dh

247Eh

247Fh

2480h

2481h

2482h

2483h

2484h

2485h

2486h

2487h

2488h

2489h

248Ah

248Bh

248Ch

248Dh

248Eh

248Fh

2490h

2491h

2492h

2493h

2494h

2495h

2496h

2497h

2498h

2499h

249Ah

Cannot find network project file.

Meaning

Reserved

Cannot execute the command because resources are insufficient. Terminated program.

The system resource was dead-locked. Terminated program.

System error

Cannot execute the command because program versions do not match.

Reserved

An error occurred when accessing the <%s> file.

Pro-Server is being used by too many applications.

OS resources are insufficient (insufficient memory).

The set connector is used by another application.

Pro-Server has not been started. Could not reference data.

Pro-Server has been terminated. Could not reference data.

Cannot continue - Pro-Server has been terminated.

Cannot continue - Pro-Server has been terminated.

Could not start Pro-Server.

Could not start Pro-Studio.

Unsupported command. Cannot continue.

Failed in loading the network project file.

The entered node name has already been registered.

The entered node name has not been registered.

Backup data type specified is not supported.

Failed to writing to the file.

Could not create a file to store the SRAM backup data.

The node name entered has not been registered.

Pro-Server is already operating. Cannot start two copies.

Reserved

‘%s’has not been entered.

0 cannot be entered in ‘%s’.

‘%s’should be: “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” format; where xxx is a value between 0 and 255.

An invalid value has been entered in ‘%s’.

A character unavailable for ‘%s’ is involved.

‘%s’has not been entered yet.

Cannot start a new process until the process result is returned from the server.

Cannot terminate the application while waiting for the process result.

Read permission required to execute this command. Log on to the network again.

Write permission required to execute this command. Log on to the network again.

Administrator permission required to execute this command. Log on to the network again.

A-4

A.2 Error Messages

9405

9406

9407

9408

9409

9410

9411

9412

9413

9414

9415

9423

9424

9425

9426

9427

9428

9429

:

9449

9450

9451

9452

9416

9417

9418

9419

9420

9421

9422

9391

9392

9393

9394

9395

9396

9397

9398

9399

9400

9401

9402

9403

9404

Decimal

9371

9372

:

9375

9376

9377

:

9389

Error Code

Hex.

249Bh

249Ch

:

249Fh

24A0h

24A1h

:

24ADh

9390

Meaning

The specified number is not registered.

Reserved

Cannot read the file (Core.ID)

Reserved

24AEh

24BDh

24BEh

24BFh

24C0h

24C1h

24C2h

24C3h

24C4h

24C5h

24C6h

24C7h

24C8h

24C9h

24CAh

24CBh

24CCh

24CDh

24CEh

24CFh

24D0h

24D1h

24D2h

24D3h

24D4h

24D5h

:

24E9h

24EAh

24EBh

24ECh

24AFh

24B0h

24B1h

24B2h

24B3h

24B4h

24B5h

24B6h

24B7h

24B8h

24B9h

24BAh

24BBh

24BCh

“Mode of Appointed handle is EASY_TB_STATUS_NOW or

EASY_TB_STATUS_LAST_READ. Please execute after changeing its mode to EASY_TB_STATUS_PAST or EASY_TB_STATUS_INDEX.”

“Unable to open the designated LS Area”

“Designated LS Area is not open”

“Failed to aquire CF Card’s File List”

“Failed to read CF Card’s file(s)”

“Failed to write CF Card’s file(s)”

“CF Card is not inserted”

“CF Card is not initialized”

“CF Card is damaged”

“Unable to access the designated file”

The function of Pro-Easy.DLL was doubly called up.

The specified access handle for Pro-Server is not effective.

Pro-Server has stopped and can not perform processing.

The error occurred in the function of OLE. Data cannot be converted.

The effective data for the specified data-type variant does not exist in the original data, or is not enough.

Original data and destination data types cannot be converted by data-type variant.

The specified argument is not enabled.

Can not create the time bar.

The symbol name is not registered.

Public memory of provide sheet could not open.

The specified time bar has already been locked.

The specified handle has already been linked.

The specified handle is not linked.

The specified handle is not linked to the database

Specified handle is locked or played, Please excute after clearing to its status.

Designate the internal format of the argument’s Variant as either “date” type, or comatible with “date”.

The specified time is out of the valid range.

The invalid argument has been set.

Database of appinted handle is closed.

Database access error.

INI file (‘%s’) in the action contents cannot be opened.

‘%s’ of INI file (‘%s’) in the action contents cannot be analyzed.

Action ‘%s’ uses action contents not yet installed in the network project.

There are too many actions to register.

The specified action has already been registered.

The action contents which action ‘%s’ uses cannot be started.

The designated action is not registered.

An error occurred on the Active-X IF.

The designated action has been registered in the registry.

Reserved

The node name or symbol name is not specified.

The node name is not specified.

The data type setting is not valid.

A-5

A.2 Error Messages

9460

9461

9462

9463

9464

:

9469

9470

9471

9472

9473

9474

Error Code

Decimal

9453

Hex.

24EDh

9454

9455

9456

9457

9458

9459

24EEh

24EFh

24F0h

24F1h

24F2h

24F3h

24F4h

24F5h

24F6h

24F7h

24F8h

:

24FDh

24FEh

24FFh

2500h

2501h

2502h

2503h

2504h

2505h

2506h

2507h

2508h

2527h

2528h

2529h

252Ah

252Bh

252Ch

:

2557h

2558h

2559h

255Ah

255Bh

255Ch

255Dh

255Eh

255Fh

2560h

2561h

2562h

2563h

2564h

2509h

250Ah

250Bh

:

251Bh

251Ch

251Dh

251Eh

251Fh

2520h

2521h

2522h

2523h

2524h

2525h

2526h

9501

9502

9503

9504

9505

9506

9507

9508

9509

9510

9511

9512

9475

9476

9477

9478

9479

9480

9481

9482

9483

:

9499

9500

9513

9514

9515

9516

:

9559

9560

9561

9562

9563

9564

9565

9566

9567

9568

9569

9570

9571

9572

The node name and symbol is not delimited with ‘!’.

The symbol name has not been registered or it is not a valid device address.

Cannot continue the process - no valid device is specified.

Cannot make word-access to 32-bit devices.

The address is out of the valid range.

The No. of points setting is invalid.

The No. of points setting is 0 or exceeds the setting range.

Cannot convert the set symbol into a device address.

A value input error occurred. Enter a correct value.

The specified lifetime is invalid.

The designated bit location is incorrect.

Reserved

Unable to connect to designated Node

Node is a Windows PC. Unable to perform processing.

Failed to save captured screen data as JPEG file

Screen Capture is not supported

Capture Approval Flag is not ON

Failed to aquire CF Card free space data

Data Transfer is not supported

ProNet.dll has not been installed properly

Unable to perform due to the 2-Way Driver’s version not being 4.50 or higher

Reserved

Failed to delete CF Card’s file

Failed to change CF Card’s internal file

File exceeds 256 characters - reduce number of characters

Reserved

Meaning

Pro-Server schedule management thread initialization error

Pro-Server LAN management thread initialization error

Pro-Server timer management thread initialization error

Pro-Server DDE control thread initialization error

Pro-Server API control thread initialization error

Pro-Server API parameter error

Response time out

Pro-Server failed in initializing the LAN.

No data

Invalid device

Invalid address

The address is out of the valid range.

Data type error

Transmission message error

Cannot initialize Pro-Server cache function.

Cannot load the network project because the database is used.

Reserved

DLL load error.

Cannot find a function in DLL.

System error can be considered if this occurs.

The designated property ID is not defined.

Value conversion error. Incorrect characters as numbers are designated.

Too many characters.

The number is too large.

Cannot start COMM.

Cannot start GJ.

Cannot open the %s file.

File read error.

File write error.

No tags exist. (No parameter class declarations exist.)

A-6

A.2 Error Messages

Error Code

Decimali Hex.

9573

9574

2565h

2566h

9575

9576

9577

9578

9579

9580

9581

9582

2567h

2568h

2569h

256Ah

256Bh

256Ch

256Dh

256Eh

9583

256Fh

9584

9585

9586

9587

9588

9589

9590

9591

9592

9593

9594

9595

9596

:

9599

9600

9601

:

9619

2570h

2571h

2572h

2573h

2574h

2575h

2576h

2577h

2578h

2579h

257Ah

257Bh

257Ch

:

257Fh

2580h

2581h

:

2593h

9620

9621

:

9639

2594h

2595h

:

25A7h

Meaning

No end tags exist. (No parameter class declarations exist.)

Found the unexpected end tag.

Signatures do not match.

Unsupported parameter.

Reached the file end.

The incorrect structure.

Cannot continue the process due to a memory lack.

Cannot analyze the device name.

DB name is not designated.

Cannot access to DB.

Cannot edit DB because it is locked (edited) by another program (e.g. Data

View).

Either the node name or the device name is not designated.

Cannot use DB because it has been closed. (DB in use is automatically closed once when NPJ is saved/loaded.)

The database may be broken.

Data not saved.

Cannot find data at the designated time.

No polling setups exist.

The database has not been opened. (Or it has already been closed.)

Already polling start.

Old data will be overwritten, isteadd of newest data.

Delete recode.

Exceeds designated file size.

Designated file number does not exist

Reserved

Cannot continue the process due to a resource lack in GP.

Reserved

The network project item has been registered redundantly. (The network project file has been broken.)

Reserved

9640 25A8h

25A9h

25AAh

:

25BBh

25BCh

25BDh

25BEh

:

25C5h

25C6h

25C7h

:

25E3h

25E4h

25E5h

:

25EDh

The Provider information data that is not registered in the network project file were sent from other node. (Network projects differ between the

Provider and the Receiver nodes.)

Either that the device write failed at the Receiver node or that no partner nodes exist while providing data.

9641

9670

9671

:

9699

9700

9701

:

9709

9642

:

9659

9660

9661

9662

:

9669

Reserved

Data Read failed.

Invalid access range of the read device.

Reserved

It is an access range wrong point by the write of device.

Reserved

Received the first trigger establish command for non-existing provider information.

Reserved

For information about 2580h, 25A8h, 25A9h, refer to “2-Way Driver Error Messages and Syslog Features”.

A-7

A.2 Error Messages

Error Code

260Fh

2610h

2611h

:

2615h

2616h

2617h

2618h

2619h

:

2633h

2634h

2635h

2636h

2637h

Hex.

25EEh

25EFh

:

2601h

2602h

2603h

2604h

2605h

2606h

2607h

:

260Bh

260Ch

260Dh

260Eh

2650h

2651h

2652h

2653h

2654h

2655h

2656h

2657h

2658h

2659h

:

263Dh

263Eh

2648h

2649h

264Ah

264Bh

264Ch

264Dh

264Eh

264Fh

:

9789

9790

9800

9801

9802

9803

9804

9805

9806

9807

9750

9751

9752

9753

:

9779

9780

9781

9782

9783

9808

9809

9810

9811

9812

9813

9814

9815

9816

9817

Decimal

9710

9711

:

9729

9730

9731

9732

9733

9734

9735

:

9739

9740

9741

9742

9743

9744

9745

:

9749

Meaning

Received the second trigger establish command for non-existing provider information.

Reserved

The GP is busy sending screen data or saving SRAM backup data to another PC.

An error occurred in reading the SRAM backup data. (The item ID differs from the previous ID.)

An error occurred in reading the SRAM backup data. (The data type differs from the previous type.)

An error occurred in reading the SRAM backup data. (The block No. differs from the previous No.)

SRAM backup data read error. (The requested data amount is 0 or differs from the previous amount.)

Reserved

The GP is busy sending screen data or saving SRAM backup data to another PC.

An error occurred in reading the SRAM backup data. (The item ID differs from the previous ID.)

An error occurred in reading the SRAM backup data. (The data type differs from the previous type.)

An error occurred in reading the SRAM backup data. (The block No. differs from the previous No.)

SRAM backup data read error. (The requested data amount is 0 or differs from the previous amount.)

Reserved

CF command error.

CF Access error

No CF card unit.

Reserved

Transmission error occurred with PLC during data write. (Code:%02x:%04x)

The designated SRAM backup data is not in the GP.

The GP’s SRAM backup data is incorrect. (Code:%04x)

Reserved

No remote access right (not connected remotely)

Parameter error.

Data count is over.

File create error.

EXCEL sheet create error.

Write file error.

File open error.

Read only file.

Print out error.

Save folder access error.

Reserved

Unable to find message table file.

Unable to open message table file.

Unable to find designated sheet in message table file.

Message table is incorrect.

No equivalent enabled code.

Error occurred during POP confirmation. For details see the Log Viewer.

Unable to send mail. For details see the Log Viewer.

Unable to send portion of mail. For details see the Log Viewer.

A-8

A.2 Error Messages

Error Code

Decimal

9818

9819

9820

Hex.

265Ah

265Bh

265Ch

9821

9822

265Dh

265Eh

9823

9824

9825

265Fh

2660h

2661h

9826

9827

9828

9829

2662h

2663h

2664h

2665h

:

9839

9840

9841

:

266Fh

2670h

2671h

9842

9843

9844

9845

2672h

2673h

2674h

2675h

9846

9847

9848

9849

2676h

2677h

2678h

2679h

9850

9851

9852

9853

267Ah

267Bh

267Ch

9854

9855

9856

9857

267Dh

267Eh

267Fh

2680h

9858

9859

9860

9861

2681h

2682h

2683h

2684h

9862

9863

9864

9865

2685h

2686h

2687h

2688h

9866

9870

9871

9872

2689h

268Ah

268Eh

268Fh

9873

9874

9875

9876

2690h

2691h

2692h

2693h

2694h

9877

9878

9879

9880

2695h

2696h

2697h

2698h

Reserved

Unable to find designated database

Unable to find designated Table. Or, there are no records in the designated Table

Unable to find the designated field name

Unable to find the designated data

Field data is incorrect

Validation failed

Error occurred while accessing the database

Unable to create the Pro-Server handle

There are no character data

Reserved

Meaning

Unable to open Action Report Sheet Template, or unable to append sheet

Failed to start EXCEL

Unable to open Template Book

Action System Error

Unable to save Output Book

Designated Template Sheet(%s) does not exist in Template Book

Failed to append sheet

Unable to interpret command (%s) and cannot execute

Failed to print

Designated data type is not supported

Pro-Server version is old and cannot be started

Action Report sheet is corrupted

Designated group does not exist

Unable to paste image

File header is corrupted - unable to read

Unable to open designated CSV file (%s)

Action Area Size is too small

Unable to create or read temporary file

No usable files exist in GP/GLC

Designated data type is not supported

A file name is too long, and Output Book can’t be make

An error occurred while macro run. Refer to Log Viewer for the details

Unable to save GP Screen Capture data.

Check if the Permission Flag has turned ON.

The file name is error.

The specified file does not exist in the CF card.

Not the browser application's designated folder. Browser cannot be displayed.

Error downloading Binary file

Binary file Read failed

Binary file Open error

Binary file Analysis failed

Error writing to Excel file

Error writing to CSV file

Error creating Binary file

Designated file does not exist

Conversion from Excel file to Binary file failed

Conversion from CSV file to Binary file failed

Provided data is outside range

A-9

Error Code

Decimal

9881

9882

9883

Hex.

2699h

269Ah

269Bh

9884

9885

9886

269Ch

269Dh

269Eh

9887

9888

9889

9891

9892

9893

9894

269Fh

26A0h

26A1h

26A3h

26A4h

26A5h

26A6h

Meaning

Failed in GP log data upload.

There is no data to support.

This data requires more than one sheet.

Microsoft Excel is not installed on this machine.

Wrong parameter is designated.

Failed to write data.

Failed to read CSV file.

An error occurred in deleting an unnecessary file.

Action Failed.

No corresponding data in ACCESS file.

Command error.

Failed in automatic upload of ACCESS data.

Cannot open the specified table.

A.2 Error Messages

A-10

A.2 Error Messages

A.2.2 2-Way Driver Error Messages and Syslog Features

The ECOM task displays the following error information on the lower left of the screen.

Screen Display

SYSTEM ERROR

2Way ERROR

Meaning

System call error

2-Way Driver error

System Errors

A system error is a fatal error.

2-Way Errors

A 2-Way error is an error that has occurred due to the 2-Way Driver.

When a 2-Way error occurs, the [2-Way Transfer Error Code] is saved to the GP unit’s LS2075 address.

Syntax: 2Way ERROR(<Cause No.>:<Error No. 1>:<Error No. 2>:<Error No. 3>)

Reason

Code

Error

Ty pe

Error No.

Reason Workaround

1 2 3

30

31

32

40

41

51

F0

Fatal

Fatal

Fatal

Fatal

Fatal

Fatal

Warning

Unused Unused

Unused Unused

Unused Unused

Unused Unused

Unused Unused

0

0

0

0

Unused

Unused

Unused

Unused

Unused

Unused

Unused

Unused

Unused Unused Refer to protocol stack error codes

2580

25A8

25A9

Insufficient GP resources.

Cannot release GP resources

Cannot release GP resources

IP address & Port number are not registered.

The sy mbol state is different than

GLC control.

Protocol Stack Call up error.

After transmit command w as sent,

Dev ice Read w as ignored due to insufficient Receiv er memory .

After transmit command w as sent,

Receiv er unable to find data.

After transmit command (w ith reply ) w as sent, no reply w as receiv ed from Receiv er.

Internal problem. Please call the support dial w hen it occurred.

Internal problem. Please call the support dial w hen it occurred.

Internal problem. Please call the support dial w hen it occurred.

Either the GP's IP address or the port number has not been set. Reset it such as on the offline screen.

The GLC sy mbol differs from the sy mbol imported to the netw ork project of Pro-Serv er. Import the latest sy mbol to the netw ork project, and then transfer it to GLC.

This means that an error occurred w ith the GP's communication program (TCP/IP). Indicates that an error occurred w ith the GP communication program (TCP/IP). Check the contents of the

Ethernet setting in the offline screen.

Receiv ing memories may lack at the node to be prov ided. Either lengthen the issuing interv al of the prov ider command or decrease the v olume of sending data.

Netw ork project files are different betw een the node to be prov ided and the prov ider source. Transfer the same netw ork project file.

Either communication damage has occurred or prov ider information may differ. Either check communication state or transfer the netw ork project file again.

Unused

Code is different from abov e

Refer to "A.2.1 Pro-Serv er w ith Pro-Studio for Window s Error Messages"

1

GP error

Refer to the manual of each

PC maker.

After issuing a prov ider command, dev ice w rite failed at the node to be prov ided. (Refer to the manual of each PC maker.)

Write failed due to a communication error occurred w ith PLC. Refer to the operation manual of the

PLC maker and check w orkaround corresponding to the error code.

2-Way Error

Code

FF30

FF31

FF32

FF40

FF41

FF51

2580

25A8

25A9

Code is different from abov e

FFF0

A-11

A.2 Error Messages

Protocol Stack Error Codes

The following protocol stack error codes are displayed on the GP screen.

Error Code

1000

1005

1006

1007

1008

1009

100A

100B

100C

100D

100E

100F

1010

1013

101D

1030

1032

Meaning

Current node IP Address entry failed during initialization

Initialization failed

Transmit Halt processing failed

Workaround

The IP address setup of the self node is incorrect. Reset it such as on the offline screen.

Check if the Ethernet unit is normally set.

Internal problem. Please call the support dial when it occurred.

Initialization is performed again, without previous initialization being completely terminated

Internal problem. Please call the support dial when it occurred.

Provider Node Port number error.

Receiver Node port number error.

Receiver Node IP Address error.

UDP was used to register this port number.

TCP was used to connect an adjacent port with a port having the same number.

Protocol Stack establishment refused

Protocol Stack Open

Failure(value)was returned

The(communication)connection has been cut.

All connections are currently in use.

Receiver has aborted(communication).

No Ethernet controller

No response from the protocol stack.

No response from the Receiver.

The port number of the self node is out the designated range. Reset it such as on the offline screen.

The port number of the partner node is out the designated range. Reset it such as on the offline screen.

The IP address setup of the partner node is incorrect. Reset it such as on the offline screen.

The port number of PLC communication overlaps with that for 2Way. Check the setup of the self node port.

The TCP port is used for the same partner node using the same port number. Check if the port number of the partner node is duplicated.

Internal problem. Please call the support dial when it occurred.

Internal problem. Please call the support dial when it occurred.

The TCP connection is closed by the partner node. Check if there are any problems with the communication setup.

The communication connection with GP is at maximum. Exit one application, and then reconnect it.

The TCP connection is aborted by the partner node. Check if there are any problems with the communication setup.

Expansion Ethernet unit is required when using GP-2401/GP-2501/GP-2601

Series units

Internal problem. Please call the support dial when it occurred.

A problem occurred on communication with the partner node. Check the connection state including cables.

• When the error type is fatal, the 2-Way Driver cannot be restored.

• When the error type is Warning, the 2-Way Driver continues to operate.Once

the cause of the error is removed, the error display will disappear when the

GP’s screen changes.

• When the Reason Code is “F0” the “Alarm Issued Time” and “Receiver IP

Address” will also be displayed.

A-12

A.2 Error Messages

SYSLOG

If the SYSLOG file(SYSLOG.EXE), located inside the Pro-Server’s system folder, is started, the following data can be checked. The 2-Way Driver downloaded to the GP can perform a variety of tasks, among them being the output of SYSLOG data.

You can select the type of SYSLOG data output via the GP OFFLINE mode’s[SYSLOG Information

Settings]. The correspondence of the Output Level and the output producing SYSLOG Priority level is shown below.

Output Level

0

1

2

3

4

SYSLOG Output Priority Level

No correspondence

INFO,

INFO,NOTICE

INFO,NOTICE,WARNING

INFO,NOTICE,WARNING,DEBUG

SYSLOG Output Information

SYSLOG Level

INFO

INFO

WARNING

DEBUG

DEBUG

DEBUG

ECOM Response

Starts ONLINE

Starts OFFLINE

Processing Failed

Device Read

Device Write

Command Received

DEBUG

DEBUG

Command Sent s201 File Read

SYSLOG Text gp[17]: start online gp[17]: start offline gp[17]: bel: fail, <Processing Failed Text> <Argument1> gp[17]: rdev: <Argument2> gp[17]: wdev: <Argument2> gp[17]: bel: <Command Text1>, recv from <IP address>(<port>)<Argument3> gp[17]: bel: <Command Text2>, send to <IP address>(<port>)<Argument3> gp[17]: bel: <Command Text3> <Argument4> send to <IP address>

Failed Processing String read device write device sync provide, response timeout sync provide, fail to read device lack memory first trigger on second trigger on backup data read

Meaning

Failed in reading from the device

Failed in writing to the device.

No return data received from the receiver node after providing data.

Failed in reading from the device when providing data.

Command ignored due to insufficient 2-Way driver memory.

The command to enable the first trigger failed.

The command to enable the second trigger failed.

Failed in reading the backup data.

Command String 1 response sync provide read device write device get node property first trigger on second trigger on backup data read

Contents

Receives the response.

Provides the data.

Reads from the device.

Writes to the device.

Reads the node property.

Enables the first trigger.

Enables the second trigger.

Reads the backup data.

A-13

A.2 Error Messages

Command String 2 sync provide, broadcast sync provide, send each sync provide, broadcast and wait for response sync provide, send each and wait for response sync provide, response read device, response write device, response write device, response(retry) get node property, response first trigger on, response second trigger on, response backup data read, response

Command String 3 register as sender register as receiver

Contents

Provides the data(Broadcast, no response).

Provides the data(Peer to Peer, no response).

Provides the data(Broadcast, with response).

Provides the data(Peer to Peer, with response).

Provide data response.

Device read response.

Device write response.

Write to device(Retry)response.

Read node property response.

First trigger enable response.

Second trigger enable response.

Read backup data response.

Contents

Registers provide data command as sender(provider).

Registers provide data command as receiver.

Argument1(<String>=<Value>)

String err pr ow ma mi

Value

Error No.

ProjectID

OwnerApp

MajorNo

MinorNo

Argument2(<String>=<Value>)

String code addr pack kind count d0

Value

Device code

Device address

DataPack

DataKind

Data count by word

First data (1WORD) pr ow ma mi dl va

Argument3(<String>=<Value>)

String

Value

ProjectID

OwnerApp

MajorNo

MinorNo

DataLen

Validity rn pack kind count howto ext code addr retry wait

Argument4(<String>=<Value>)

String Value

ResourceNo

DataPack

DataKind

ProvidCount

HowTo

ExtDevType

Device code

Device address

RetryCount

RetryWaitTime

Value display format

Hex.

Hex.

Hex.

Hex.

Hex.

Value display format

Hex.

Hex.

Hex.

Hex.

Hex.

Hex.

Value display format

Hex.

Hex.

Hex.

Hex.

Hex.

Hex.

Value display format

Hex.

Hex.

Hex.

Hex.

Hex.

Hex.

Hex.

Hex.

Hex.

Hex.

A-14

A.3 Scale Conversion using Excel

Scale Con ver sion using Excel

This section explains the use of Microsoft Excel’s scale conversion feature for input data.

The following example converts a range of 1 to 1000 to a range of 1 to 100.

C2: Minimum input value

D2: Maximum input value

E2: Minimum conversion value

F2: Maximum conversion value

D4: Input value

H4: Conversion value

The formula for H4 is as follows:

=IF(((D4/(D2/F2))<1),1,QUOTIENT(D4/(D2/F2),1))

To use the abovementioned formula, you must first install Excel’s [Analysis

ToolPack]. To do this, us Excel’s [Tools] -> [Add-Ins] dialog to add the [Analysis ToolPack].

A-15

A.4 GP Ethernet Settings

Prior to sending data to the GP, the proper settings must be entered. After data transfer or setup are finished, the GP’s OFFLINE menu will appear. Select[INITIALIZE], [SETUP OPERATION SURROUNDINGS], and then[EXTENDED SETTINGS]and the following screen will appear.

When using the 2-Way driver, perform self-diagnosis of the Ethernet unit from the following Extended Settings screen, not from the OFFLINE mode’s

Main Menu screen.

Extended Settings

The screens shown here are setup examples.

[1]ETHERNET SETUP

• MY IP ADDRESS

Designate the IP address on your GP node.

The IP addresses 32 bits used are divided into 4 groups of

8. Use Base 10 numbers only.

• SUBNET MASK

Designate the subnet mask.

If unused, enter all zeroes here.

• MY PORT NO.

Designate the port no. on your node.

Port number range is from 1024 to 65535. Sequential ten ports from MY PORT NO. are used.

• GATEWAY

Designate the IP address of gateway.

If unused, enter all zeroes here. There is only one

GATEWAY setting. If unused, enter all zeroes here.

A-16

[2]SYSLOG SETUP

[3]OTHERS SETUP

A.4 GP Ethernet Settings

• HOST IP ADDRESS

Designate the IP address for the SYSLOG destination output. (Where GPSYSLOG.EXE is running.)

• FACILITY

(Default value:1) reserved

You may not change the default value.

• OUTPUT LEVEL

Designate the output level.

(Setting range: 0 to 4, Default value: 0)

• BUZZER ON ERROR

Select if buzzer sounds when a 2-Way Driver error occurs.

(Default value: ON)

• DISPLAY WARNING

Select if warning messages are displayed on the GP’s screen.

A-17

A.5 Optimizing Communication Speed

Optimizing Comm unication Speed

If there are any problems with the processing speed of the system related to Pro-Server, optimize the processing speed according to the following contents.

Optimizing Provider Data Count

If there are many number of provider data, the processing speed of 2Way Driver/Pro-Server becomes slow.

For provider data, the address of device which executes provider processing should be put together in a sequential way as much as possible so that it can be provided at one time.

Bit device should be put together in word data rather than setting provider record/provider data per bit so that it can be provided at one time.

Optimizing Providing Condition

When you have set “Interval” in “Providing Condition” of provider information, if you set interval short

(e.g. 0ms), 2Way Driver/Pro-Server will be dedicated to it and the overall system speed will become slow.

If it is not necessary for the provider sheet to check provider trigger frequently, designate check interval as long as possible according to the system specification.

Optimizing Action Item Count

If you register one action on Pro-Server, one thread will be created. If more than one thread is created, overall application processing will become slow in a PC. You should design the same action contents to be covered by one action registration as much as possible.

Streamlining Check Interval Setting

When providing more than one device, if you set check interval separately, check interval does not overlap so that it can reduce a burden on the system.

A-18

A.5 Optimizing Communication Speed

Optimizing Device Access

When you access to more than one device of more than one node on Pro-Server, you should put data together in the internal LS area of Pro-Server using provider processing than accessing to device directly per node. For an application (including an action), you can ease the communication burden by establishing the system to access to the internal LS area where data are put together.

<Slow Case>

GP/GLC/Factory Gateway

Application

(Including an

Action)

Pro-Server

GP/GLC/Factory Gateway

GP/GLC/Factory Gateway

To check data of 3 nodes, - time is required.

<Improved Case>

Application

(Including an

Action)

Pro-Server’s

LS Area

GP/GLC/Factory Gateway

GP/GLC/Factory Gateway

GP/GLC/Factory Gateway

Because , ’ and ” are done simultaneously, data of 3 nodes can be check during plus time.

A-19

A.6 Changing Windows XP Security Level

Changing Windo ws XP Security Le vel

When using the OPC interface feature, the security level must be set to the same level as Windows 2000. The following explanation describes how to set this level.

When changing the Windows XP security level to the level of Windows 2000, the security level will be reduced.

Security Level Change Procedure

1.

Select “Administrative Tools” from the Control Panel.

2.

Select “Local Security Policy”.

A-20

A.6 Changing Windows XP Security Level

3.

Select “Network access: Sharing and security model for local accounts” from the Local

Security Policy menu.

4.

Select “Classic - local users authenticate as themselves” and click the OK button.

A-21

A.6 Changing Windows XP Security Level

5.

Check that the Security Settings is changed to “Classic - local users authenticate as themselves” and close the Local Security Settings dialog box.

A-22

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement